ARCHITECTURAL BUILDING MATERIALS THE NEW LADDER TYPE CURRICULUM GEORGE SALINDA SALVAN ...

. uap ASSISTANT PROFESSOR College of Engineering and Architecture Baguio Cotleges Foundation First and tone graduate of B.S. Archifecture, 1963 in Northern Luzon, St. Louis University Baguio City Former instructor 196!). 1969 at St. Lc;>uis Uoiversity Recipient of various ACE certificates, Architects Continuing Education Program A licensed Architect, active practitioner and a licensed building constructor, inventor and a board topnotcher. Past president of United Architects Phils Baguio Chapter. Elected National Director; UAP, Regional District I for the year 1987. Member, College of Fellows, UAP 1988 JMC PRESS, INC. 388 Quezon Avenue, Quezon City Copyright 1986 by: JMC PRESS, INC. and GEORGES. SALVAN All rights 1'9$8rved. No part of this book ma'f be reproduced in any manneJ without permission of the publisher. FIRST EDITION ISBN: 971-11-0321-4 Published and Printed by: JMC PRESS, INC. 388 Quezon Avenue, Quezon City Distributed by: GOODWILL BOOKSTORE Main Office: Rizal Avenue, Manila P .0 . Box 2942, Manila Dedicated to all future Architects and Engineers The hope for a functional, comfortable and convenient designs for better living. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The completion of this book was made a reality through the patient and hardworki ng efforts of the artist and graduate of architecture, Mr. Fermin 0 . Balangcod. Special thanks are also acknowledged to the artists who contributed in making th e drawings notably, Clamor C. Lecitona from NU, who also helped in the cover design; Johnny Camsol, Jeny Jun Suyat, Roy Pagador, Rev Puno, and James Fioresca, all from BCF, Baguio City. To the ones who lent unselfishly their books, like Dean Avelino Cruz of BCF, and to the BCF librarian Mr. Macabiog, .. to Arcnitect Rogelio Naz of St. Louis Universit y, Companies or of materials a!!K> eent _han<!books and catalogues. To Mr. Luis V. Canave who guided me on the comp\ete process of publishing and pr inting of books and to Mr. Francisco C. Ma6csi, Teresita G. Espinoza, Eduardo C. V

illanueva and Enrico P. Gomez for their untiring cooperation in preparing the manuscripts typ ewritten by Thelma T. Viilareal in computerized typesetting. To the many students of architecture whose curiosity about and interestin th e Building Materials and its realization in book form have been a source of inspiration. v PREFACE Design and construction in the Philippines for the past 20 years had grown stead ily and the . continuous introduction of neW products made it-difficult for those who are-no t aware of. these new materials in the market to cope up with their specifications. In the many years of teaching the subject of building materials and in the exper ience of the author in actual practice, it was found out that there is a need to compile and arrange these building materials in such a way that the topic is discussed with an accompanyin g illustrations, brief specifications and labelings for easy comprehension. This book discusses the properties of building materials, their application and articulation, system of construction, methods for specifying and their character in use. It is arranged in such a manner that the reader is provided with adequate knowledge on the char acteristic uses Of building materials. It also equips the reader with sufficient skill in t he selection of and specification of building materials. With the new curriculum revised by the Ministry of Education with the United Arc hitects of the Philippines, the syllabus of instruction has been changed to include practic ally all the materials involved in the building construction field. This book is arranged in su ch a manner as to introduce to the reader the qualities of wood, concrete, stone, steel, plasti c, bituminous materials and others. After the reader is equipped with these knowledge, the aut hor arranged the chapters in such a way as to place the materials in its proper order as floo ring materials whether wood or concrete, walling materials for use in interiors and exterior s, and ceiling materials and roofing materials. Another important topic included is the chapter on building protection which include among others the waterproofing, fijtproofing, fireproof ing, burglar proofing and many other protections which is common to buildings especially when it is already existing .. At the end of the chapter is also included the summarized fo rm of a bill of materials and specifications which is commonly encountered in the. actual field. vii TABLE OF Chapter Cements, Types of Concrete CONTENTS 1 CONCRETE AND CONCRETE PRODUCTS .............................. 1 2 Aggregates, 2 Mixes, 2

Concrete Additives, 4 Concrete Products, 9 Construction Equipments, 12 Concrete Price List, 14 Chapter 2 CERAMICS AND CLAY PRODUCTS ....................................... 15 Brick, 16 Tile, 18 Terra Cotta, 21 Ceramic Veneer, 21 .:h3pter 3 BUILDING STONES, GYPSUM AND LIME .............................. 23 Building Stones, 24 Stone Construction, 25 Gypsum, 29 Chapter 4 WOOD AND WOOD PRODUCTS ............................................. 33 Wood,34 Moisture in Wood, 35 Seasoning of Lumber, 36 Unit of Measurement, 37 Glue Laminated Timber, :rl Glue Used in Laminating, 39 Chapter 5 RECYCLED WASTE PRODUCTS BUILDING BOARDS AND PAPERS ........................................................... 41 Building Boards, 42 Building Papers, 48 Chapter 6 BITUMINOUS MATERIAL .......... 0 ................................. ....... ~ 51 Bitumen, 52 Chapter 7 FERROUS AND NON FERROUS METALS .............................. 55 Ferrous Metal, 56 Non Hlrrous Metal, 61 Chapter 8 GLASS AND GLAZING .................................................. .......... 63 Glass, 64 Glass Products, 68 Chapter 9 PLASTICS AND RELATED PRODUCTS ................................... 71 Plastic, 72 Chapter 10 ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS ............................................ .... i7 Glues, 78 Sealers, 79 Glazing and Caulking Compounds, 81 Chapter 11 INSULATING MATERIALS ......... ------ 85 Thermal Insulations, 86 ix chapter 12 BUILDING PROTECTION .................. .. .............. ............ ........... !n Water Proofing, 95 Damp-Proofing, 114 Clear Silicone Water Repellant, 116 "ANAY" Proofing-soil Poisoning, 117 Wood Preservation, 119 Fire Protection, 121 Rat-proofing, 123 Rust Proofing, 123

Floor Protection and Surfacing, 126 Descalers, Paint and Chemical Strippers, 129 Chesterton Descaler and Chemical Cleaner, 129 Control, Project and Manage, 129 Chapter 13 PAINTS AND COATINGS ............................................... .. .. .... 131 Paint, 132 Varnishes, 134 Enamels, 135 Shellac, 135 Lacquers, 135 Stains, 136 Fillers, 137 Sealers, 137 Silicone Water Repellant, 137 Product Names, 138 EXTERIOR WORK PAINTING - Cement Plaster Sprayed Cement and Concrete, 139 - Hollow Block Masonry, 140 - Woodsiding, Paneling, Trims, Fascias Eaves, Soffits, 141 - Galvanized Iron Sheet Roofing, Gutters, 143 - Cappings, Conductors, Flashing, 144 - Asbestos and Ceramics, 145 EXTERIOR & INTERIOR WORK PAINTING - Metal Sash, trims, mullions, ornamental iron and other Ferrous Metal Surfaces, 146 - All non-pai nted concrete, Synthetic finishes, rubble, brick and washout, 147 INTERIOR WORK PAINTING - Woodwork, Plywood, Wall and Ceiling, 147 - Acoustical Wall and Ceiling, 149 - Wood Paneling; D9or, Closet Gabinets, 150 - Doors, closet and Cabinet work (Kitchen subjected to Water), 151 INTERIOR WORK - Cement Plaster Sprayed Cement and Concrete, 153 - Hollow Block Masonry, 156 - Application of Paint, 157 - Brands of Paints, 157 Chapter 14 HARDWARES ...... ..... ... .... . : ....... ............ ......... ........... ......... ... . Doors, 160 To Hung a Door, 164 159 Rough Hardware, 168 To Fix One Sash, 172 To Lock the Door, 174 Automatic Door Closer, 178 Hinges (Light), 181 Catch, 186 Knobs, 185 Pulls, 185 Hook and Eyes, 187 Screws, 169 Washers, 170 Bolts, 170 Nuts, 170 Door Stoppers, Bumpers; 188 Chapter 15 PLUMBING MATERIALS .... ... .. ... ........ ...... ... . .. .. . .. .. .. ... . . . .. . . .. .. .. 189

Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings, 190 Special Cast Iron Fittings, 194 Plastic Pipes and Fittings (Drainage), 195 Asbestos Pipe and Fittings, 196 Vitrified Clay Pipes, 197 Galvanized Steel Pipe Fittings, 199 Plastic Pipes and Fittings, 201 Plumbing Fixtures, 202 Chapter 16 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS .............................................. ........ 211 Types of Convenience Outlets, 212 Types of Switches, 212 Junction Boxes, 213 Porcelain Insulators, 213 Fuses, 214 Conduit Fitting, 215 Conductors, 216 Switch Box, 216 Architectural Lamps etc., 217 Chapter 17 .FLOORING MATERIALS Wood Flooring, 222 Concrete FJooring, 224 Clay-tile Flooring, 226 Asphlat Flooring, 232 Terrazzo Flooring, 233 Plastic Flooring, 234 Magnesite Flooring, 235 Rubber Flooring, 235 Cork FloorinQ. 236 Pebble Washout, 236 Marble, 237 Crazy Cut Marble, 237 221 Chapter 18 WALLING MATERIALS .................................................. .......... 239 INTERIOR FINISHES MATERIALS: Wood Finishes, 240 Gypsum Finishes, 241 Clay Finishes, 242 Stone Finishes, 246 Concrete Finishes, 246 Building Boards, 248 Wall, Paper, 249 Wall Coverirn:J, 24.q xi Chapter 19 Chapter20 Glass, 251 Steel, 252 Non-Ferrous Metals, 253 Plastics, 253 Paints, 254 EXTERIOR WALL MATERIALS Types of Walls, 256 Curtain Wall, 25e ANISHING MATERIALS: -Stucco, 256 - Brick Veneer, 258 -Artificial Stone Veneer, 258 -.Natural Stone Veneer, 258

- Terra-Cotta Facing, 259 - Wood Siding, 260 - Boards an<:t Battens, 260 - Aluminum Siding, 260 - Meta4, 261 - Plywood, 261 - Wood Shakes and Shingles, 262 . - Hardboard Siding, 263 -Asbestos-Cement Siding and Siding Shingles, 263 -Brick, 264 - Tile, Ceramic, Veneer and Terra-Cotta, 264 - Stone (Marble}, 266 - Precast Concrete Slabs, 266 Washout Finishes, 267 Synthetic Adobe Brick, 2ffl Sandblasting, E Bush-hammered Finish, 268 Gtass, 268 Plastic, 268 Logs, 269 CEILING AND ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS . . . . .. . . ... .. . .. .. . ....... .. . . 271 Suspended Ceiling, 272 Material$ Used for Ceiling Panels, 273 Brand for Sprayed on Materials, 273 Acoustical Materials, 274 ROOFING MATERIALS . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .... .. . .. .. .. .. .. 281 Roof Styles, 282 . Roof Slopes in Run & Rise, Pitches and Degrees, 284 ROOFING MATERIALS: - Shingles; Wood Shakes, 286 - Roofing Tiles and Sheathing, 285, 290 -Sheet Metal Roofing, 293 -Asbestos- Cement Sheet, Roofing, 298 - Built-up Roofing, 300 - Rolled Roofing, 302 - Sprayed on asphalt Roofing, 302 -Glass Roofing, 303 - Pl'astic Roofing, 303 - Milano Design Roofing, 303 - Banaue Design, .304 Chsptel' 21 SAMPLE FORMS ...................................................... ................ :J:TJ Outline Estimates (Bill of Materials), Outline Specification, xii CHAPTER 2 CEMENTS PORTLAND CEMENT Made from mate.rials which must contain the proper proportions of lime, silica, alumina and iron components. Four parts of limestone to one part clay are the basic ingredients. These are mixed, burned . then pulverized. Portland cement is sold either in cement bags of 40 kilos weight or in BULK into cement trucks.

SPECIAL CEMENTS 1. White Portlahd Cement Same materials as normal portland except in color. The manufacturing proc ess is controlled to produce a pure white, non-staining cement. It is used primarily for a rchitectural purposes such as curtain wall and facing panels, decorative concrete s tucco and tile grout, or wherever white or colored concrete or mortar is specifted. 2. Masonry Cement Has been specially designed to produce better mortar than that made with normal portland cement or with a lime-cement combination . The mortar made with this cement has particularly good plasticity and workability, good adhesion and bond. 3. Air-entraining Portland Cement Small amounts of certain air-entraining agents are added to the clinker and grou nd with it to produce air entraining cements, effective use for resistance to severe frost . 4 Oil Well Cement This is a special portland cement used for sealing oil wells. It must be slow setting andresistant to high temperatures and pressures. 5. Waterproofed Portland Cement Normally proauced by adding a small amount of stearate, usually calcium or alumi num to the cement clinker during the final grinding. TYPES OF AGGREGATES USED IN CONCRETE Concrete can be considered to be an artificial stone made by binding together particles of some inert material with a paste made of cement and water. These inert material are the aggregate_. Aggregates used are sand, gravel crushed stone, cinder, crush ed furnace slag, bumed clay, expanded vermiculite, and perlite . . sand -foUnd in riVerbeds, free of salt and must b8 washed. fine aggregate-smaller than 1/ 4" diameter scones. course aggregate - bigger than 1/4'" diameter stones. CONCRETE MIXES Class "AA'' I Class A Class B Class C 1:11/2:3 1:2:4 1:2 1/ 2:5 1:3:6 Example of Class "A" mix: concrete under water, retaining walls footings, columns beams. R.C. slabs slab on fill, non bearing walls concrete plant boxes, etc. One part cement is to two parts sand plus four parts gravel. The designing of concrete mixtures is based primarily on the water-cemen t ratio theory, which states that the strength of concrete is inversely proportional to the amou nt of water used per unit (1b) of cement.

This means that if. for example, 68 lb. of water per lb. of cement will produce concrete capable of developing 2,500 psi in 28 days, then less water per bag will p roduce stronger eoncrete and more water will produce concrete of lesser strength. Compressive strength of concrete for various water-cement ratios Water cement ratio lb. per lb. of cement 0.75 0.68 0.62 0.56 0.50 0.45 0.41 0.38 0.34 CONTROL OF CONCRETE MIXES Probable compressive at 28 days, psi Plain concrete 2,000 2,500 3,000 3,500 4,000 4,500 5,000 5,500 6,000 Slump test-When;frellhlymixed concrete is checked to ensure that the specified s lump is being attained consistently. A standard slump cc;me is 12 inches high (0.30) and 8 inches (0.20) in diameter at the bottom and 4 inches (0.10) on top which is open on bot h ends. X=2'" to 4" or 0.05 to 0.10 for beam, 12" column, slab. 1 The cone is filled in t"ree equal layers, each being tamped or ro.dded 25 t imes with a standard 5/8" bullet nosed rod. When the cone has been filled and leveled off, i t is lifted carefully and the amount of slump is measured. Allowable Deflecti on 'X' Beams and columns Slabs and tunnel inverts Tops and walls, pi'ers, parapet & curbs Side walls and arch in tunnet lining Canal lining Heavy mass construction 7.5 em (.075) 3" 5.0 em (.05 ) 2" 5.0 em (.05 ) 2"' 10.0 em (.10 ) 4'" 7.5 em (.075) 3" 5.0 em (.05 } 2"' 3 4

Compressive Strength Test-Common quality-control test of concrete, based on 7 an d 28 day curing periods. SPecimens are usually cylindrical with a length equal to twice the diameter. Standard size.is 12 inch high and 6 inch diameter. Filling is done the sameway as the slump test but taken out from the mold in 24 hours. It is then sent to a compression testing laboratory, by marking the cylinder while still wet. Some compressive stresses are 2,000 psi, 2,500 psl, 3,000 psi. BRANDS OF PORTLAND CEMENT 1. Island cement 6. Filipinas cement 2. Continental cement 7. Pacific cement 3. Hi-cement 8. Fortune cement 4. Union cement 9. Republic cement 5. Rizal cement 10. Northern cement BRANDS OF WHITE CEMENT 1. Prime White cement 2. Keene 3. Trinity 4. Snowcrete CONCRETE ADDITIVES In addition to the basic ingredients of concrete. other materials are often adde d to the mix or applied to the surface of freshly placed concrete to produce some special result . These materials are known as concrete additives and may be used for one of the follow ing reasons: 1. To speed up the i ni 1 ial set of concrete. 2. Toretard the initial set. 3. To make the concrete more resistant to deterioration due to repeated freez ing and thawing cycles. 4. To prevent bleeding of watet to the sur:face of concrete. 5. To improve the workability of the mix. 6. To improve the hardness or denseness ot the concrete surface. 7. To render the concrete more water tight. 8. To improve the bond between two concrete surfaces. 9. To inhibit the set of cement oaste. 10. To produce a colored surface. 11. To produce a nOt tskid sur:face. 12. To prevent the evaporation ot water from thP. newly placed concrete. 13. To help develop all the potenti ai strEngth of a given water -cement pa ste. 14. To decrease the weight of concrete per cubic foot. ,ACCELERATORS An admixture which is used to speed up the initial set of concrete .. Such a m aterial may be added to the mix to increase the rate of early-strength development for several reasons. For example, this will allow earlier removal of forms and in some cases reduce the w hole curing period. RETARDERS The function of a retarder is to delay or extend the setting time of the cement paste in concrete. In hot weather hydration is accelerated by the heat, thus cutting down t he time avail. able to place, consolidate, and finish the concrete. High temperatures,

low humidity and wind cause rapid evaporation of water from the mix during summer. This drying of the concrete leads to cracking and crazing of the surtace. An initial set retarder will hold back the process, leaving more water for workability and allowing concrete to be finished and .protected before drying out. A retarder is usually used in bridge construction, since girders or beams are d esigned with a camber and will be deflected as the load of the bridge deck is applied. The init ial pours may be partially set before paving of the bridge deck is complete if a retarderis no t used. As further deflection takes place, this concrete being no longer plastic. will be sub jeC?ted to stress and may crack. It is also important to use a retarder in casting pr estressed concrete. members. Since prestress beds are usually long, up to 300ft. or more, it takes a considerable time to place and consolidate the entire pour. It is desirable to keep the concr ete plastic until vibrating is completed to ensure a good bond between concrete and prestressed st eel along the entire length of the bed. Retarders are also helpful for concrete that has to be hauled long distance s in transit mix trucks, to ensure that it reaches its destination in a plastic and placeable condition. . AIR-ENTRAINING AGENTS Air entrained concrete contains microscopic bubbles of air formed with the aid o f a group of chemicals called surface active agents, materials that have the of redu cing the surface tension of water intended for use when be:tter resistance to frost action is concerned. DISPERSAL AGENTS When cement and water are mixed, the cement particles tend to gather in clumps, or to flocculate. As a result water does not reach some of the particles and some are onl y partialiy hydrated. Sometimes only 50 percent of the cement is hydrated. Water trapped within these clumps later bleeds to the surface of the concrete, b ecause of the weight of the other materials. The voids left by the forcing out of the water later become passages through which water can penetrate the concrete. A cement dispersal agent such as calcium lignosulfonate causes cement partic les to separate by imparting like electrostatic charges to them. CONCRETE HARDENERS Plain concrete surfaces which are subjected to rolliog live loads, the impac t action of foot traffic, and other types of wear begin to dust and crumble at the surtace af ter a period of time. This condition worsens with time, finally resulting in the destruction of the surtace. 5 6 To prevent this, two types of concrete hardeners are used. 1. Chemical hardeners-liquids containing silicoflourides or fluosilicates a

nd ting agent which reduces the surface tension of the liquid and allows it to p enetrate the pores of the concrete more easily. The silicoflourides or fluosili cates combine chemically with the free lime and calcium carbonate which are present in the concrete.and bind the fine particles in.to a flintlike topping; which is hi ghly resistant to wear and dusting. 2. Fine metallic aggregate -are specially processed and graded iron par which are dry-mixed with portland cement, spread evenly over the surface of freshly ftoated concrete, and worked into the surface by floating. The result is a hard, tough topping which is highly resistant to wear and less brittle than normal concre te. WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURES A material used to reduce the amount of water necessary to produce a concrete of given consistency or to increase the slump for a given water A typical one i s made from the metallic. salts of figninsulfonic acids. More water than is actually required for the hydration of the cement must be used in any given concrete mix in order to give it placeability. Unless the water content is carefully conexcess water may bleed to the surface of the concrete, causing segrega tion or surface laitance, or may evaporate, leaving voids which decrease strength a nd increase permeability. Excess water will also dilute and weaken the cement paste. The refore an agent which will decrease the amoung of water required while maintaining consistency and workability is a useful addition to the mix. CONCRETE. WATERPROOFERS Water under pressure and in contact with one surface of the concrete can be forc ed through channels between inner and outer surfaces. A measure of the amount of wate r passing in this way is a measure of permeability; any admixture used to reduce this flow is really a perrriea bil ity reducer. Water also can pass through concrete by the action of capillary forces. If one side is exposed to moisture and the other to air, the water reaching the dry side evaporates , resulting in a flow of moisture through the concrete. Materials used to reduce or stop this ty pe of flow are more properly called damproofers. Materials used to reduce permeability and also a damproofers . a. Air-entraining agent-because it increases the plasticity of concrete and the refore help to make placing easier and more uniform. They also reduce bleeding by holdi ng the water in films about the air bubbles. As damproofer because the small disconnected voids produced by air entrai nment

break up the capillaries in the concrete and therefore offer a barrier to the pa ssage of water by capillary action. b. Cement dispersal agent-Since it tends to reduce voids formed when wa ter is trapped in groups of cement particles. c. Water repellents- Used as damproofing. The materials used are compounds containing calcium or ammonium stearate, calcium or ammonium oleate, or butyl stear ate. These substances are generally combined with lime or calcium chloride. d. Film applied to surface-'-preferab!y the one adjacent to the water sour ce. The common materials are those containing asphalt or sodium silicate and on e which contains a metallic aggregate. ,. The asphaltic products from an impervious coatings. over the surface. The sodi um silicate compounds enter the surface pores and form a gel which prevents water from entering the concrete. The metallic aggregate type of waterproofer consists o f fine cast-iron particles, to which is added a chemical that causes them to oxidize r apidly when mixed with portland cement. BONDING AGENTS When fresh concrete is poured against another' concrete surface already set and at least partially cured, it is often difficult to obtain a bond between the two surfaces u nless special precautions are taken. Fresh concrete shrinks when setting, and unless ther e is a very good bond th.us shrinkage makes the new concrete pull away from the old sur face. a cement - Paste slurry is often applied to such an old surface immediat ely prior to pouring new-concrete to increase the amount of paste. When such a treatment cann ot be applied, bonding agents are used to"join the two surfaces. Two Types: 1. Metallic aggregate -iron particles are larger, but with same materi als as t he permeability reducer. Bonding takes place through the oxidation and subsequent expansi on of the iron particles. -2. Synthstic latex emulsion -consists of a highly polymerized synthetic liq uid resin dis persed in water. When it is sprayed or painted on a concrete surface. the pores in the concrete absorb the water and allow the resin particles to coalesce and bo nd. CONCRETE COLORING AGENTS 1. Use concrete paint, applied after the concrete surface has been ne utralized, either through exposure or by using a neutralizing agent such as zinc sulfate. 2. Integrating color into the surface concrete while it is still fresh. a. Natura= mettalic oxides of cobalt, chromium, iron etc. have distinct

ive colors. The ochres and umbers are fine dry powders. They are usually mixed into a toppin g mix, since this is the best way of distributing the color evenly throughout the co ncrete. b. The coloring agents made with synthetic oxides are usually a mixture of the oxide with one or more additional crying ingredients. The color is sometimes mixed with fin e pure silica sand and applied by shaking the mixture over the freshly poured and float ed surface. SET-INHIBITING AGENTS Specifications sometimes require that concrete surfaces be produced in whic h the aggregates are exposed for architectural effect., Certain inhibiting agents will prevent the ceme.nt paste from bonding to the surface aggregates but will not interfere with the set throughout the remainder of the pour. Two materials are used for this purpose. a. a liquid which is applied to forms for vertical surfaces immediately before pouring concrete and a b. powder which is applied directly to freshly poured surfaces 7 8 The depth of penetration of the innibitor depend's on the amount used per square foot. Usual rates of application will vary from 1 1/ 2 to 3 lb. per sq. ft. of surfa ce. After three or four days of curing, the retarded surface concrete should be hose d or brushed off, exposing cleanaggregate and leaving a rough cast effect. NON-SKID SURFACES To avoid making concrete surfaces slippery, use wood or cork floats which will l eave a rough surface instead of steel .trowelling operation during ttie floor-finishing pr ocess. Another method is to use an abrassive material in the topping, applied as a dry shake in much the same way as metallic-aggregate topping is applied. The abravi se material is f loated, into the top and the steel trowel operation is omitted. Materials comm only used for this purpose are fine particles of .Flint, aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or emery. SURFACE SEALING AGENTS Used for two purposes. 1. To form a watertight coating which will prevent water from evaporating f rom a concrete surface and aiiC\111 it to be retained for hydration. 2. To seal the pores of a concrete surface after it has hardened in order to pr event the p&ssage of water and the absorption of spilled materials such as oil, grease, or paint. Sealing agents used to prevent water evaporation are usually liquid waxes which can be sprayed over the surface but which are easily removed after curing is c omplete.

GAS FORMING AGENTS Under normal conditions concrete undergoes settlement' and drying shrinka ge, which in some situations, can result in undesirable characteristics in the harde ned concrete. For example, voids on the underneath side of forms, blockouts,. reinforcing steel , or other embedded parts such as machinery bases may interfere wit h the bond and allow passage of water and reduce and strength. One method of reducing such voids is to add an expanding agent to the concrete. Aluminum powder, when added to .mortar or concrete, reacts with the hydroxides in hydrati ng cement to produce very small bubbles of hydrogen gas. This action, when properly controlle d. causes a slight expansion in plastic concrete or mortar and thus reduces or eliminates voids caused by settl.ement. POZZOLANIC ADMIXTURES Materials sometimes used in structures where it is desirable to avoid high tempe rature or in. structures exposed to seawater or water containing sulfates. These pozzolanic; m aterials are generally substituted for 10 to 35 percent of the cement. may be a dded to concrete mixes - rather than substituting for part of the cement- to improve workab ility, impermeability, and resistance to chemical attack. A number of natural materials suches diatomaceous earth, opaline cherts and sha les, tuffs and pumicites, arid some artificial materials such as fly ash are used as pozzol ans. (Fly ash is a fine residue which results from the combustion of powdered coal and may contai n various amounts of carbon, silica, sulfur, alkalies, and other ingredients). CONCRETE PRODUCTS Made of lightweight and heavyweight materials for use in exterior and interior load-bearing walls, firewalls, curtain and panel walls, partitions etc. CONCRETE BLOCK Made with both stone and lightweight aggregates. 1: Hollow load-beari(lg concrete block-an 8 ... x 8N x 16" will approximately w eigh 40 to 50 lb. made with heavyweight a99regate and 25 to 351b. when made with li ght weight aggregate. 2. Solid load bearing block --defined as one having a core area of not more tha n 25 percent of the gross cross-sectional area. 3. Hollow; non load bearing concrete block -one in which the core area exceeds 25 . percent of the cross sectional area. 4. Concrete building tile. 5. brick. COMMON SIZE 4" x 8 .. x 16" -for non load bearing partitions 6" x 8,. x 16 .. -for load bearing walls QUALITY a. Hand made-backyard i-ndustry

b. Machine sold c: Steam cured-manufactured by big and nationalty known factories for load bearing waifs. Usually specified for government and multi..m>rey boifdings. 9 10 Some manufacturing steam cured blocks 1. Ramrod 2. Jackbilt 4. Permanent 5. Superior d. Lightweight blocks-when perlite is added to the aggregate to reduce the weight to almost 50%. # CAST STONE Used -to simulate stone from concrete methods. a. By splitting a solid concrete block to expose two rough surfaces. b. By making a mortar of cement and very high quality silica sand and casting it in molds which produces a unit with the face shaped to simulate chipped sand stone, shale or slate done either by placing coloring material on the mold or either by mixing the co lor to the mortar. c. By mixing granite or marble chips with a mortar made with white ceme nt and cast the mortar in a mold with a hard, smooth face. When the unit is. partially cured, it is ground off to expose some stone in the surface, resulting in a terrazo-like appearan ce. PRECAST FACING SLABS Units that can be custom-made any size to fit a particular structure. Facing slabs are precast with either or lightweight aggregates and are fixed to the building by pins or dowels to a steel frame and by metal strap anchors to a concrete or backup wall. CELLULAR CONCRETE BLOCKS A lightweight block which is outstanding in thermal and sound insulati on qualities. The basic ingredients are cement -made from silica-rich sand and lime-water, and al uminum powder. They can be easily cut or sawed to any desired shape "Yith woodworking tools and are laid up in masonry cement or cement -lime mortar. Stucco and plaster can be applied directly to the face of the block, and other materials may be nailed directly to them. Another type of lightweight block Is made by mixing chemically treated wood shav ings with cement paste and forming the resulting r. :ixture into blocks. Three types are made. a. form blocks, b. insulation slabs, c. ceiling blocks. OTHER PRODUCTS 1 . Decorative and concrete blocks- used for sunbaffles and for fences. 2. Concrete sewer and culvert pipes Diameter - 4"0, 6"0, 8"0, 12"0, 24"0 length- 1.00 meter This are the reinforced except the 4"0 d. 3. ConcNte balusters 4. Cement tiles-1" X 8 H X a ..

11 CONSTRUCTION EQU IPMENTS 1. One-bagger concrete mixer 2. Two-bagger concrete mixer 3. Hoist 4. Concrete vibrator 5. Vibratory compactor 6. Conveyor 7. Porta-lift 8. Hollow block machine 9. Buggy-fixed or tiltable 10. Tamping rammer 11. Bar cutter 12. Terrazzo floor grinder 13. Concrete pipe mold 14. Decorative mold 15. Pavement breaker and drilling machine 16. Self-priming pump 1- eAGGER CONCReTE MIXER 12 -BAGGER CONCRETE MIXER . GdGCUNE eNGINE" -,.s TO 1G 8+-IP I Eki?A?L> l=l.a)R GJ.<INDER . 1."-3'!.4" PUMP E M ~ 7M-g' 10 MT<; c.oNVEYOR. 13 PRICE LIST EFFECTIVE JAN. '86 ' PEBBLES: U/COST Black #5, '10, 16.. ... .. .. .. .. .. fl14.00 Buracay 16, 10 . .. . . . . .. .. .. . . 36.00 Buracay (Ml #10 .. .. .. . .. . . . 28.00 Assorted #5, 10, 15 .. . . . . . .. 18.00 Bohol Beige#5 ... . ...... ..... 60.00 Bohol Beige #10..... ...... .... 50.00 Quezon 16, to, 15 .. .. . . .. . . . . 25.00 CRAZY CUT MARBLE: Beige ......................... .. White Mindoro ............. .. Mariposa Red ........ . ........ . Gray .......................... . BabyPink .. .... .... ... ...... .. ADOBE RUBBLES: P240.00/T 750.00/ T 750.00/T 800.00/ T no.oo!T ,16.00/lyr. 50.00/ lyr. 50.00/lyr. 53.30/lyr. 61.30/lyr. Selected White #5.. ..... .... . 90.00 4x 12..... .. .. . ....... ...... . ..

. P 4.00/ pc. 6.50/pc. 7.00/ pc. 8.50/pc. Selected White #tO 75.00 8x 12 ......................... .. Selected White #20 . . . . . . . . . 45.00 12x 12 ..... .......... ...... . . ... . SYNTHETIC ADOBE: White or Natural ........... . Yellow Brown ............ .. . Red ............................. . Black .. ..... .. ..... ... .... ...... . Dark Brown ................ .. Small Shell ... ..... .... .... .. .. . MARBLE CHIPS: White 15, 10, 15 .............. . Beige #5, 10, 15 ...... .. ..... .. Pink 15, 10, 16 .. ........... .. Gray #5, 10, 15 ............. .. Black 15. 10, 15 ............. .. Mariposa #5, 10, 16 MARBLE DUST: , 7.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 , 7.00 P22.00 16.00 28.00 28.00 28.00 28.00 12x 18 ..... ................... . 16 X 24 .......................... . 6x 12 . .... ... .. . ..... ... ....... . 10x10 .. . ....... ... ... ........ .' .. 12 X 16 ...... . ................... . 12x24 ......................... .. MARBLE ASHLAR: 4 x 8 ......... P240.00/m2 2 x 8 .. .. .. .. . 225.00/m2 2 x 12 .. .. .... 186.00/m2 3x 12 ......... 200.00/m2 4 x 12 ..... .. .. 210.00/ m2 MARBLE CUTTER: Tylorit .. .. .. P 90.00/pc. Rasta ...... ... 85.00/pc. Sait... ..... .... 85.00/pc. 16.00/ pc. 7.00/pc. 7.00/pc. 8.00/pc. 15.00/ pc. note: 3"-4"' VIGAN TJLES: 12x 12 ... :.. , 6.00/pc. 10 x 10 ..... : 5.00/ pc.

8 X 8.. ..... .. 4.00/pc, WOOD STRIP: 1/4 .. . .. .. .. .. . fl 3.00/pc. 3/ 4 ........ ... . 3.30/pc. 1/2 .. .. .. .. . .. . 3.50/ pc. Marble Dust White P22.00 Marble Oust Beige.. ... ....... 12.00 BRASS STRIP: DECORATIVE ROCKS: Coda ............. :............. p Teresa Rocks ................. . Petrified Rocks .............. . Flyfly Quarry ................. . Pink Teresa ............... .. . Mindoro Flat ..... .... .. ..... .. Red Corals ........ ........... .. AatStone ... .... .... .. ..... .. . Decorati.ve Shell .......... . . Flyfly Quarry fsm) .......... .. Petrified Rocks (sm) ..... .. . . 14 2mm ......... P 11.00/pc. 3 mm .. ..... .. tt14:00/ pc. 25.00/ can 800.00/m3 1,400.00/mJ 1,200.00/m3 1,000.00/ mJ 1,400.00/m3 1,600.00/ m3 25.00/can 15.00/ can 75.00/can 4mm ......... 19!00/pc. CARBORUNDUM: Tylorit .. .. . . P210.00/ pc. Semi Rough .. ... .. . . . 210.00/pc. Fine Carb:.. .. ... .. .. . 130.00/ pc. Fine Czec. .... ..... ... 75.00/pc. Carb. Czec. . .. .. . . .. 80.00/ pc. Horshow .. ...... .... 250.00/pc. CHAPTER CERAMICS & CLAY PRODUCTS 16 BRICK The basic ingredient of brick is clay-clay which has some specific properties. I t must have plasticity when mixed with water, so that it can be molded or shaped; it must ha ve sufficient tensile strength to keep its shape after forming; and clay particles must fuse together when subjected to sufficiently high ten:tperatures. , Clay occurs in three principal forms. a. surfsce clsy-found near the surface of the earth. b. shllltiS-Ciays whi ch have been subjected to high pressure until they hav e relatively hard. c. fire clays -are found at deeper levels and usually have more uniform physica l and chemical '

:rwo classes of clay 1. Calcareous clays- contains about 15 percent calcium carbonate and burn to a y elloWish color. 2. Noncalcareous clsys -composed of silicate of alumina, with feldspar and iro n oxide. 'These clays bum buff, red or salmon depending on the iron oxide content wh ich vary from 2 to 10 percent. Standard Brick size is 2 1 I 4 x 3 3/4 x 8 in. BRICK TEXTURE Texture are applied by attachments which cut, scratch, brush, roll, or roughen t he s"'rface or by applying or spraying glazes on the brick before or after burning. matt Typical ones are 1) ceramic glaze, consisting of spraying a coating of a mixture of mineral ingredients on one or more surfaces of the brick. The glaze melts and fuses to the brick at a given temperature, producing a glasslike coating which is available in almost a ny color and 2) salt glaze, consisting of solution of sodium iron silicate. Salt glaze is t ransparent so the color of the is presented under a lustruous gloss. BRICK BOUNDS 1. The method of laying bricks in a wall in order to form some distinctive patt ern or design is referred to as the pattern bond. 2. The method by which the individual units in a brick structure are tied toget her either by overlapping or by metal ties is known as the structural bond. 3. The adhesion of mortar to bricks or to steel reinforcements used in conjunct ion with them is called the mortar bond. tmJ J1J1Mirt 9 1xnd 1 JOt :n:::u: Jo =:1or JCJr JCJ..__l _ D U :JI JJ : l[ ll ll _---J:JDl. lDl r:. :J'-l _ _ __,][ JC. a} PATTERN BONO WALL b) SlRUC.TURAL BONO . . BRICK VENEER a.IER A WO(.Qat.J SACK UP 17 18 C.. MORTAR BOND V-j01nt c f l l l ~ TILE STRUCTURAL CLAY TILE-are hollow units as opposed to brick which is solid. Tiles are made from the same material as brick, but all clay tile are formed by ex

trusion in the stiffmud process. Types of Tiles 1. Load bearing wall tile-used for the bearing watts .of light buildings , the height usually restricted to four stories. Struc1uralload bearing wall tile are made i n 4, 6, 8, 10 and 12 in thicknesses. 2. Partition tile-non-load bearing .. 3. Back-up tile-intended for use in both bearing and non-bearing walls which wi ll be faced with brick or facing tile. The facing is bonded to the back up and the loa ds are supported by both. ,, e 4. Furring tile-used on the inside of extericr walls to provide air spaces for insulation to prevent the passage of moisture an9 to provide a suitable plastering surface. Classified as non-load bearing. ,l SPLIT F U R R I ~ G TILE SOLID FURRING TILE 5. fireproofing tile-structural steel must be insulated in fireproof contruct iori. One method of doing this is to cover it with fireproofing tile. 19 20 SOFFIT TILE. COLUMN 6. Roor Tile-one way nbbed concrete floor and roof slabs can be form ed by using structural clay'floor tile. They are manufactured in both load-bearing and nonload bearing grades in standard thicknesses ranging from 3 to 12 in and s tandard length and widths of 12 in; . ~ ~ :. /> ' A 0 . .. "'. . .... ...... _.J>. I ' . . a:tu:r.Bt,g and t i l ~ L..Rihl19 7. Structural Clay Facing Tile- unglazed tile and may have either a s mooth or a rough textured finish. They are designed to be used as exposed facing ma terial on either exterior or interior walls and partitions. 2 Classes a. Standard ti/e......:suitable for general use in either exterior or in terior locations. b. Specialized tile -have heavier shells and webs and are intended for greater resistance to impact and moisture penetration. 8. Structural Glazed Facing Tile -produced from high-grade light burning clay which is suitable for the application of ceramic or salt glaze. Two typ es are single

faced units and two opposite faces glazed. TERRA COTTA Meaning "fired earth" is a clay product which has been used for archite ctural decorative purposes, since ancient Greece and Rome. Modern terracotta is machine-e xtruded and molded or pressed. The machine-made product is usually refered to as ceramic veneer. and is a unit with,' flat face and flat or ribbed back. Ceramics veneer is made in two types. a. Adhesion type -heli::l to the wall by the bond of the mortar to the cerami c veneer back and to the backing wan. t>. Anchor type- are held by mortar and by wire tiles between the terracotta a nd the wall behind adhesion type ceramic veneer is available in face sizes up to 600 s q. in. and 24 in. max. widths. Lengths can be up to 36 in. thickness limited to 1 i in. 21 22 CERAMJC latth '/4 S?r [()4t l.4rattiC. . METAL . . . -- -:::- ... butldtn9 ......,_ nn-t.ar 6J.at 4- . --+1-l"+t-. "':. :.PLJttf1tL . . .:t ::,: . . woo.o .,. BRICK. ' 0 ... :. :. . . . t. ;"" .. """ .: t't:t:+.. . :. : . : : : ..... .. 111c1rtJ" ,. : . teramu. . '. 0 CONCRETE:. , CHI'PTER . BUILDING STONES & GYPSUM AND LIME 24 BUILDING STONES t..,pat

Stones usually blocks or pieces of the basic material rock. CLASSIFICATION Rock can be into three general categories. 1. Igneous-formed as the result of the cooling of molten matter. 2. Sedimentary -formed by the action of water either by .depositing minerals at the bot tom of a water body _or depositing them on the earth's surface. 3. Metamorphic - rocks changed from their original structure by the act ion of extreme pressure, heat, or various combinations of these forces. Stone used for building purposes also can be classified according to form in wh ich it is available commercially. 1. Rubble- includes rough fieldstone which may merely have been broken into suitable sizes, or it may include irregular pieces of stone that have been roughly cut to size (usually used for and filling material) (escombro and lastillas). 2. Dimension (cut stone} -consist of pieces that have been cut or finished acco rding to a set or draw;ngs (For facings of walls). 3. Flagstone (Flat slabs) -consists of thin pieces (1 /2 in. and up which may or may not have had their face dimensions cut to some particular size. (For walks and flo ors.) 4. Crushed rock -Stones consisting of pieces varying in size from 3/8 to 6 in. a nd is used to a large extent in concreting. BUILDING 1. Argillite -one formed from clay, commonly dark-blue with faint shades of gr een, used for floor tile, stair treads, coping stones, interior wall base, interior window stools of exte rior window sills. 2. Granite-is of igneous origin and composed quartz, feldspar, hornblende an d mica. Its generally very hard, strong durable.and capable of taking a high polish. For use in flooring wall paneling, column and mullion facings, stair treads or flagstone. Comes in colors of red, pink, yellow, green, blue, white and brown. 3. limestone-is a sedimentary rock which is either oolitic, or calcite cemented calcareous stone formed of shells fragments, particularly non-crystalline in nature, it has no cleavage lines and uniform in structure and composition. Dolomitic - a limestOne which i s rich in magnesium Carbonate and frequently somewhat crystalline in character and crys talline limestone-is prodominantly composed of calcium or carbonate crystals it has high compressive and tensile strength. Very low in absorption, and has a smooth texture .. The color is a fairly uniform light gray. \ .. 4. Travertine-a sedimentary rock, composed mainly of calcium carbonate. I t has been formed at the earth's surface through the evaporation of water from hot spring s. It is used as an interior decorative stone because of its pleasing texture and its

tendency to show small, natural pockets on a cut surface. 5. Marble-Metamorphic rock, one that has been changed from its original structure in this case, limestone and dolomite have been recrystallized to form marble. Fam ous types are carrara parian. numidiam, onyx, vermont, colors are frQm yellow, w hite, shades of gray tQ black, violet, red and green used for wall or column facing and for f loorinQ. 6. Serpentine -Igneous rock with the mineral serpentine. The mineral is olive green to greenish black, but impurities may give the rock other colors, Used for interi ors only due to deteriotation from weathering. 7. Sandstone-a class of rock composed of cemented silica grains. Colors include gray, buff, light brown, red. Texture range from very fi11e to very coarse an d ~ m e are quite porous with as much as 30 percerit of their volume composed of pores. 8. Slate rock -formed by metamorphosis of clays and shales deposited in layers. A unique characteristic of the rock is the relative ease with which it may be separ ated into thin tough sheets, called slates, 1 I 4 in. or more thick. Slates are black. g reen, red, gray or purple. Slate is commonly used for flooring, window sills and stools, stair tre ads, facing. STONE CONSTRUCTION Stones are largely used as a facing material for large buildings with steel or c oncrete frames. When used as a facing stonework may be divided into four categories. 1. Paneling- consists of using slabs of stone cut to dimension and thickness to cover backup walls and provide a finished exterior. 2. Ashlar-work requires the use of cut stone and includes broken ashlar, irregu lar coursed ashlar, regular coursed ashlar. 25 26 3. Rubblework - used as random when no attempt is made to produce either horizo ntal or vertical course lines. Small spaces are filled with spalls, ~ m a l l stones and used as cours:. ed rubble work, horizontal coorse lines are maintained but no vertical course l ines used. 4. Trim ...:....involves use f!llf stones cut for a SPecific purpose and inclu de Quoin -stones laid at the intersection of two walls. They are emphasized by using a contrasting color or type and by projecting beyond the vertical plane of the wall. Usually they are laid so that they appear alternately as !ong and short stones on each side of the corner. asj11mbs-stones which form the sides of window and door openings. as sills -stones which form the bottom of window and door openings. as belts-special stone courses which are built into a wall for a particular purp ose. One reason is to provide architectural relief to a large wall of one material or to provide a break in the vertical plane of the wall another reason is to hide a change in the wall

thickness. All ~ Jamb stone sills should have a wash or slope or the upper surface to provide for water ru n off. Sills are also provided with a drip to prevent water from running back to the wall along the uhderside of the sill. 11s Copings -one which is cut to fit on tHe top of a masonry wall. It prevents t he passage of water into the wall, slieds water to either inside on outside, and gives a finished appearance to the wall. liS cornices -specially cut stones which are built into and project from, a maso nry wall near the top to provide the appearance of a cave. 27 28 as Lintels -stones which bridge the top of door and window openings. . ~ . li" .... . II ., 1 ' ~ ; ;, ' A , .' 411 0 . .. 1J . .. .. . . .. ~ - L - - - - - - ~ - - - - - - . as Stone Steps - made to fit over an inclined concrete slab or to cap steps cast in concrete. / as an Arch Stone - cut to form some particular type of arch over a door or wi ndow opening. as Stone Rooring ..... walks and patios, made by covering a base of stone concre te, brick or tile with Flagstone. They may be random flagstones, Trimmed flagstone Trimm ed rectangular and square. GYPSUM A soft mineral consisting of a hydrated calcium sulfate-from which gypsum plast er is made (by heating); colorless when pure used as a retarder in port.land cement. GYPSUM PRODUCTS 1. Plasters a. Plastsr of hris-made from carefully selected white_rock .. mixed with w ater to form a paste, it sets in about _1 to 20 minutes. It is used for small pat ching jobs on plaster walls and for making molds; When lime putty is mixed, it makes a. plaster finish coat which hardens fast and free from shrinkage cracks. b. Keene's Cement -It gypsum is subjected to a temperature of 750F, it is comple tely dehydrated. When this material is ground and alum added to it, it is known as keene's cement. Used where sanitary conditions or moisture makes it necessary t o

specify a hard impervious, smooth surface since it is highly resistant to moistu re penetration. c. Casting Plaster - This plaster is made from specially selected rock and grou nd much f iner than plaster of Paris. It is slower setting aOd cooler working, which make it adaptible for ornamental molded plaster work. d. Hard wall plsster-This is a neat gypsum plaster, containing hair or f iber, widely used to form 'the first (scratch) coat and the second (brown) coat on plastered walls and ceilings. e. Cement bsnd plaster-intended for application to concrete surfaces. -Aimos t any finish plaster can be applied over th is coat. f. Finish Plaster - This material is made specially to produce the finish (Put ty) coat for plastered surfaces. It has to be mixed with hydrated Ume putty and water. g. Prspal'fld finish only water. It contains no lime, so the p laster surface can be decorated as soon as it is dry. h. Textul'fl Plster- Used when a rough surface is required. 29 30 i. Acoustical Plsster - calcined gypsum mixed with a light weight-mineral gate to make a type of finish plaster that has a high rate of sound absorption . j . Joint filler- Uke texture plaster is used to make the plaster for filling n ail holes and -covering joints in gypsum wall board. Also used to make adhesive, used in lamin ating two sheets of board together. -- 2. Gypsum Boards a. Gypsum wsllb011rd-A fireproof sheathing for interior walls and ceilings. It is made of a core of gypsum covered on each side by a heavy specially manufactured kr aft paper. The paper on the exposed surface is ivorycolored, while the back is gray. Used to make partitions in which there is no framework, can also be applied directly to the walt ffame of used over sheathing by a single or double nailing or scr8W-tastan lng size iS 4 feet by up to 12 feet .- - b. Gypsum Lath- Agypsum core is covered on both sides with a heavy paper, but in the case of lath, the same paper is used for both back and front, size 3/ 8" x 16"' x 48'" packed in bundles. Used as a base for plaster, providing adhesion for gypsum pla ster. c. Gypsum Precsst Roof Decking- Precast from gypsum containing various types of fiber are made in either the square-edged. plank from 4 to 6 feet or metal - edged plank 10 feet long. .. ...

... __ _ "'!' -- 15'. EDGED G't'PSUM PLANK 3. Gypsum Tile a. Psrtitlon snd Furring Tile - made for specially calcined gypsum, to which is usually about 5 percent wood fiber in the form of chips and sometimes some perlit e. The wood fiber allows the tile to bind together better, while the perlite reduc ed the . weight. Both solid and how tile are made, dimensions being 12 X 30 in width th ickness . f rom 2 to 6'". b. Fireproofing Tile -made to cover steel members in a building to pr o!ect them against fire. 4. Gypaum Precast Wall Panels. -Made by casting in mold a panel consist of two outer shells 5/ 8 in. thick reinforced with viscose fiber and separated by a c ore of hexagonal cells, it is made 2 feet wide, 2 to 6 i,n. thick and up to 10ft. long. Each pane l is tongue and groove along its long edges to f9rm an interlocking wall. LIME- Used in the making of the finish or putty coat for interior plaster. The l ime used is hydrated or slake lime which is mixed with water to form a plastic, putty like m aterial to which is added gauging plaster. The mixture is applied in a thin coat over the bare ~ t e r and troweled to a smooth finish. The lime in the putty begins to recarbo nate, and this hardening continues slowly for a long period of time. 31 ~ CHI' P T E ~ WOOD Wood is traditional building material, it is easily worked, has dural;)ility and beauty. It has great ability to absot'b shocks from sudden load. In addition, wood has fre edom from rust and corrosion, is comparatively light in weight, and is adaptable to a coun tless variety of purposes. . Cl ... lflcation of Trees Trees generally f!!re.classified into two kinds: 1. Hatdwood8-'deciduous' trees that have broad leaves which are normally shed in the winter time. 2. Softwood- 'conifers' trees that have needles rather than leaves and that bea r their seeds in cones. Examplee of PHILIPPINE TIMBER Four Categories: a. First Group Narra-,most expensive, .used for furniture and panelings, for expensive floor ings, door panels, stairs and plywood veneer or facings. Yacal and Guijo-both hardwoods, used for posts and girders, or jambs attached tO

concrete and also for wooden decks having flooring and railings exposed to weather. Pine Benguet -SOftwood, used for panelings, sidings, flooring and furnitur e. Also used for framings. trusses. Tanguile and Apitong-the most common lumber in the market. Used generally for fr:amings, joists, trusses, nailers, etc. White and Red lauan-for framings, chests, jewel boxes Kamagong-hardwood for chests, jewel boxes, stair ff'ames. Oao-used for 'panelings and plywood veneer. AJmaciga-simifar to pine for paneling. Mahogany lpil Kalantas Kalamansanai Supa b. Second Group Acacia (rain tree) for wood carvings Agoho Oita Oak Phflippine Chestnut Pili Malabayabas c. Third Group Bakawan Malakamias Malasaging Matamata Nangka Santol d. Fourth Group All other ordinary wood s,8cies ..... . MOISTURE IN WOOD The moisture content of wood is_ usually expressed as a percentage of the oven-dry weight and can be detennined by the oven-dry method or by an electric_.moisture meter method. For the oven-dry method, they should be cut the full width of the bOard and from 1/2 to 3/4 inches long. The sections should be cut at least 2 feet from the end of the board to eliminate a sample that may have end-dried: The pieces are weighed and the results recorded as the, original weight. The samples are pfaced in an oven heated to 212F and left until all the moisture has been removed. The weights are then checked several times until it is found that the pieces are no longer- (osing weight, and are constant. The pieces are removed from the oven and weighed immediately. This result is recorded as the oven-dry weight. Then the moisture content can b e cal culated using this formula. Moisture content (tn percent)

Three (3) categories of Lumber original weight - even-dry weight x 100 oven-dry weight 1-. Yard Lumber-Ufed for ordinary light construction and finishing work arid co nsists of 1 and 2 in. material manufactured into common boards, shiplap, shelving dime nsion lumber (2 x 2 in to 2 x 12 in.) Center match, flooring, roof plank, siding, V-joint, trim and molding of all kinds. These are usuaHy found in retail lumberyards. Exsmples; Tand G-tongue and groove (for flooring) 1,. X 4'", 1 "' X 6" and 1'" X 8" S-Cut -stone cut (for sidings) 1"x4", 1"x6"and 1"x8" -, Bead V-cut (for sidings) Lj "'51Z*( ~ ~ Rizal Cut Concave mnf]))JD r;J17llr? 1xs" . .._,..{ /2 tS 2'"x2" n 2"x to 35 36 Mouldings Convex Quarter round a 2. Shop Lumber-usually left in 1 in. and 2 in. rough thickness often containing knots or defects not ordi narily permissible in other categories. It is inte nded for use in shops or mills making sash, doors and cabinets where it will be cut into rel atively short pieces and the defective material discarded. 3. Structui'BI Lumber - is intended for use in heavy construction for load-bear ing purposes and is cut into timbers of lluger size than yard lumber. 3 in. or more thi ck and 4 in. or more wide. It is made from the heartwood of the log. Finishes of wood - surfacing or planing of o.1e side - two sides planed - four side$ planed - as sawn and not planed Wood GRAIN a. Edge grain-annual rings run approximately at right angle to the face. b. Flat grain-_when the annual ri ngs run mbre or less parallel to the surface. c. Angle grain-when the annual rings are at about 45 to

theface. SEASONING OF LUMBER As clay is burned, steel is tempered, so lumb"r must be dried. Water content re presents 30 to 100 percent or more of the dry weight of a Two methods .for drying of lumber. 1. Air-drying -lumber is strip-piled at a slope on a solid foundation. This all ows air to circulate around every piece while the sloping allows water to run off quickly. ......... . 2. Kiln-drying IK.O.) more expensive lumber which is required for more refin ed uses so as wood will not move, such as furniture. Flooring and general interior use. It mu st be dried to a moisture content of not more than 5 to 10 percent. This is done in a dry ki ln -a large airtight structure, scientifically heated by steam pipes- in whi ch the lumber is artificially dried to the correct moisture content. K.D. takes days or weeks as opposed to s un dried which will take months in a drying yard. Treated Lumber Pressure treated lumber-when lumber is subjected to pressure and inject ed with chemicals or salts to insure it from rots. a. wolmanized -wolman salt b. tanalized c. permanized d. boliden These are some patented pressurized lumber in the market. UNIT OF MEASUREMENT The board foot, a piece of lumber 12 in. wide and 1 in. thick and one foot long is the unit of measurement. 1" x 12"i < 1'-0" or 1 x 12/12 x 1'-0" = 1 bd. ft . Example: 18 pes. - 1 "x 12" x 20 feet - 360 bd.ft. So 18 pes.- 1" x 6" x 20 feet - 180 bd. ft. Convert the width into feet by dividing into 12 18 - 2" x 8" x 24 feet 18 - 2" X 8/12 X 24 - 276 bd. ft . 22 - 3 X 10 X 18 - 990 bd. ft. SPECIFICATION WHEN BUYING LUMBER Indicate no. of pieces, thickness, width, length, total bd.ft . . kind of lumber and finish. . . Example: 6 - 2" X 8" X 14' -0" = 112 bd. ft. tanguile S4S GlUE lAMINATED TIMBER Term used to describe a wooden member bu"ilt up of several layers of wood whose grain directions' are atl substantially parallel. And held together with glue a s fastening commonly used for beams, girders, posts, cOlumns, arches, bowstring truss chorps, usuall y softwoods are commonly used because of their low cost, lightness and strength. 37 -38 Advantages of Glue-laminated timbers

1. may be built up to any desired size from small components, easing up of tran sportation 2. trees which are too small for production of large sawn timbers will pr oduce material which is perfectly satisfactory for laminated members. 3. low grade lumber can be used in sections of laminated timbers, reduci ng the overall cost. 4. lumber to be used in laminating can be seasoned much more quickly and easily while in small units. 5. laminated members are dry when erected resulting in the minimum amount of de flection due to loading. 6. a camber or crown can be built into laminated timbers to take care of defle ction due to loading. 7. curved members such as arch ribs are easily made by bending thin section s to the reQuired curvature and laminating them. 8. it is possible to taper certain sections of a member in proportio n to the diminishing stresses, producing more graceful structure. 9. in general, variation in strength from one timber to arlother will be lela t han with sawed timbers. 10. subject to certain limitations, it is possible to use two or more speciel together combining advantages of economy of low strength species and superior qualitie s of highstrength wood. Preparation and Arrangement of Laminations Laminations should be dressed to uniform thickness to avoid thick .-..lft es, Of unglued areas. When end joints have to be made; the should be scarfed } and end joints should be spaced as show below. JL+ ft. r--. -' .,. GLUE USE IN LAMINATING a. casein glue- satisfactory for use in dry -lOcations not exposed to rain or water. b. Ur:es-lormaldehyde resins - cheap al)d .well cure at from 70F up. Will withst and soaking in cool water. c. Phenol-formaldehyde-resin gfues :..... not usually recommended because of th e high temperature needed to cure them. Useful for combining timber and plywood and are very water-resistant. d. Resorcinol- phenol_glu.es are expensive _but have excellent qualities of durability arid water resistance. 5TREG5ED Q<JN PANELS 39 BOXED BEAM l

CURVED r J r I :1 TAPF-JC!ED LAMINATED BEAM5 LAMJNA'TED .ARCHES 40 .CHAPTER BOARDS A group of sheets of building materials often faced with paper or vinyl, suitab le for use as a finished surface on walls, ceilings, etc. This group.of boards are all flat, rel atively thin in section and have been made to standard sizes, usually 4 x 8ft. These building boar ds are made of several materials and used for a variety of purposes. KINDS OF BUILDING BOARDS 1. Plywood a: frisulating fiberboard 4. Chipboard 5. i,',article board 6. Gypsum board 7. Strawboard 8. Asbestos-cement board 9 .. Corkboard 10. Paperboard 11 ... Mineral fiberboard foamboards PROPERTIES OF WOOD One of the main advantages of plywood is that it has good strength across as we ll as along the panel. The more plies there are in a panel, the more nearly equal the streng th in both directions will be. The tendency to swell and shrink is neutralized to a large extent, because in plywood approximately half the wood grain runs in one direction and the other half at the right angles to it. Plywood has a greater to blows. than ordinary wood. Plywood cannot be split in the plane of the panel because of its successive l ayers at right angles to one another. Nails and screws can be driven very close to the edge o f the panels without danger of splitting. Plywood can be bent more easily then ordinary wood of the same thickness. Th e radius of curvature depends on the thickness of the panel and is limited by the strength o f the outer piles in tension and by the strength of the inner plies in compression. Plywood offers innumerable possibilities for decoration because of the great var iety of colors and textures that can be produced on'the face piles. Decorative effects also can be applied to the face ply by sandblasting, by pressure, or by

etching with wire brushes. 1. PLYWOOD 42 Plywood is made by bonding together thin layers of wood in a way of each layer is at right angles to the grain of each adjacent laye.r. "l!

the grain

Each layer of plywood is called a Veneer,and commonly made by rotary cutting-a m ethod of cutting wood veneer in a log is fixed in a lathe and rota ted against a knife so that the veneer is peeled from the log in a continuous sheet. Waterproof glue is applied by machine to the face plies, core, and cro ssbonds. They are assembled into plywood form and placed in hot presses which compress the ve neers into Solid.Sheela of approximately th8 ,;Riper thickness. At the same time the heat cu res the glue, a process whiCh takes trom 2 to 20 minutes. TYPES OF Pl YWGlOD 1. Marine plywood -absolutely waterproofed 2. Fancy plywood -non waterproofed for panellings and cabinets. Narra bookmatched Kalantas rotary cut Ribbon grained tanguile lal.Mif'l rotary cut Dao bookmatched Rosewood Tanguile 3. Ordinary plywood 4. Form plywood 5. Pre-finished plywood paneling (Brand Danarra) a. Paper-overlaid b. in 14 color tones, no nee d to varnish or paint. Nailed through V-grooves or glued. Comes in three pre-cut sizes and two series, the mor occo aeries and papyrus series. 43 44 book matched-the assembling of wood veneers from the same flitch so that succe ssive sheets are alternated face up and face down. ribbon grained -a seri es of strips uniting several parts. Sizes Common size is 3 x 6 feet and 4 x 8 teet. Other panels special sizes are 3' x 7' . 4 x 6', 4 x 7'. 4' X 9', 4' X 10', 5' X 8', 5' X 9' and 5' X 10'. . Thickness 6 mm - 1 I 4" - double walling g mm - 3 / 8 " - double walling 12 mm - 1 /2 " - drawers, shelves 15 mm - 5 / 8" - drawers, shelves 18 mm - 3 /4" - cabinet closet doors 25 mm - 1 " - cabinet closet doors 2. HARDBOARD Made from processed wood chips. Chips of controlled size are subjected to high-pressure

steam in pressure vessels. When the pressure is released the chips " explode" and the cellulose and lignin are separated from the unwanted elements and then mix ed into a homogenous mass and formed into a continuous board which is. cut up into conven ient lengths. These are pressed into uniform, hard, grainless sheets in heated presses. Th e'?'are smooth on one side and with a overlap-like impression on the other side. Three grades of board a. Standard-fl exi ble to be quite easily bent. It is light brown and is produ ced in thicknesses of 1/ 8, 3/ 16, 1/4, and 5/ 16 in .. Boards are 4 feet wide and a re available in lengths of 4, 6, 8, 10 and 12 and 16 feet. This grade of hardboard is not su itable for exterior work. b. Tempered hardboard- is made by impregnated standard board with a temperin g compound of oil s and resin and baking it to polymerize the temperi n g material. Tempered hardboard is dark brown in color and is available in thicknesses o f 1/8, 3/ 16, 1/ 4, 5/16 and 3/8 in. This board is brittle and stiff, has improv ed machining qualities and much greater resistance to water penetration, making it suitable f or exterior use-. c. Low-density hardboard - Not as strong and durable as standard hardboard. Some specially products of hard board ,,. ~ ~ ~ ~ : ~ ? ' .. : ~ > ~ ... . -::::'! r: :_' _j PLAIN MOROCCO LEATHER GTUCCO r--, l -.. ; ., ' . SAWALl LOWER BQARO I o o : o o o (?. .: .. ,q'!: 0." 0 0 '' ,; ' '' O:;j.o o 0 .Q o ?< o o ci '1 . .. . " . . o o o . PERFORATED OR DISPLAY. BOAAo

GROOVED BQ.o\RD f='INE WEAVE LACE. OR 3. INSULATING FIBERBOARD Made from three types of fiber-wood, sugar cane, and asbestos, and binder, forme d into a board. a. Wood fibers are produced by pressing logs against a grindstone which breaks down the wood into fibers or by making 5/8" chips from logs and charging them into pressure vessels where they are softened with live steam. They are then sheared to break chips down into fibers. Two basic grades of board are made: a-1 Insulating grade -made up as insulating, decorative p(lnels, decorative ceiling tile, Vnotch plaster base, and roof insulation. Standard thicknesses are 1/2, 5/8, 3/4 and 1 in. a-2 Sheathing grade - Oroe having both surfaces and all edges coated with asphalt and the other with the fibers impregnated with asphalt during manufacture. b. Cane fiberboards is made by shredding cane and processing the fibers in much the same Y"av as wood fibers. c. Mineral fiberboard is made from asbestos fibers mixed with a cementing agent . This type of board is used primarily for fireproofing and acoustical purposes. 45 46 4. CHIPBOARD A large class of building board made from wood and particles and a binder, ofte n faced with veneer. Chipboard is made by binding phenolic resin or urea formaldehy de glue in the form of a 4ft. wide ooard, length from 8to 16feet long with thicknesses 1/ 4, 5/ 16, 3/ 8, 1/ 2, 5/ 8, and 3/ 4 in. Panefs.are made in two types, plain and pattemed. Plain panels may be unsande d, sanded on one side, or sanded two sides. Patterned panels have one grooved surface, ei ther evenly spaced or random. Chipboards are used both for interior and exterior which include sheathing for walls, and roof, subflooring, fence panelling, and commercial exteriors and interiora. The board lends itsetf to a range of stain and paint finishes, an advantage for interior use, w hile at the same time, its weather resistance make it valuable as an outdoor material. Hardwood p lywood can also be laminated to chipboard for interior finishing panel. 5. PARTICLE BOARD A,hardboard made from relatively small particles. The particles are graduated fr om coarse at . the center of the board to fine at the surface to help produce a product; wit h a smooth, dense 8oth aurfacae are sanded, and one lllrface.and the edges may be fined to pr ovide a still smoother denses surface for particular uses. Common uses are floor underlay, using polyvinyl acetate adhesive-, divergent po int staples Qr annufar-grooved underlay flooring nails for fastening. .

,.. .. ;.,. ... .-..;-"':.t:.'- .-... ' . ,..: :_ , r-; ; : : :P': ';..: .. ,.,. .'," _,. __ : . .,. . . ... . : . .,., .... : .. :_ ' "";. :., ... --- , .6. GYPSUM BOARD Also use for shelving, with fined edges, as core stock in mfllwc.dt and furniture manufacturing, and as a base to which may be applied wood veneers, plastic laminates, printed wood grain patterns, chalkboard coating. Sizes are 4 x 8ft, 2 x 4ft, and 4 x 4ft. includes 1/ 4, 5/ 16,3/ 8, 1/ 2, 5/8, 1 1/16, 3/4 and 1 in . A wall board having a gypsum core. One type is a pcard with a special paper face on which a variety of wood-grain patterns may be printed. Such a board may be nailed with special colored nails, or glue laminated to an interior surface to produce a wood-grain e ffect. Another type is a gypsum board faced with a vinyl sheet, made to imitate a texti le surface. This is. either glued in place or held by afuminum or plaStic moldings. 7. STRAWBOARD A hardboard made of compressed wheat straw, processed at 350 to 400F and covered with a tough kraft paper. Two grades: a. Structurttl boardt-is manufactured 2 in. thick, 4ft. wide and 6, 7, 8, 9, an d 10ft. long. It is used for nonbearing partitions, as a plaster base, for insulating pu rposes exterior sheathing, roof decking, and as an inner form face for concret& baseme nt wall forms. b. Insulation gl'tlde-also 2 in. thick and 4ft. wide but comes in 5 ft. lengths onty. It is intended primarily for roof deck insulation. 8. ASBESTOS-CEMENT BOARD A dense, rigid, board containing a high proportion of asbestos fibers bonde d wiih portland cement, resistant to fire, flame, and weathering, has low ; esistance to heat fl ow. Used as a building material in sheet form and corrugated sheeting. Flal boards are made 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. thick; 4ft: wide, and from 6 to 12 feet long. Various types of corrugated sheets are made from the 5ame material. All types of asbestos-cement boards must be drilled for the insertion of scr ews, bolts, or other fasteners.

9. CORKBOARD From the outer bark of the cork oaktree, cork granules is mixed with synthetic resin, compressed and formed into sheet from 1 to 6 in. thick and baked under press ure into rigid boards. The standard board length is 36 in. and widths are 12, 18, 24, and 36 in. Cor kboard is used almost exclusively for thermal insulating material and vibration control. tT:'i .. , .... . . . ' . . ... . .... . 10. PAPERBOARD Made In two different types: a. A paper rntfp pressed into boards 3/ 16, or 1/ 4 in. thick, 4ft. wide, and 6, 1 or 8ft. long. Usually one surface is primed fpr finishing. b. A layer of stiff paper folded into corrugated form and faced on both sides with a thick paper backing, cemented to the core. zsz :s: zI 47 48 11. MINERAL FIB.ERGROUND . . Thick mats of mineral fibers, usually glass or rock wool are covered with a backing of sti ff paper on one or both sides to form rigid boards, ranging in thickness from 1/2 to 2 in . . The usual board size is 24 x 48 in. These units are used for roofdeck insulation and are cemented to the deck with asphalt adhe.sive. 12. PLASTIC FOAMBOARDS Polystyrene and polyurethane P.lastics are formed by a patented process to about 40 times their original volume. This foamed material is molded into boards fro'm 1/2 to 3 in. thick, 12 or24 in. wide, and from 4 to 12ft. long. Used for perimeter insulation for concr ete floor slabs, for wall and roof-deck jnsulation, and for roof decks when properly supported . These plastic boards have high insulation value and relatively high compre ssive strength, and are flexiple enough to fit over curved surface. BUILDING PAPERS In building construction, paper is used for sheathing, roofing and ins ulation, in making asphalt shingles, laminated and corrugated building products, and concrete for m materials, as a moisture and vapor barrier: as a cushioning material; as wall-paper; a s an envelope or sheathe for other materials; and as a fireproofing material. Most paper is made from cellulose fibers which comes from wood pulp, but wastepa per. jute waste, Manila hemp, rags, straw and bagasse (cane and corn stalks) are al so utilized. TYPES OF WOOD PULP a. Mechlutical Pulp -or groundwood, is by grinding blocks of wood ag

ainst a revolving abrasive stone or by grinding steamed wood chips in a grinding mill. b. Chemical pulp -produced by digesting wood chips in various chemicals to free the cellulose fibers from the liquid binding. c. Semi-chemical pulp -wood chips are first subjected to a mild chemical treat ment and then mechanically disintegrated in rotating disk refiners. TYPES OF PAPER 1. Sheathing paper - paper used to provide an airtight barrier over walls, floors etc. Two Types: a. Plain psper-either a low-cost paper made from a mixture of semichemical pulp and waste paper or a tough paper made from kraft pulp. b. ASfMhlllt lmpregltlltfld orcosted felt or kf'llft PllfiM-varioos amounts of a sphalt are used per hundred square feet of paper so that papers of various we ights are made, from 4 to 10 lb. per square. These are what is known as breather papers. impervious to water but not to water vapor . .. 2. Roofing Paper a. Roofing felts-those which are used in making a built-up roof and are produced in 36 in. wide rolls, in various weights from 3 to 20 lb. per square. b. R e l l e ~ roofing -a heavy, mineral surfaced paper used as a final roof covering, made 18 and 36 in. wide, in various weights from 45 to h20 lb. per sq uare. 3. Insulating Paper The primary obj ective in the production of this type of-paper is to secure bulk and entrapped air with as much strength as possible. Insulating papers are m ade both from. a. We_ad-fiber insulating paper -- is made from groundwood or bagasse with some wastepaper pulp added. The paper is usually gray, produced in 36 in. wide rolls, weighing about 9 lb. per square. It is used for insulating walls, ceilings and floors. b. Asbestos fibers -a soft, pliable paper used for insulating p1pes car rying steam, boilers, and other vessels with high temperatures. It is produced in va rious weights from 5 to 10 lb. per square. a heavier asbestos-felt paper is prortuced for use as a built-up roofing material. It is saturated with asphalt and producerl in rolls 36 in. wide weighing approximately 15 lb .. per square. 4. Cushioning Paper Similar to wood-fiber insulating paper, but less attention is paid to strength. Its Ghief use is for cushioning under linoleum, carpets, or slate roofing. 5. Vapor-Barrier Paper These paper, which are intended to prevent the passage of moisture va por through walls, ceilings and floors, are made in three different types.

a. Wsxf!d papsr-made from strong light kraft in three grades commonly known as x, XX, XXX. b. Two thicknesses of paper laminated together with a film of asphalt. Two kinds of paper is used - One is a kraft paper, the other, a mixture of ground wood pulps, treated by the sulfite and the kraft methods. c. A sheet of kraft paper laminated to copper foil by an asphalt f ilm. This is a heavy duty material used for vapor barrier and tor flashing. 6. Laminating Paper This is a special, high strength kraft paper made for use in the production of plastic laminates. The thin, strong paper is impregnated with liquid_plastic resin and sev eral sheet are laminated together under heat and pressure to form the- base for the plasti c sheet. ' ' :... 50 7. Concrete Form Paper a. A form made from strong kraft paper in the form of a spiral tube. These are used as column forms and as ducts and core forms in concrete floors. b. A boxlike form made from corrugated container paper. This is unbleached kraf t paper sized with resin and coated with wax sizing and starch to make it abrasion resistant. These forms are used in forming ribbed concrete slabs. 8. Wallpaper Paper from which decorative wallpaper is made. This is produced in two grade s. a. No. 1 hanging-made from bleached sulfite or bleached soda pulp, mixed with not more than 20 percent high-quality groundwood. Talc is used as a filler, rosin and sodium silicate as sizing. The paper is coated with a clay film bound to the pap er with case in, and the design is printed over the clay coating. b. No.2 hanging - from 72 to 90 percent ground wood and the rest unbleached sul fite. Little filler is used, but the paper must be sufficiently sized to stand the app lication of water paste without wetting or breaking through. 9. Envelope Paper Paper is used as an outer covering or envelope for a number of building material s. One of these is gypsum board, composed of a layer of calcined gypsum covered in both sides by a sheet of kraft paper. A number of insulating materials are enveloped in a k ra'ft paper cover, sometimes plain, sometimes asphalted. 10. Fire Proofing Paper Made from asbestos fibers, since this is an incombustible material. The materia l maybe in the form of matted paper, similar to asbestos insulating or roofing paper, o r it may be in the form of a bloth woven from thread spun from asbestos fibers.

CHAPTER 52 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS BITUMEN I A generic name applied to a semisolid mixture of complex hydrocarbons, derived from coal or petroleum, as a coal-tar pTtch or Tar - the resulting condensate when destructive distillation is carried out on sikh mar: terials as wood coal, shale, peat or bone. Pitch -a solid or semi-solid residue produced from partial evaporation or fracti onal dis. tillation of tar. Coal-tar pitch-most common material of this kind of pitch. ,..... .. . . r brown or black solids or which are found in th e natural state and are also produced by the refming of petrol eum. Bitumens are useful in construction industry since it has the tendency to a dhere to a solid surface. It has good water resistance. TYPES OF BITUMENS 1. Tar and Pitch - made by the distillation of coal. Tar is used to saturate fe lt paper and to coat kraft paper to render it waterproof. The coal -tar pitch is used in making pitch and gravel built-up roofs. 2. Asphalt-asphalt used results from the refining of naphtha crude oils. which produce aviation grade gasoline, fuel oil, cold test lubricating oils. and asphalt. The properties of this residual , known as straight run asphalt, depend on the nature o f the crude oil from which it was refined and the conditions of refining. Three main gro!JpS of asphalt products produced from straight-run asphalts. 1. hot asphalts, those softened by heat. 2. Cutback asphalts, 'those dissolved in mineral solvents. 3. emulsion asphalts-those dispersed or suspended in a water base. USES OF BITUMENS .. , . Adhesiveness and water proofing qualities, along with IQ$f cost, make b itumens useful as a protective agent in built-up roofing, prepared roofing, and prepared siding. Th ey are used as water proofing and damproofing agents and as vapor barriers. In addition, they are widely used as adhesives and Sealants. The forms in which bitumen is used for any of these purposes depends on the qua lity and characteristics a. felts:-used in built-up roofing, as a base for prepared r oofings and as a membr_ane for proofing, and as underlays for floors-req uire a parttcular grade of bttumen. The asphalt commonly used in the preparation of suc h felts has a softening point of approximately 140F and a penetration value of 5 0. b. roofing products are coated with asphalt after being saturated. The coat-

tng grade asphalts used are generally no. 1 cutbacks with softening point of fro m 200 to 240F. .. -...... c. As waterproof coating for walls and to make waterproof membranes in building s and other structures. d. Used in the manufacture of sealants, acoustical coatings paints, floor tile and mastic flooring, wt)erein mineral matter is added. e .. Used as a binder for aggregates in pavements, the asphalt is made in to liquid by heating, cutting with sotvent, or by emulsifying with water and in its ca pacity as a cement, mixed with gravel , crushed stone and sand. Liquid Paving Asphalts-liquid asphalts used for paving are cutbacks. When gas oline is used as a solvent, a rapid curing liquid . asphalt is the result; ke rosene, medium curing asphalt; a heavier fuel oils produce a slow-curing asphalt. Asphalt paving cements -used as binders for more expensive asphalt pavements. 53 / CHAPTER 56 FERROUS AND NONFERROUS METALS FERROUS-metal in which iron is the principal element. NONFERROUS -containing no, or very little iron. I. FERROUS METAL Steel - a malleable alloy of iron and carbon produced by melting and refining p ig iron and/ or scrap steel, graded according to. the carbon content. Other elements such as ma nganese and silicon may be incl uded to provide special properties. Produce by three basic raw materials, iron ore, and limestone. (coal is convert ed into coke in coke ovens} Five particles of all three basic ingredients of steel, whi ch otherwise would be waste, are blended and burned on a moving gate to cause the formation of clinker s. These are catted sinter, a high-grade blast-furnace charge material. From These, raw materials which is melted into ingots place in molds, a great v ariety of products used .in construction are made. They include: .1. Rolled structural shapes 7. Bolts 2. Rods 8. Rivets 3. Bars 9. Nails 4. Plates 10. Sheet Steel 5. Pipe 11 Others 6. Wire Cold- rolled sheets are glavanized (given a zinc coating). Pig iron is used t o make cas1 iron which is high i n compressive strength but low in tensile strength, and has little use for construction. However since it is cheap and easy to cast, it is used for pumps, motors, c;ngines and because of its corrosion resistance it is used for pipes to som e extent. Wrought iron is produced when pig iron is metted in such a way as to remove nea rly all of

the carbon and other impurities. It is eaily worked and is tough and ductile . It's main u s e ~ are for roofing sheets, wire and metal ornaments. Alloy steels are made by combining others elements with the molten st eel. Nickel, chromium copper and manganese are used. Nickel steel is stronger than carbon steel and is used to make struc tural members for buildings chromium steel is very hard and corrosion-resistant. Stainless steels are made with chromium or a combination of nickel and chromium used in buildings for exterior wall panels, frames for doors, expansion joints, flashings, copings, fascia and gravel stops. Copper - bearing steel has high resistance to corrosion and is used for making sheet steel and metal lath. Manganese steel -offers great resistance to abrasion and finds important us e in the cutting edges of heavy digging tools. Weathering steel-recently developed grade of steel. It forms its own protectio n against atmospheric corrosion and thus requires no painting. It also undergoes a unique color transformation during the weathering process, from orange to brown and f inally to blUegray. This is used on bridges, buildings and other applications. .. STEEL PRODUCTS 1. Rolled Structural shapes z wrre FLANGr! /10.: T L T ANGLE J: -BEAM 2. Sheet pifing -sections are made to interlock and are available in several s h a p e ~ 3. Steel pipe -seamless or welded. small diameter pipe and electrically welded large dia meter pipe. *seamless pipe made by forcing a solid hot rod over a pointed mandrel to form a hollow tube. * either hot-rolled or cold-rolled steel strip called skelp, can be used to make resistance-welded pipe or tubing. Coils of skelp are welded together end to end, and rolls form the strip into a continuous cylinder. A large diameter pipe is made by having plates with proper width, beveled edges and placed in a press wl1ich forms them into cylinders. The two edges are welded together and the pipe is brought to its final diameter by hydraulically expanding the welded sheet against a retaining jacket . t 58 4. Reinforci ng steel-made from new steel or from discarded railway-car axles o r rails. ReiRforcing steel comes in plain or deformed bars, that is, bars which have lugs or deformations rolled on the surface to provide anchorage in concrete. OR

SIZES-start with no. 2 or 1/4 in. (divide a number of bar by 8 to get the equi valent in inch diameter). No.2 = 2/8" or 1/4" 0 = 8mm No. 3 = 3/ 8" - 3/ 8" 0 10 mm No.4 = 4/8" or 1/2" 0 12 mm No. 5 = 5/8" - 5/8" 0 16 mm No. 6 = 6/8" or 3/4" 0 20mm No.7 = 7/ 8" - 7/ 8" 0 - 22mm No. 8 = 8/8" or 1" C!f = 25mm No. 9 = 9/8" or 1 1 /8" 0 = 3omm 5. Welded Wi re Fabric - another type of reinforcing material. lt consists of p arallel, longitudinal wires welded to wires at regular intervals. (cold drawing process) u (i> ....., 1 I cF-1 '1.'' 04 6 in x 12 in x 1 0/4 First .Figure spacing of longitudinal bar. Secol")d Figure spacing of transverse wire. Third Figure gauge of16ngitudinal bar. Fourth Figure gauge of transverse wire. in rolls-5 to 6 feet wide and up to 200ft. long in sheets- up to 32ft. long, not usually over 8ft. wide . 6. Steel Wire-over 150,000 uses for wire including pins, needles, nails, bolts, cables, piano wire, fences. 7. Bolts and Nuts ..._ (either hot forged or cold-formed from wire of t he appropriate diameter). For .. bolts, wire is fed .an automatic bolt-makiQ..o which cuts to length heads, trims, points, and, in many cases rolls the thread. 8. Steel strapping-made from high-tensile flat wire in a number of sizes. Used for banding column forms to keep them from bulging under the pressure of freshly poured concrete. A tightener tightens it and the.two lapped ends is sealed. 9. Open web steel joists -lightweight w,arren-type trusses made in seve ral different styles. 59 .. 10. Sheet Steel -black and galvanized, can be used to manufacture corrug ated roofi ng and siding and formed steel decki'ng. Corrugated sheets have one edge turned up, one down. Comes in 27 1 /2" wide and lengths .5 ft . up to 12ft. Siding sheets are

made with both edges turned in the same direction. il Corrugated roofing sheets are al so utilized as decking for flat roofs with light loads. In such cases the corrugated deck is used as a base on which to" pour a concrete s lab or as a base for a built-up roof. Formed-steel decking is produced in a variety of shapes and styles using vario us thicknesses of metal. from 12 to 22 gauge and sections are made in spans of fro m 4 to 36 feet. Two basic styles are open-faced decking and cellular decking which allow easy di stribution of electric systems and outlets. J! 1 w 1 r L 60 OPEN -!=AGED CELLULAR 11 . Steel studs -lightweight, reqUirtng minimum storage space and does not warp or shrink. Fasteners do not pop, and joints stay Much faster to install tha n woodstud installation. Availabl e in 1 5/8, 2 1/2 and l' 5/8 inches. Plumbing stacks and electrical components fit easily into a steel-framewall. 12. Pans and domes - manufactured for use in forming one-way and two-way ribbed concrete floor systems. MOULDS II. NONFERROUS METALS HAPE OF CONCRETE CEILING ~ GEEN BELOW .. ALUMINUM -Its ore, bauxite, requires 10 kilowatt hours for each pound of me tal aluminum extracted. The reddish brown ore is washed and treated in a soda soluti on to yield a chalky-white powder called alumna, containing a high concentration ot aluminum . Aluminum is a lustrous, si:ver-white. nonmagnetic: lightweight metal which is very malleable; has good thermal and electrical conductivity; a good reflector of both heat and light. In construction, most aluminum is used in alloy form (manganese to increase streng th, silicon or magnesium producing alloy which have good corrosion resistance, also copper and zinc to produce alloy with high strength to-weight ratios} because of added strength; further strengthened by heat treatment; used in extrusions, castings and sheets . Excellent resistance to oxidation; often anodized for better corrosion resistance, surface ha rdness, and/ or architectural color requirements. Structural shapes are used as structural members in building construction. in th e same way that steel structural members are used. Architectural shapes are widely used for door and window jambs, curtain-wa

ll, panel frames; thresholds; treads, handrails; door and window stiles, rails, mun tins and bars. DOOR RAIL 0 tu81NG One of the advantages of the extr.usion fabricating process is that components for certain parts of a building may be designed to interlock. 61 62 Sheet aluminum, plain sheets are used for flashing, roofing, roof drains, chimne y caps, air ducts, louver blades, etc. To improve its appearance and to increase its resistance to weather and corro sion, A treatment called Anodizing is done. This is a combined electrical and chemical process, which hardens anci increases the thickness of the natural oxide coating on alu minum and to provide a hard, noncorrosive, electrolytic, oxide film on the surface of aluminum or other met<Us, by electrolytic action. Such anodized sheets are used for shingles siding, curtain wall panels, and acoustic ceilings. Aluminum Foil - used as a vapor barrier on walls and ceilings and as reflective insulatiofl. Copper ...:.. a lustrous reddish metal , highly ductile and maUeable; has high tensile strength, is an excellent electrical and thermal conductor, is availabfe in a wide variety of shapes; widely used for downspouts, electrical conductors, flashings, gutterS, roofing, et c. Copper alloys are brasses, and bronzes.,which contain primarily zinc and tin, r espectively, and the alloys containing nickel. Brasses are used in architectural and hardware applications. Bronze are used rn the production of springs: Lead -a soft, malleable, heavy metal; has low melting.point and a high coeff icient of thermal expansion. Very easy to cut and work, enabling it to be fitted o ver 'uneven surfaces. Used fCir roofing, flashing and spandrel wall panels. Tin -a lustrous white, soft and malleable metal having a low melting point; rel atively unaffected by exposure to air; used for making alloys and solder and in coating sheet metal. CHAPTER 64 GLASS A hard brittle inorganic substance, ordinarily transparent or translucen t; produced by melting a mixture of silica, a flux and a stabilizer; while molten, may be blown , drawn, rolled, pressed or cast to a variety of shapes. Giass has no definite melting point . When it is heated, it first softens so th at it can be bent. Further heating brings it to the point when it becomes thick, syrupy liquid, a s tate in which it

can be worked. Fif.!ally at still higher temperatures it becomes a thin, wat ery liquid. MANUFACTURING 1. SHEET GLASS (ordinary window glass) The raw materials, sand, soda and limestone, are first ground to a fine state a nd mixed in the proper proportions. This mixture, known as frit, is tied into the filling e nd of a furnace and melted. Sometimes, cullet (broken glass) is also fed in to the furnace. To form the glass into a sheet, it first passes from the furnace tank into a drawing kiln, from here it is drawn up in the form cif a sheet into a series of rollers. Th ese sheets of flat drawn glass are cooled slowly in a cooling chamber known as annealing lehr. This type of glass is used where vision is required but where cost is an important factor. Th e surface is good but never free from distortion as the two surfaces of the sheet are not perfectly parallel. 2. PLATE GLASS A high quality glass sheet of the same chemica! composition as sheet gl ass. Plate glass can be produced in thicknesses of from 1/ 8 to 1 1/ 4 the special th ick glasses ate usually cast rather than made by the continuous flow This is spec ial because both surfaces of the 100 in. wide ribbon of glass is simultaneously g rinded by a twin grinder unit, then when cut is polished with a jeweler' s rouge to give undist. orted, clear vision and reflection. 3. FLOAT GLASS A f lat glass produced by a new process. It combines the fire-finish of sheet w ith the perfect flatness of plate frit, the usual combination of raw materials is melted in an oil or gasfired furnace. The melted glass leaves the furnace and passes to a float bath where it is supported on molten tin. Gravity keeps the liquid tin very flat, and he at, applied from above melts out any irregularities in the glass, which is free to conform to the perfectly flat til). As the ribbon of glass passes through the float bath, the heat is re duced until the glass is sufficiently hard to be fed on to the rollers of the lehr without marking the undersurface. After leaving tl)e lehr, the glass is cut into long lengths. This process is suitable for thi cknesses of 1/8, 3/16, and 1/ 4 in. TYPES OF GLASS 1. REFLECTIVE GLASS Used to control glare and reduce solar heat. It is the product of a glass-co ating process which is carried out in a large, rectangular vacuurri ' chamber. The gl ass is coated with micro-thin layers of metallic films which provide the performance characteristi cs of the glass. It reduces solar heat gain by reflecting the sun's energy, resulting in s avings in ini-

tial and operating costs of air conditioning. The reduced light transmi ssion also diminishes interior glare and brightness . . Manufactured in two types, silver and gold, the glass can be specified in any on e of three nominal light transmittances of 8, 14, or 20 percent. A chrome coating prov ides silvery outdoor reflections and creates a cool effect during the while bei ng neutrally transparent from the inside. At night. the glass "reverse" itself by being trans parent from the outside and semireflective from the inside. 2. ROLLED AND ROUGH CAST GLASS Similar to the process of making plate glass. Glass of this type is used where clear vision s not reqUired, such as by factory roofs and walls, windows for halls and stairc ases, sky lights, and partitions in offices. Cast glass diffuses light, and because of it s low reflecting and absorption index, transmits 90 to 93 percent of light rays striking it. 3. CATHEDRAL AND FIGURED GLASSES Manufacturing is similar to rolled and rough cast glasses. However, they conta in a pattern or texture impressed usually on one surface by a patterned roller. Thickn esses vary from 1/8 to 3/8 in. stock widths, from 40 to 50 in. with lengths up to 100 in. Example of pattern glass WALIN6 WAL.IfiG RS AURORA R1 LUNINGNING R4 OAHUA RZ. 5AMPAGUITA 4. WIRED GLASS Simply a rolled glass into which wire mesh is inserted during the process of man ufacture. The' wire greatly inqreases the resistance to shattering through impact wired glass as made in thicknesses of 7/32, 1/4 and 3/8 in. Stock widths 47 to 49 in. and lengt hs up to 178 in. are produced. 65 66 5. HEAT-ABSORBING PLATE GLASS This glass is made by adding ingredients to the mix used in making regular slate glass so that the finished product is pale bluish-green or gray. Because of its chemic al composition, this glass absorbs a significant percentage of the sun's radiant energy, thus reducing the build up of heat within the building . Its color and the fact that it po ssesses lower light transmission than regular plate means that glare and brightness i n the room are reduced. This type of glass is quite widely used for glazing in office buil dings, schools, and hospitals. 6. TEMPERED PLATE GLASS Three to five times as strong as regular plate. of. the same thickness- and are a in resisting compressive forces and fracture due to strain ()r thermal shock. It is made b y reheating

and suddenly .cooling plate glass. As a result, the outer surfaces are under hi gh compressive stress, while the center portion remains in tension. This produces a condit ion that is highly resistant to breakage. Tempered plate glass is used for swingin g doors, sliding patio doors. windows in gymnasiums and sports areas, skating rink encl osures, etc. Available in thicknesses of 1/ 4, 3/ 8, 1 !2, 5/ 8, 3/ 4 and 1 in.Sizes of sh eets vary with the thickness, but the normal maximum size is 96 x 120 in. 7. VITREOUS COLORED PLATE Polished plate glass can be heat-strengthened and coated on one side with vitreo us color which is fire-fused to the surface. The result is an opaque glass which is wide ly used in curtain wall construct ion, store fronts, showrooms, laboratories and industria l buildings. It should not be used as a glazing material but instead should be applied agains t a backup of masonry or have some type of insulative backing. Normal thickness is 1/4 in .; maximum standard size, 72 x 120 in. 8. LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS (Bullet proofing) Widely used in the automotive industry and transportation, but now finding some uses in the buil ding industry, like glass that can withstand firearm attack and explos ions. This is made of two thicknesses of plate or sheet glass bonded by a thin, tough layer of butyral resin, a transparent plastic. Safety glass made from sheet glass Is produced in thicknesses of 9/64, 7/32, 15 /64, and 1/ 4, maximum size of 7 sq. ft. for 9/ 64 thickness and 15 sq. h. for the res t. Safety glass rnade from plate glass in produced in thicknesses of 1 I 4, 3/ 8, 1 / 2, 5/8, 3/4, 7/8 and 1 in. Units of all thicknesse.s are made in a miximum size of 72 x 138 in. a s22lRA to tkB .an.d by .ac;t..31n!k6 MI fram.e . A y2'': 31r 12ft briWUI'l 'V+ or 4/s 111 . .. ... . ' 9. INSULATING GLASS This consists of two sheets of plate or sheet glass, separated by an air space, and joined around the edges to produce a hermitically sealed unit. There are three methods of sealing and all these sealed units provide therm al insulation and greatly restrict condensation. They reduce external noise but stilt permit the entry of natural light. - Fused Gitis an electrically fused all glass edge sheet glass 3/ 32 or 1 / 8 in thick is used with an air space of 3/ 16 in. CLASSIFICATION OF SHEET GLASS --lead

( use of a strip of lead sealed to the edges of the glass. 1. Window glass - used for gtazmg w1ndows doors and storm sash in residential b uildings where good light and vision are required at moderate cost. ihicknesses are 0.085 to 0.01 in. and 0.115 to 0.133 in. 2. Heavy sheet glass - used for glazing windows and doors where greater strengt h is required but where slight distortion is not objectionable. Commonly used for displ ay cases, shelving, window ventilators furniture tops and jalousies made of two th ickrlesses 3/ 6 and 7/ 32. 3. Picture glass -used for covering pictures, photographs, maps, charts proje ctor slides and instrument dials. Thickness vary from .043 to 0.053 in., O.o58 to 0.068 in. and 0.07 to 0.08 in. JALOUSIE 67 ... GLASS PRODUCTS 68 I. GLASS BLOCKS Two types: Compa_rable in many ways to unit masonry bi.Jt have the added feature of transmitting light. They are made into two separate halves, which are heat-sealed together to form a hollow unit with reasonably high thermal efficiency and sound insulation. The edge surfaces of the block are coated with a gritty mortar bond. 1. Functional blocks -direct or diffuse the daylight whi ch passes through t hem to improve the illumination of the building interior. Three styles of functional blocks: a. A light directing block-directs incoming light upward toward the ceiling. Used always above eye level. b. A light diffusing block -diffuses incoming light evenly throughout the inte rior of the room. c. General purposes block Size-S x 8 in. and 12 x 12 in. 4 in. thick 2. Decorative or architectural glass -available in a wide range of styles and p atterns. These glass masonry units provide almost unlimited design versatility wh en used in window, openings and facades, as interior walls and divider paneling. Also used for ceilings. Method of attachment is by gluing to a plywood background using rugb y. II. SOLID GLASS BRICK Also made to admit light into a building, because of its solid construction, it offers greater protection against vandalism than conventional window glass or glass blocks. The ability of the brick is to allow undistorted passage of light. Sizes 6 x 6 in., 8 x 8 in., 12-x 12 in., and 4 x 12 in.

... MILWAUKEE INTERNATIONAL MARKETING) INC . . .. mtrror :. 11 Yz''x AVail 1t1 it!b foUOwtt1g : NSI! 105 Net 501 StU: z4x (t'x3') pia111 Two 303 69 .,; 70 BJ:atk :arzhlt&.turJI m1rrZJr :arLhrtAt:furJjf mtrmr >IU: 11Vi'x 11Y2.'' . Z4''x 36'' .go) p/21n wrthout A 21 8t US. JALOUSIE- GRILL JALOUSIES MQOF SlATS STANOARO HEIGHT GLASS OR WOOD 4 14"7/8 10 s , . .. 3/8 .. 6 21 7/8 11 7 2&11a 8 28- 718. 9 :a- 3/8. 10 357/8" If 31318" 12 42-ue TWO LEVERS 13 14 718 11 15 as-w 16 K-718 11 17 soMt' 18 a - 718 .. 18 7-v8 20 70-'t/8 11 21 74- lf8. 22 77"718 23

81"3/8. 24 847/8 11 25 ee-318" 26 lt-7/Jr 21' H-v8 28 ue CHAPTER .. o . 72 PLASTICS A large group of synthetic materials which are made from a number of common sub stances such as coal, salt, oil, natural gas, cotton; wood and water. Fro m these, relatively simple chemicals known as monomers, which are capable or reacting with Qne anoth er are produced. These are then built up into chainlike molecules of high molecular weight called polymers. These polymers has low extensibility, can be molded, extruded cut, or wo rked into a great variety of objects, rigid or non rigid, relatively light, are forme d by condensatiQO polymerization and py vinyl polymerization. Plastic can be hard-soft, clear or opague., light or heavy, some are heat resistant and some softened by hot water. Two general classifications 1. Thermoplastics...: become soft when heated and hard when cooled. regardl ess of the number of times .the process is repeated. Included in the thermopl astics are acrylics polyethylene, Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) polysterene, po lyallomers polycarbonates, polyimide, polypropylene, polysulfone, phenylene oxide, nyl ons, methyl pertenes,Jonomer;fluoroplastics,acetal and acryonitrilebutaqieniene sly_ rene lABS). 2. Thermosetting Plastics -set into a permanent shape when heat and pressure ar e applied to them during the forming stage. Thermosetting group includes phenoli cs, aminos (urea and melamine) epoxies, polyesters, polyurethane, alkyd silico nes and diallyl phthalate (OAP). PRODUCTION Plastic.products are formed by a number of methods which include: a. Injection Molding Process- measured amount of powder or granules is heated and when flowing forced through. the nozzle of the barrel into a shape d cavity, Where it cools of solidities. (gears, knobs, wastebaskets) b. Blow-Molding Process-an extruder extrudes a hollow tube whi ch is ca

ptured between the two halves. of a hollow mold. As the mold closes, air is blown into the tube and expand it to tit the inside surface of the mold. (water cans and bot tles} c. Rotational Molding -Used to form hollow units with complex shapes and heavy walls, a premeasured amount of powder or liquid resin is placed at th e bottom half of a cold mold which is then closed. The mold is rotated horizontally and vertically to distribute the material evenly over the inner mold surfaces, passed th rough an over to heat and cure the plastic cooled, and finally opened to eject the p roduct. (Typical products are tanksand heater ducts). d. Expandable Bead Molding -a process used to produce light weight products of polysterene foam, small granules of polysterene with a small amount of an expand ing agent are praced in a rolling dtum and steam heated. heat softens the granul es, and the expanding agent enlarges their size. When they reached their required si ze, they are cooled, apd the expanded beads are transferred to a closed mold wh ere they are heated by steam. This softens them again, and they fuse together in to a block t Flotation equipment,. shipping containers and are typi cal products). e. Compression Molding-A measured quantity of powder is placed in a hea ted mold, which is then closed. Heat and pressure are applied to the powd er which melts and flows to all parts of the mold. There it sets and is removed from the mold to cool. Thermosetting plastics are f ormed by this method, tand radio, television chassis, handles and knobs are typical products). f. Transfer Molding-similar to compression .molding except that the pow der is heated and liquified outside the mold and injected into the mol.d under heat and pressure, where the forming and setting takes place. Phenolic is the most commo n used plastic. g. Foamed Plastics -are made by expanding agent with either granules or powde r and then heating it. Heat melts the plastic and causes the formation of a. gas which expands the molten material into a foamed structure. It is quickly cooled to se t the material in its expanded state (upholstery, insulation and packaging fill}. h. Thermoset Foam-Made by mixing the appropriate resin with a curing agent and an .expanding agent and then heating them in a mold. The heat activates the expandi ng agent and subsequently the cuFing agent so that the expanded material is set in that

state. (Usual products are thermal insulation shock absorbing pads, mattres s pads and furniture curshions). i. Extrusion Forming-Used for mass-produced materials which have a const ant cross section, and it is done in two ways by forcing of semiliquid plastic thr ough a die of the proper size and shape in a manner similar to that used for forming br ick by extrusion. (Tubes, rods, water hose, drainpipes house siding and molding trim are formed in this way}. The other extrusion method involves forcing wire, cable or cord through a die along with the plastic so that the material emerges with a plastic coating. j. Thermoforming process-sheet plastic is heated until soft and then forced by air pressure against a cold and hardens in shape (typical products include domed s kylights, refrigerator liners, cups etc.t k. laminating Process-consists of impregnating sheets of paper, glass fibe r, or cloth with a thermosetting liquid resin and then applying heat and pre ssure to a number of sheets to form a laminated product. (Plain and patterned wall paneli ng, table top material and industrial laminate board) I. Casting -a simple in which liquid plastics, with their approp riate curing agents, are poured into molds and set, with or without heat. (typical casti ng products are pipes, rods, sheets). m. Calendaring Process -plastic is fed to revolving rollers which turn out a th in sheet or film the thickness of the product is by the roller spacing, and-th e surface of the sheet may be smooth or matted, depending on the roller surface. In a somewhat similar process paper, metal, fabric, ceramics or other plastics are passed between roller which apply a plastic coating to one or both surface. USES IN CONSTRUCtfON Some plastic products are used as structural or semi-structural components, s ome as auxiliarv materials and some as one of the components of a composite material. a. Structural-a common plastic product used for this purpose is a glass. fiber reinf?rced corrugated sheet, made from acrylic, polyvinyl chloride, or p 0 1yester. These plastics are not only transparent but also highly resistant to discoloration. Th ey have good resistance to weather, breakage and chemicals. Good for roliing .m aterial made in a variety of colors, sheets are normally 18 or 24 in. wide and up to 14ft. long. 73 74 The 5arrie plastic materials are used to produce flat sheets, with or withou t

glass fiber reinforcing. In flat form the sheets may be used to replace glass in ows or may be molded by the thermoform process into any roof shapes. Plastic materials are widely used in the manufacture of sandwich panels used in curtain-wall construction. In some cases only the sandwich core is a plastic mat erial and in some cases even the face is plastic. Other. sandwich panels are made by bonding plastic sheets to an aluminum grid core: One of the important reasons for using plastic in place of glass is the great di fference in weight. Normally glass weighs about seven times as much per lineal f oot as the plastic substitutes. Reinforced acrylic is used to make the dome pans employed in forming a twoway rib, or waffle-type, concrete slab. . Rigid slabs of foamed plastic are finding increasing use structural pur poses slabs of expanded polystyrene are used to form the roof deck for a hyperbolic pa raboloid roof. Because of their flexibility the slabs can readily be fitted to the contours of the roof. Later the deck will be covered by concrete. One of the most important uses made of is in the manufacture of insulation an standard size is 24 x 96 in., thicknesses .of 1, 2, 3 and 4 in. On the site, foa{Tled insulation maybe produced by foaming-in-place, using polyurethane or epoxy two-par:t resins. The process consists of. injecting controlled amounts of resin liquid, a foaming catalyst, and a curing agent into the en closed space to be insulated. The reaction forms a foam .. which expands and sets, fi lling a certain portion of the space. Polysterene is one material ideally suited for structural components. 1t has rigidity, lightness, good impact.resistance and structural strength. It has the ab ility to be molded in any shape. It is resistant to shuttering, is weather and corrosion -resistant and is dimensionally stable. Nonstructural m..lterials used in construction using plastics are wall and flo or coverings, vapor and moisture barriers flashing material, water stops e xpansion joint material, pipe and conduit; hardware products. Plastics are also used for rigid and resilient floor coverings Vinyl and vinyl -as bestos tile are resilient type floor coverings in common use. Plastics are used in the manufacture of plastic wall tiles, usually made from molded styrene. Rigid panels or sheets in color patterns are made from syrene, acrylics , and vinyl plastic. Hardboard plasteboard and paperboard are plastic-coated or cove red with a thin film of vinyl containing a printed pattern. Steel and aluminum -backed vinyl sheets are produced which can be formed and shaped without damaging the vinyl covering. Plastic lamlnatesi are. so called. because they consists of three or more layer s

of material bonded or laminated together with plastic adhesive under high pressu re. The base is made up of multiple layers of strong kraft paper, impregnat ed with phenolic, amino, or epoxy liquid resin. This is covered with a printed pattern sheet saturated with melamine resin. A picture top sheet is also saturated with mela mine or pherolic resin, and in some cases a sheet of aluminum toil is inserted betwee n the base and the .decorative center layer to dissipate heat and prevent marring the surface with burns. These layers are used as cabinet and tabletop. Standard thickness are 1/32 1/16, 1/10, and 1/Sin. and widths are 24, 30, 36, 48and 60 in: Length range fro m S' ft. to 12ft. A great variety of pattern and colors are available . . protoLtiV.B top wrfh t;.atur2Jt/M Wtth .alumnum fat (optton.al) -lay.er t.l! of kraft _1mpreqnatM wrth r15111. Films used as moisture and vapor barriers are commonly made from polythylene, and polyvinyl chloride in thicknesses of 2, 4 and 6 mils. Water stops (strips placed across construction joints in concrete walls to prevent water passage and strips to be used to form control joints in concrete b lock walls are made from polyvinyl chloride. Several types of plastic are used to produce rigid and flexible pipes due to its resistance to rust and corrosion, ease and economy of installation and long le ngths available. 75 CHAPTER , 78 ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS materials have at least two common characteristics. Cohesiveness- the a bili4 tv of material to cling t ightly to one another and adhesiveness- t he ability of a matenal to frx rtself and cling to an entirely different material. 1. GLUES a. Animal Glue -Available in either solid or liquid form. Solid glue is.melted and applied hot. It is slow setting _,nd allows time for adjustment to the glue joint. Anim al glue has excellent bonding properties with wood, leather, paper or cloth developing up to 1 2,000 psi in. shear. h has moderate resistance to heat and good resistance to cold but po or resistance to water. It cures by air drying at room temperature. b. Blood 4 Aiuminum Glue-a special animal glue made for use particularly with leather and paper. It has only very moderate bonding/power with wood. It is usually sold as a dry powder which is mixed with water. It has fair resistance to both heat and cold b

ut poor resistance to water, will dry from 150 to 200F. c. Casein Glue - madefrom protein materials, is a dry powder to be mixed with w ater. It has good bonding powder for wood-to:wood or paper 4 to-wo0d applications and will develop the full strength of the wood in most Casei n glue has goo d dry heat resistance and moderate resistance to cold. It has moderate resistance to 'J'' .. ter but does not perform well when subjected to high humidity or wetting.and drying cycles. I t is subject to attack from molds, fun.gi, and other wood organisms, will dry to as lo w as 359f with moderate pressure. d. Starch and Dextrin glues-available in both dry and liquid state, the dry gl ue being mixed with water. They have good bond with paper or leather and fair bond with w ood, but strength does not compare with those of animal or casein glues. They have fair resistance to heat and cold but poor resistance to water. They dry at room temp erature. e. Asphalt Cements - are thermoplastic' materials made from asphalt emul sions or asphalt cutbacks. They have a good bond to paper and concrete and are used main ly for roofing applications and for laminating layers of wood fiberboard. Theyhave rela tively poor resistance to heat but good resistance to cold and good water resistance. f. CelluJose Cements-are thermoplastic in nature and have good bond to wood, pa per, leather or glass, developing up to (400 psi in shear with wood. They have moder ate resistance to both heat and cold and good resistance to water. A common solvent is ethyl acetate. Cellulose cement cures by air drying and setting. g. Chlorinated-rubber adhesive-is usually a liquid; it has good bond for pape r and fair bond with wood, metal or glass. Strength does not compare with animal or casein glues. It has moderate resistance to heat, cold, and but poor resistance to creep . It cures by drying at room temperature. The usual solvent is ketone. h. Natural-rubber adhesives -are usually latex emulsions or dissolved crepe rub ber. They have a good bond with rubber or leather and fair bond with .wood; ceramics, or glas$, _devel<;lp_!nQ strengths of _about __ They haw fai r resistance to heat and cold, good resistance to water, but poor resistanee to creep. Room tem pera-ture is su!f_!cient i. Nitrile or Buna N rubber adhesive -available in both thermoplastic and ther mosetting types. It has good .bond with wood, paper, porcelain, enamel and polyester film or sheet. The thermosetting type will develop up to 4,00 psi shear and the thermoplastic type up

to En> psi. It has good _resistance to heat a!'ld cold and excellent water res istance, while its creep resistance is fairty good. This adhesive cures under heat. . j. Neoprene-rubber adhesives-are essentially thermoplastic in nature, thoug h they may have some _thermosetting characteristics. They have excellent bond with woo d, asbestos board, metals, glass and some plastics with up to 1,200 psi in They have good resistance to heat and cold and excellent resistance to water. Cr eep resistance is fairly good. Used to cement' plastic laminates to walls o.r flat su rfaces. Aiso used in cementing gypsum board to studs and ceiling joists and for laminating on e layer of gypsum board to another .. Urea formaldehyde resin glues -available in powder-form to be mixed w ith water, and in liquid form, which requires the addition of a hardener. They are thermosetting in nature, with excellent bond to wood, leather, or pap er having a shear strength of up to 2,800 psi. They have good resistance to heat and co ld and fair resistance to water. Creep resistance is good. Wood welding can be done by apply ing a high-frequency electric current directlyto joint for rapid curing. I. Phenolic Resin Glues-are made )n both dry and liquid form. They are therm osetting glues with excellent bond to wood and paper. Shear strengths up to 2,800 psi ar e developed. They have excellent resistance to heat, cold, creep, and water. Some set at room temperature, while others require a hot press. These hot-press glues are commonl y used in the manufacture of plywoods. m. Melamine Resins -thermosetting glues manufactured as a powder with a separate catalyst . They have excellent bond with wood or paper resistance to heat, c old, creep, and water are all excellent. Melam_ine resins are cured under hot press at 300F. Melamine-formaldehyde resin glues are manufactured as a powder mixed with-water and may be either hot setting or intermediate-temperaturesetting types. n. Resorcinol resins-are usually made as a liquid with a separate catalyst . They have . good bond with wood or paper, developing shear strengths up to 1,950 psi with wood. They have very good resistance to heat, cold and creep and are generally used wh ere a water proof joint is required. Some cure at room temperatures, while others req uire_ mo; derate heat, up to 200f. o. Epoxy resins -are thermosetting in nature, manufactured in liquid form with a separate catalyst. The amount of catalyst added determines the type of curi ng r equired. They have excellent bond with wood, metal, glass and masonry and are widely used in tbe

manufacture of laminated curtain-wall panels of various kinds. They are a lso used in making repairs to broken concrete. They have excellent resistance to both heat a nd cold, while creep resistance and water resistance vary widely, depending upon how the glue is compounded. Adding a regular catalyst, curing is by hot press, up to 3900f while adding a strong catalyst results in glue which will cure at room temperature. p. Polyvinyl-resin adhesives-in the form of an emulsion. They have good bond with wood or paper or vinyl plastics and reasonably good bond with metal. Shear str engths up to 1,000 psi are developed with wood. Resistance to cold is good, but heat, s;reep, and water resistance are only fair. These glues cure at roomtemperature. q. Sodium silicate adhesives-are liquids which have excellent bond with paper o r-glass and reasonably good bond with wood or metal. Resistance to heat, cold and creep are .. good, but water resistance is poor. Some cure at room temperature. while other r equire moderate heat, in the 200F range. 2. SEALERS Sealirtg compounds are products which are used to seal the surface of various m aterials against the penetration of water or other liquidS or in some cases to prevent the escape of water through the surface. To do this they must have some adhesive qualities and the ability to fiU the surface pores_and form a continuous skin on the surface to wtlich the y are applied. 79 80 In many applications, the adhesion should be permanent, while in others it need o nly to be temporary. Types of Sealers a. liquid asphalt - either in cutback form or as an asphalt emulsion. Uses are, to coat the outer surface of concrete below ground level to prevent the penetration of water to the interior through pores in the concrete. Another similar use is to seal the inside surface of wooden or concrete water ta nks. Another use is as a sealer or primer over a concrete slab before asphaltic tile adhesive is appfled. Here, the sealer prevents liquids from being withdrqwn from th e flooring or aphesive, allowing it to become dry and hard. In order to be effective as a membrane, sealers must be elastomeric in character. That is, they must be resilent enough to be able to expand over sm all cracks in the base surface 'without losing, their effectiveness and be able to bridge j oints between members without rupture, in. case of movement at the joint. b. Polysulflde polymers -this has excellent adhesive qualities, are highl y flexible, and maybe applied either by ha_nd or by spray. They are being used in exterior wails

of foundations, between two-course concrete slab floors, on roof decks, as swi mming;lool waterproofing and under roof flashing, These polysulfide-polymer sealers are two-component, chemically curing ma terials which are produced for either hand or machine mixing. The hand-mix sealer has a work life of approximately A hours and curing time of 24 hours at 75F. The machine-mixed variety will have a work life of about 5 minutes and curing time of approximately 45 -minutes. One gallon of prepared sealer will cover approximately 25 sq. ft. or about 3 to 5 sq. m., with a membrane of 60 mils thickness, which wiU expand and contract the base w ithout cracking. c. Solution of sodium silicate-used to seal the inside surface of concrete li!:lu id containers. The sodium silicate forms a gel-like fi lm on the surface to pr event water pemitration. d. W.ax compounds-made in the form of emulsions to be sprayed over the s urface pf. newly placed concrete. The wax oxidizes to form a continuous film prevents the e vap<iration of water from concrete in this case the adhesion is only temporary. As the conto oxidize it becomes hard and brittle and flakes or is worn off the conc rete by traffic. Other waxes are used to make sealers for concrete and terrazzo floors which prev ent the penetration of oil and grease into the floor surface. e. liquid silicones-are used as sealers over concrete, brick and tile mason ry to prevent the penetration of water into the surface. The absorption of water by masonry walls often ieads to staining and efflorescen ce. The silicone sealers are particularly valuable for such applications because they ar e colorless and do not affect the aPJ)eai'Snce of the waU. f. Oits and turpentines -sealers used to seal wood surfaces before the ap plication of paint or varnish. They penetrate into and are absolbed by the wood fibers so the vehicle in paints and varnish will not be similarly absorbed. Similar seale rs are used to seal wood which will not be painted against moisture penetration. g. Synthetic plastic products-sealers for wood which form a film over the surfa ce and allow better bonding of synthetic lacquers to wood .. h. Thin solutions of animal and casein glues -are used to coat the surface of plaster and gypsu.m board under paint. These products are commonly known as wall sizin g. i. Epoxy-resin formulation-used as sealers over concrete, wood, or. old terrazzo surfaces before epoxy-resin terrazzo is applied. The thin liquid adheres to and se

als the okt and provides good bond tCx- the new application. Similar sealers are use d under concrete surface repairs. 3. GLAZING AND CAULKING COMPOUNDS These are similar materials, but difference is that when used for sealing glass they are known as glazinij compounds. Properties of caulking materials. a. it must be able to adhere to the surfaces with which it comes in contac t. b. it must remain workable.ovef a considerable range of 81 82 . . ' c. it must be able to form a tough, elastic skin OYer the surface, while the interior of the ITI8SS remains flexible. d. it must be able to stretch or elongate with changes that may occur in the wi dth of the._ joint. e. it must have good movement capability that is, it must have movement in eith er exten sion or compression from that mean. f. it must be able to recover well after having been extended or compressed. g. it mll st have very low sensitivity to water. h. it must have low volatility. i. it must be able to provide good service performance. Five f51 groups of caulking compounds. a. Mastics-group of caulking compounds includes linseed-oil-putty, Hnseedoii:isobutylene caulks, mastic glazing and caulking compounds, this has a recovery of 0 t o 10 percent. b. Elaatomastics ...,..includes butyl caulks having a solvent base, acrylic cau lks with solvent or emulsion base, and acrylic caulks which are 100% Solids and one part polymer captan. This has a recovery of 10 to 49 percent. c. one and two part polysulfides containing 100 percent sol ids one part silicone with 100 percent solids. one and two part urethanes with 100 perc ent solids, vinyl chloride polymers, andlbutadiene- styrene coi:)olyme..S . d. Elastoplastics-include neoprene and hypolon caulks with a solvent base. e. Plastics-include high-molecular weight caulking materials which are speciall y treated to be extruded. as plastic or cellular sheets or strips. Materials for caulking a. Unseed-oil putty-most common. Used almost exclusively for glazing woo den . sash. It is made by mixing very finely ground calcium carbonate with raw linseed oil . Putty tends to become harcl and brittle with age, but its life can be extended by p riming the sash before glazing and by frequent painting. Mastic glazing and caulking compounds are composed of a number of materials ble nd 841 to prOduce a substance which has a much life than putty and whic h may

have an elongation rate of up to 10 percent. They are made up of: 1. drying oil-a vegetable. oil such as soya-bean or linseed oil to provide the cohesion and absorbs oxygen from air to produce a dry film. 2. Mondrylng oil -a hydrocarbon - oil is included to plasticize and to help the material maintain itS fle.xibility with age .. 3. A driflr-used to accelerate the formation of a.surface skin and is usually a metallic salt. 4. Solvflllts-used to adjust workability. 5. Mineral stabilizer - often an asbest os fiber, which helps the caulking to m aintain its position or Shape prior to set. 6. R//er- usuafly a very low finely powdered limest one which gives the caulking body, and reduces shrinkage. The caulking materials described above are oxidizing types and are used i n exposed areas where painting aVer their surface may be desirable. b. and polybutene caulking compounds - are mastic materials. They are nonand set through tfle evaporation of the solvent. Both may have tmers a nd stabicombined with them and give good results where a skin is not required. Uke under flashmgs, between lapped joints, and in hidden joints between wood and masonry . c. eiastomers-two types one is a two-component type of caulking, co nsistng of a base compound and an accelerator. It cures by polymerization. The rate o f curing increased with increasing temperature and humiditY. It is normally ap plied by-a caulk109 gun . Aluminum - colored polysulfide-based caulking is also popular for use wi th a aluminum-frame window units. d. Silicone mastic caulking -one component product which cures on exposure to a ir . It ' has exce."ent adhesion and can be used where high elongation properties are re quir8d. This caulking is available in a of colors. e. Butyl, neoprene and hypalon mastic caulkings are solvent types made with fil lers and pigments and are thus available in a of colors. f. Cellular sponge sheet and strips- produced from high-molecular weight ma terials, with similar properties as mastic caulkings. The disadvantage of using tt:lis i s that special. adhesives are required to join strips, and mavnot be available in the field. Backup Materials Are important part of a good watertight joint. The purpose of such a material is to control the depth. of joint, to prevent moi sture frQm at tacking the bond between caulking and the sides of the joint, and to serve as a bond breaker, so that the material can elongate. Backup materials are sponge rubber, nontarred oakum, fiberglass insulation, po

lyurethane foam, closed-cell polyethylene foam; neoprene or butyltubes and cords, fi berboard, and corkboard strips. Do not use any oil, t8r or asphalt impregnated materials , moisture absorbing materials and polystyrene foams. 83 C H A P T E ~ : . l . '- . . . . INSULATING MATERIALS 86 THERMAL INSULATION ll cold weather, we are interested in transferring heat from furnaces, radiators, heating panels, into various rooms of our buildings. At the same time we are interested in preventing that heat from being transferred from the interior of the building to the outside. During the summer. it is important that we prevent the transfer of hot outside temperatures to the working and living space within our buildings. All of these are done by .the Judicious use of materials which best prevent the transfer of heat, and this we call Thermal insulation. There are three ways wherein heat is transferred. a; Conduction-The of Q concrete wall which has one side exposed to outs ide winter temperatures feels cold to the touch. Heat is being conducted from the side of higher temperature to that of lower temperature. b. Radiation-from ltlis point, it is transferred to the outside air by radiatio n. c. Convection-When air is heated, it expands and begins to circulate during the culation, it comes in contact with cooler surface, some of its heat given up to them. It is therefore important to try to prevent air currents (Convection rents) from being set up in the walls and ceilings of our buildings. This be by keeping the layer of air relatively thin-not over lin. -and by dividing the e into small enclosed compartments. The convection currentS-set up in -the confined .spaces. are insignificant can causes little heat transfer to prevent heat loss by conduction, we must use mate- rials that ars poor conductors to prevent loss by radiation materials be used which will reflect rather than radiate heat. KINDS OF THERMAL INSULATION There are nine basic kinds of thermal insulation: 1. Loose Fill-This bulky and divided into: ' a. Fibrous Type - made from mineral woolrock wool, glass wool, or slag wool-or vegetable fiber-usually wood 'fiber. b. Gnmular insuliltlon -are made from expanded minerals such as perlite and vermiculite or from ground vegetable matter such as granulated cork. Flbmus Loose Fi/t ...:. is used to insulate walls of buildis Cur can spac and the must

ings that have been built without insulation. In such cases holes are drilled in the wall between each pair of studs, a hose inserted .and the insulation blown in until the space in filled. Granules-are graded into four sizes, 1, (3/8 in. to no. 16 sieve) and sizes 2 (no. 4 to no. 30 sieve) used as Loose-Fill insulation for sidewalls and ceilings over suspended ceilings, between wood over a concrete floor slab, as fill for the cores of concrete blocks and sizes 3 (no. 8 to no. 1.00 sieve) size 4 (no. 16 to 100 sieve). 2. Blanket Insulation- is made from some fibrous material such as miner al wool. woOd fiber, cotton fiber, or animal hair, manufactured in the form of a mat, 1 6, 20 or 24 in. width, in 8ft. lengths or put up in rolls of from 40 to 100 linear feet, with co ntrolled thicknesses of 1, 1/2, 2, 3 and 4 in. \ Some are made with no covering at all, some with a paper back on one side only, some with vinyl cardboard or wire mesh one side, while others are completely enc losed in envelope. Those with backing or envelopes are usually provided with a stapling flange so t hat they can be stapled to the sides or edges of studs and Joists. Blankets are used where large areas m.ust be insulated. These include such pla ces as sidewalls in new construction, over head in floored attics between joists in un floored attics, in crawl spaces and over suspended ceilings. TO OF 5TUOf> TABS STAPLED TO SlOE CX: 87 88 l. _Batts -similar to blankets "but they are restricted to 48 in. long or less t hey are always with paper, and made especially for installation between stud spaci ngs. Batts usually have paper tabs along the edges for easier attachment to the frame. 4. Structural Insulation Boarit -made from organic fiber-wood, cane, straw or c ork. The wood and cane .raw material is first pulped, after which it is treated with wat erproofing chemicals. The fibers are then formed into sheets of various thicknesses in a continuing process and cut into standard lengths. Some boards are impregnated with asphalt during the manufacturing process, while others are given a coat of asphalt they a re made. Strawboard-is made from carefully selected straw, fused under heat and pressure into a panel 2 in. thick and 4ft. wide. Boards are completely sealed in pap er covers of various types to provide the proper surface for painting, papering, plastering, .stucco or roofing. Corkboard-is made from granulated cork mixed with resin and pressed int o

sheets of several thicknesses. depending on the use to which they will be put. A common thickness is 3 in. the board being used for roof insulation. (see ceiling acou stical board) Structural Insulation Board - is used in exterior wall sheathing roof decking, r oof insulation under built-up roofing, shingle backer. interior finish board and in sulating form board. Sizes Exterior Shflllthing - 1/2 in. thick, square edged sheets, 4 ft. wide and from 6 to 12ft. long, impregnated with asphalt. Shingle Backer -made 5/16 or 3/ 8 in. thick in strips 11 3/ 4, 13 1/ 2. 15, 15 1/2 in wide and 48 in. long. Roof Insulation- made from 1/ 2 to 3 in. thick in single or multiple layers and in several dimensions. Interior WallBoard- made 5/16, 3/ 8 and 1/2 in. thick in sheets of 4 x 8 and 4 x 10ft. 5. Block or Rigid Slab Insulation- This type of insulation is so called because the units are relatively stiff and inelastic. In most cases inorganic materials are used in their manu 4 factures. This include mineral wool with binder, fratned plastic, cellula r, glass, foamed concrete, cellular hard rubber, shredded wood and cement. The basic material is a non conductor and that the finished product contains millions of isolated ai r cells. which makes these materials high in insulative value. Mineral wool from perlite or vermiculite, when mixed with a binder and processed or fixed to a rigid back, sheets are produced which are -suitable for roof-de ck insulation. Foamed Plastic Insulation-is made from expanded polystyrene' and expanded polyurethane formed into slabs of various dimensions and thicknesses_ (one popular brand is styropor) Ce/lulllr Giau Jnsullltion- is 11\ade frOm expanded molten glass cast int o block fonnand cut various s.izes and shapes, thicknesses. of 2, 2 1/2 and 3 and 4 in. are available in 12 x 18 in. blocks, a 1112 in thickness is produced in 24 x 48 in. slabs. Me thod of appli-. cation on flat surface is in bot asphalt or asphalt emulsion. For vertical surf ace, mastic is Used. Foamed Concrete as desc:ribed in chapter is an importai1t insulating material be cause of its closed ..cell construction. Foamed concrete precast roQf slabs are used for insulative as well as structural purposes and can have a built-up roof applied without furt her roof insulation. Cellular hard rubber is a synthetic material containing cells filled with nitro gen, It is formed into siabs of varying sizes and thicknesses.

Shredded wood or wood Fiber by itself is a form of blanket insulation but whe n cement slurry or special cements are added, it sets; up int o a rigid block with s imilar insulating qualities. Rigid Slllb lnsul11tion -are paqicularly useful for such aP-plications as roof-d eck insulation, perimeter insulation, pine i\)sulation, cold storage work, and cavity wall insulation . . It can-also insufate masonry without furring . . . PERIMETER INSULATICN buktpma01ry t-------r- ng1J n$Ulatltlf1 Rigid insul11tion -which are impervous to moisture penetration resulting from co ntinuous contact with the earth and moisture are useful as perimet er insulation. 6. Reflective Insulation-made from such materials as aluminum or copperJoil o r sheet metal, with bright 'surfaces that reflect heat rather than absorbing it. Aluminum Foil - is produced ' in or rolls and made up into blankets. CopperFoillnsulations--is commonly made in the form of a thin paper core covered on one or both sides with copper. . . LE' IUN& J<> 5I . ltL \.JMINUM -fOil.. . 89 90 Rsflectiv's -can be used in stud!_ rafter and joist spa1:es, to insulate walls, roofs, ceilings and _floors.and for cold-storage Sheet Foil-is cor.1monly made 36 in. wide and on stud walls should be installed vertically for maximum benefit. A 36 in. width will span two 16 in. stud spaces and d rape back each pair of studs to form an air space between it and the inside fin ish. ,----- rt$UIJtl011 batt GM.afh1119 fintGh qyp.;;um )4tH -tn5UI3t"JOI1 7. Foamed-In-Place Insulation-This is polyurethane product made by combining a poly isocyan.ate and a ployester resin. This type of insulation can be applied either by pouring or by spraying. The bas ic ingredients for both are drawn from their containers, measured, and mixed by mac hine. Application by Pouring -a carefully measured amount of the mixture is deposited in an existing cavity. The mixture reacts and foams up to fill a predetermined portion of the space to be filled. This volume of foam is called a "LIFT", and normally Is limited to a height of about 14 in. when the foam has set, a new rrft is poured and thi s process is repeated until the space is completely Filled.

Application by Spraying -a number of thin coats of foam are applied, are over th e other, with sufficient time being left betWeen each application for the foam to set up. Bv any desired thickness of insulation can be applied. ij. Sptayed-on-lnsulations- materials used are polyurethane foam asbestos fib er mixed with inorgan.ic binders, vermiculite aggregate with a binder such as portlan d cement or gypsum and perlite aggregate using gypsum as a binder. Machines are used for blow ing insulations into place; as a result the shape or irregularity of the s urface being insufated is of little consequence. Asbestos-Fiber insulation is usually applied over a base coat of some adh esive, often a latex-type water emulsion. The primer should be applied to only as much of the surface as can be sprayed with fiber while the adhesive is still tacky. Applicat ion direct j.O metal lath does not require the priming adhesive . . This type of insulation also seals cracks a'nd crevices to prevent dust f rom shifting through and eliminates joint and lap problems common to corrugated bliliding mat erials. It also tends to protect' metal fro":' corrosive action: Vermiculite and Perlite aggregate can be sprayed over a .base of gypsum lath, base coat plaster, masonry surface or lath. 9. Corrugated Insulation-This is usually made from paper formed into shapes th at produce enclosed air pockets. One type is produced by shaping heav paper into a ser ies of small regular semicircular corrugations and covering a both sides with a sheet of flat paper to give strength and produce the air pockets. This can be done using eithe r single or multiple layers of corrugated paper. = . <>IN6LE MULTIPLE CLlRRUGATION This type of insulation is produced either in sheets or rolls, depending on the thickness of the mat, and is applied in strips fitting between studs or in large shee ts cemented to a flat surface. A more rigid type of corrugated insulation is made by forming a honey comb-shap ed mat with paper and covering both sides with flat paper sheet. The whole thing i s given its rigidity by spraying with a thin coating of portland cement slurry or other type ; of stiffener. The resulting paper mat, from 1 to 4 in. thick is quite strong and may be 1 tised tor nonbearing partitions. without further surport, plastered on-both sides. 91 CHAPTER . . 94 PREVENTIONS 1. WATERPROOFING- a method of protecting surfaces against the destructive effec

ts of water . 2. DAMP-PROOFING -protection from the outside is provided by water repellent ma terials which tum water aside and force it to return to the earth. The dampness that sometimes occurs inside the building can be caused by penetration of moisture from the outside or by condensation of water vapor generated on the inside. 3. CLEAR PROTECTIVE TREATMENTS FOR MASONRY, CONCRETE This is a clear, invisible silicOne water repellent specially formulated for ap plication on masonry and bricks (standard silicone repellant) and for limestone and con crete that seeps much rai nwater (special silicone repellant). The silicone liquid is ap- plied by brush or low pressure spray and does not affect ;,the color or naturaln ess of the material. 4. ANAY !Termite) proofing by Soil Poisoning It is important to poison the soil against anay (white ants) in order to stop th e anay from infesting the mainp<lsts, walls and flooring. 5. WOOD PRESERVATIVE (Powder Post Termites) a chemical liquid painted and appli ed to lumber to prrve it for years. It protects wood against powder post beetles (B ukbo1d powder post termite (unos), decay causing funQi, such as sap stain and dryrot. 6. FIREPROOFING -a clear liquid applied easily on woOd, plywood, lumber a nd other board that retains the natural. beauty, gives added strength and protec ts materials against fire, weather, decay, insects and warping. Since the liquid penetrates into the wood, when there is fire. tt reacts by dispersing the flame, preventing progreSs ive bum ing. 7. RATPROOFING-A method of protecting rooms against the Intrusion of rats and other small destructive animals from gnawing the wooden parts of the house, habi t8ting on ceilings and floors of. houses and buildings. 8. RUSTPROOFtNG -a method of protecting the ferrous materials like steel, iro n from rusti ng. or corrosion. 9. FLOOR PROTECTION -when floors are subjected to wear and tear, or from chemic al abrasions and heavy use, a special kind of material should be used to protect the flooring. 10. DESCALERS; Paint and Chemical Strippers When an old house having old paint is in need of repainting, paint remover is ap pliea to the surface which softens and lifts the paint. For cleaning of buildings from stains, rUSt, algae or even cement build up from forms or etc. a chemical .stripper or desealer Is used. 11. CONTROL, PROTECT AND MANAGE For buildings that need total control of the incoming and outgoing individuals

for the protection of the building as a whole from robbers, stealers, etc. There are so ma.nv equipments which can be installed. DISCUSSIONS: 1. WATERPROOFING This is a.,.,Cied on the following locations: @ WATER TANKS \8' . GUTTERS RCG'MG, AJR<VN .f@ REFR16ERA110N of, at.o Ra:'>MG Three of waterproofint: 1. INTEGRAl in powder form is added and mixed with the aggregates o f concrete. In this case, one pack of usually .908 kilos is added to one bag of ki ios cement .. Some of the -known brands are sahara and sakura. 96 : I''' 2. MEMBRANE TYPE-recommended for use where direct rain, or standing. water are eminent, as seen in the illustrations, there are about 14 uses. The materials us ed depending on the manufacturer is .either asphalt paper laid with hot asphalt, impregna ted asbestos felt, sometimes thick polyethylene sheeU is also used. Other materials are p erformed setf sealing asphalt. LA\0 ON C O N C R E T ~ GLAS 3. FLUID APPLIED-a fluid applied eSastomeric coating based on heavy solids el astomer compound formulated to waterproof and preserve the substrate, like concrete , wood, bricks and steel. The waterproofing is monolothic, seamless, flexibte and etas tic over a wide temperature range, withstands extreme thermal movement, settling and cracki ng. It resists puncture and tearing abrasive overlayments. This e&astomeric fluid can be applied by roller, brush, spray or squeegee. I. INTEGRAL TYPES -ul8 Sahara or Sakura brand in packs. II. MEMBRANE TYPE A. JOHN'S MANVILLE (Norton andHanison Inc.) ROOFING FELTS: The base fetts used in Built-up Roofing are available in two basic types-ASBESTO S FELTS and ORGANIC or RAG FELTS. They look alike, superficialty, bt.rt they diffe r . widely in service. Comparison: ASBESTOS 1. Asbestos Fefts -composed primarily of asbestOS fiber, a non-rotting, non-wic king inorganic mineral fiber. 2. Identical expansion and contraction to finishing fefts. 3. Minimum stretch and shrinkage or wetting or drying which meane minimum diF tortion. 4. Loses strength stowly while aging.

5. Excellent resistance to "burnout" in hot climate. 6. Aot resistant. ORGANIC 1. Organic Felts-composed of fibrous organic materials. Subject to deteriorati on by oxid4ltion and to wicking. 2. DiffMent eKpansion and contraction properties from finishing plies. Maximum stretch and shrinkage on wetting and drying which means maximum distortion. 4. Loses strength rapidly while aging. 5. Poor resistance to "bum out" in hot climate. 6. Poor resistance.tQ rot. 98 FINISHING. 11LES SAND : .: . ... PLY IMPREGNAll:D Fa. I ROOFiNG ! .. .. .. .. ... .. .. g ... ... . .. .. PLY . -: ! . : : :'! . .. 6 . :... ':. .. A.;;Be>TOS PRIMeR. : .. ve SPECIFICATIONS FOR 3-PLY 15LBS. ASBESTOS FELT ON ASBESTILE CEMENT FOR CONCRETE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Allautfaces must be smooth, clean and dry and free from foreign materials. The surface .shall contain no projections or holes, and shall prov!de a solid base for the membrane waterproofing. Where horizontal meets vertical wall, : a cant shall be prOvide d. MATERIALS: 1. Concrete Primer 2. 15-lb Asbestos Felt 3. Asbestile Cement. APPLICATION: 1. Coat the entire surface with concrete primer Up to aU surrounding vertical surfaces. 2. Over this primed,' surface apply three (3) layen of JM 15-lb. asbestos felt, cemented to each layer with asbestile cement in the following manner: Start applying one (1) 12;. width, then over that, one (1) 24"' wide, then ove r both, a fulf 36 wide. Following felts are to be applied full width, over lapping the prec eding felt by 24-2/3"'. . 3. Over the felts apply a finishing coat of asbestile cement. 4. The instaUation of the membrane wat\\rproofing shall be done by an appro.ved roof. ing contractor authorized by the manufacturer. 5. No stibstitution of materials shall be made unless .authorized in writing by the architect (or engineer) prior to starting the work of waterproofing. TWIN 20 BUILT-UP ROOFING SPECIFICATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: The roof deck.shall be trowelled smooth; firm, dry, clean and free of rubbish, loose .or

foreign materials and obstruction9. The deck shall be properly graded to drain w ater freely into gutters and downspouts. Dr$inage connections shalf be set up to permit the free flow of water;. Installation of cut-out flashing.and cants in the angle formed by the de Ck and vertical surfaces, as well as the installation of metal fittings and similar work, shall be completed b8fore roOfing work shall be started. MATERIALS: Materials be as follows; 1. N&H Concrete Primer 2. JM Asbestos, Roofing Fett, Perforated, 20 lbs. per square 3. Roofing Asphalt 4. N&H Asbestile Cement (for Flashing) APPLICATION: Roofing shall be applied as follows: 1. Coat the entire deck with N&H Concrete Primer up to 6" of all surrounding ve rtical surfaces. 2. On slopes up to 1,. apply felts perpendicular to the starting at the lo w point of . each slope .. On slopes over 1" apply felts parallel to the slope, na iling into nailing strips at the top of each run of felt on not over 9" centers. If run of fett exc eeds 20', an additional nailing strip and line of nails shaU be used at 20' 3. Starting at the low edge (on slopes up to 1") apply one 18'" wide, then over one full 36'" wide JM Twin 20 Asbestos Felt. Following felts are to be applied full width overlapping' the. preceding felt by 19"' in such manner that at least 2 plies of felt cover the deck or insulation at any point. Broom each felt so that it shall be firmly and uniformly set without voids into hot Roofing Asphalt applied just before the felt a t a minimum rate of23 lbs. per square uniformly aver the entire surface. 4. Flood the surface with Roofing Asphalt at a minimum rate of 60 lbs. per squ are and while it is still hot embed therein acceptable gravel at the rate of approximat ely 409 lbs. per square or an acceptable slag at a rate approximately 300 lbs. per squ are. FLASHING: Where the deck meets vertical surfaces, apply a five-course Asbestile Flashing t o consist of two layers of JM No. 15 Asbestos Finishing Felt and three layers of N&H Asbestil e Cement, extending 6" high on vertical surfaces and 4" on the roof. SPECIFICATION FOR BUILT-UP ROOFING CONSISTING OF 1 PLY JM 50 LB. BASE FELT & 2 PUES JM 16 LB. FINISHING FELT FOR NON-NAILABLE DECKS (EXCEPT METAL DECKS) . GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: The roof. deck shall be wood-trowelled smooth, firm, dry, clean and free of rubb ish, loose or foreign materials and obstructions. The deck shall be properly graded to drain water freely into gutters and downspouts. Drainage connections shall be set up to. permit the free flow of

water. Installation of cut-Out for flashing and cants in the angle formed by the deck and vertical surfaces, as well as instatlation of metal fittings and wor k shall be completed before built-up roofing work shall be started. MATERIALS: Materials shall be as follows: . 1. N & H Concrete Primer 2. JM No. 50 Asbestos Base Felt, Perforated, 43 lbs. per square 3. JM No. 15 Asbestos Finishing Felt, Perforated, 151bs. per square 4. Roofing Asphalt 5. N & H Asbestile (For Flashing) 99 :.;, ' .. .. :: .. . : ... . . .. . : ... ..... . APPLICATION: Roofing shall be applied by a roofing contractor approved the manufacturer, as fol_lows: 1. Coat the entire deck with Concrete Primer up to 6'" of all surrounding vert ical surfaces. (If deck is of precast units, omit the primer 4"' each side of all joints). 2. Apply one layer of JM No. 50 Asbestos finishing Felt, Perforated on R oofing Asphalt, lapping each felt 2"' over the preceding one. 3. Apply. two layers of JM No. 15 Asbestos Finishing Felt, Perforated on R oofing Asphalt, laid in shingle .fashion, lapping each feJt 19" over the preceding on e. 4. Where the deck meets vertical surfaces,-apply a five-course Asbestile Fl ashing to consist of two JM No. 15 Asbestos Finishing Felt and three layers of N & H Asbes tile Cement, extending 6" high on vertical surfaces and 4'" on the roof. 5. (a) For Smooth-Surfaces Roof , Finish the entire surface with a uniform coating of Roofing Asphalt. -- ...... . . . - (b) For Gravel-Surface Roof Finish the entire surface with a uniform coating of roofing Asphalt. While ho t, embed pea gravel or course clean sand. Broom off excess loose particles aft erwards. SPECIFICATION FOR BUILT-UP ROOFING CONSISTING OF FIVE (5% PLIES JM 15-LB. ASBESTOS FELT) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: All surfaces must be smooth, clean and dry, free of loose materials and obstr uctions. The surfaces shall contain no projections or holes, and shall provide a solid base for the membrane waterproofing. Installation of cants in the angle formed by the floor an d vert}cal wall shall be completed before roofing work shall be started. MATERIALS: 1. N & H Concrete Primer 2. JM 15-lb. ASbestos Felt Perforated 3. Roofing Asphalt

APPLICATION: Waterproofing shall be appHed by a roofing contractor approved by the manu facturer, as follows: 1. Cost the entire surface with concrete primer and allow to dry. 2 .. Lay two (2) plies of JM 15-lb. Asbestos Felt over the primed surface, la pping each sheet 13" over the preceding one on asphalt. 3. Over these fefts, lay three (3) additional plies of JM 15-lb. Asbestos Felt on asphalt .in the following manner: . Starting at the low edge, apply one 12'" wide, then over the one a 24N wide, then over both a full36" wide. Following felts are to be applied full width overlappi ng the preceding felt by 24-3/3". SURFACING: .. : , ) {;;. Finish the surface with 'roofing asphalt, and while no t, sprinkle clean-pea gravel. The : - . . . pealJtavel topptng shall be broomed afterwards to remove excess loo se . . ::: \ .. . . . ' 100 ,. . \ J -... -... -.. y.,.v Mr:THOO OF LAYJNG SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS: No substitution of materials shall be made unless authorized in writi ng by t he Architect (or . Engineer) prior to starting the waterproofing. B. CEMVATHENE BRAND-cemvathene membrane is a specially formulated water proofing material to suit tropical weather conditions. It waterproofs, damproofs and pre vents sepage. It is a preformed membrane made of a combination of asph alts, high grade plasticize.rs and 0.006 inch (6 mill thick polyethylene sheet and suppl ied in rolls of 91.4 em. (3ft.) wide and 304.8 em (10ft.) long. The membrane is self-sticki ng with a special release plastic sheet that protects the adhesive surface before inst allation. .. reglet 4c.m deep by :4cm w1de mvocoie binder cemvoproym .5 G.!!lt ,nstallation Procedure 1. Surface PTfiPIJretion cemvoseol (11(:lS1ic on c.onnetions a. The horizontal surface should be graded to drain water freely to gutters & downspouts and must be smoothed and fully cured. b. Inside colders should have a 5 em cant. c. Provide reglets on vertical surface 20 em above of + em deep & 4 em wide . ' 2. Priming

Applyi cemvapraym primer to impregnate the surfaces of the base substrate by brush at a coverage of 10 sq. meters per 4 liter container which is diluted with 50% water. 3. AppliC8tion a. Peel off the plastic covering of the sticky side and unroll slowly int o place. Firm1y press the sheet to the surface and force out any entrapped air. b. Install subsequent sheets with 5 em minimum overlaps on all joints. Bond a ll. overlaps cemvacote binder. 101 c. Corners and construction should be double covered with a strip of cem vathene. Membrane of about '30 em. wide. / r.eady made d. All edges should be sealed with a troweled bead of cemv aseal mastr'ic. L_ l . J t 4. Protectice Coating . . llJjJ ILJ bJnMr a: Concrete topping for light walking, use concrete topping of 5 em minimum. b. For heavy traffic or with high hydrostatic pressure reinforced conrete toppi ng of about 8 em. 08 m. thick is required. Grades or Thicknesses Description Preformed single 1 .00 mm thick Uses Damproofing Grade Cemvathene 2 Cemvathene 3 Preformed single 1.50 mm thick For areas with low hydrost atic pressure as office toilets, kitchen Cemvathene 3A Preformed single 2.00 mm thick Cemvathene 5 zmm Preformed double membraned eleastic self sealing 2.15 mm. floors, pantries, janitor rooms. Ideal for waterproofing of defective or damaged G.l. roofing and as water barrier between plywood and tile roofing or wood shingles. For roof decks canopies, terraces, bathrooms, elevationpits, basement refrigeration rooms. :!t?t:Z .' h.et 1nlnt . 102 Cemvathene 5A ha--.1 msnbr.a11e(1.s .umv.uote mm) 1. mm Preformed double membraned elastic bitumen. The weatherside

consist of .. 1 hard bituminous membrane that is mineral filled and the other side is made of asphalt that is capable of sealing structural cracks' up to 1/8 in. (3.17 mm). Ill. FLUID APPLIED A. One product is ELASTOMARK Ideal for- exposed applications, that is, waterproofing with no concrete topping like roof deck, top layer for wooden or G.l. roof_ing water barrier between plywood on concrete and shingles rooting. . . This is fluid-applied Laradek Elastomeric coating based on heavy solids elastomer compound 'formulated to waterproof and preserve the substrate, like conc rete, bricks, steel and wood. The waterproofing system is monolithic, seamless, f lexible and elastic ovl3r a wide temperature range, withstands extreme thermal moveme nt, settling and cracking, strong durable, resists puncture and tearing abrasive o verlay- ments. Elastomark can be-applied by roller, brush or spray or squeegee, packing is ava ilable in one (1) drum, 20-liter and 4-liter containers. Comes in seven different colors. Thicknesses recommended for' exterior walls irregular concrete roof deck regular concrete roof deck almost flat, planters, toilet$ for gutters. basement and submerged areas - 12 to 20 mils - 20 to 30 mils - 30 to 40 mils - 40 to 70 mils B. Another known product is WEATHERKOTE Type 3 one mil = l,Ooo Qf an inch by Shell Phils. A generaf purpose waterproOfing material for use on concrete, roofing feet and asphalt for water and moisture barriers and for metai protection. W hen diluted with water it can be used as a primer coat on permeable surfaces such as concrete, plaster, etc. This material is a non-fibrated, stable, bitumen .emulsion. It is dark brown in colour and dries to a black flexible coating which is odourless and non-tainting. Appli ed by orush or spray. MAIN WATERPROOFING TREATMENT 1. P,rime the surface with a 60/50 mixture of weatherkote type 3 and water us ing 112 gals. of type 3 per 100 sq. ft. Allow this to dry.

2. Apply a heavy brush c Q J ~ t of weatherkote type 3 at the rate of 1 1/2 gals. per 100 sq. ft. and allow this to dry. 3. Apply another heavy brush coat of weatherkote type 3 at the rate of 1 1/ 2 g als. per 100 sq. ft. 4. While the above is stm wet embed into it the open woven Weatherkote g lass fiber reinforcement .. Allow this to dry. 5. Apply a heavy brush coat of weatoerkote type 3 at the rate of 1 1/2 gals. pe r 100 sq. ft. and allow this ~ o dry. 6. Apply another heavy brush C04Jt of weatherkote type 3 at the rate of 1 1/ 2 gals/100 sq. ft. 7. While the above is still wet, embed the second layer of the weatherkot e glass fiber reinforcement and allow to dry. 8. Apply another heavy brush coat of weatherkote type 3 at the rate o f 1 1/2 gals/100 sq. ft. Allow this to dry. 103 104 9. Apply another heavy brush coat of weatherkote type 3 at the rate of 1 1/ 2 gals/ 100 sq. ft. Allow this to dry. 10. Trowel to about 1/4" thick the Abrasion resistant weatherkote mastic blende d as follows: 1 volume cement- 1/ 3 bag/ H)() sq. ft. 2 volume weatherkote type J.!.-- 5 1/ 2 gals/ 1Cl0 8 volume sand-3 cu. ft./100 sq; ft. To expedite drying, the applicat ion of weatherkote tvi:>e 3 could be done in the form of an emulsion cement slurry mixed as follows: 1 volume cement 1 volume water 10 volumes weatherkote type 3 . The mix shall be formed by mixing the cement and water to a smooth slurry and t ~ e n slowly adding this to the weatherkote type 3 until a uniform mix is ach ieved. 3" CEMENT FILLET ,. C. WEATHERKOTE DECK ROOF WATERPROOFING General Introduction: The Shell Weatherkote system of roof waterproofing consist of a builtup application of several coats of Shell Weatherkote.Bitumen Emulsions appli ed by spray or brush. Fiberglass Membrane: The inclusion of fiberglass membrane is recommended to act as a reinforcement should fine shrinkage cracks occur in the reinforced conc rete roof. Use Weatherkote 3401 fiberglass or approved equivalent. Falls: All roof surfaces should have adequate fall for purposes in accordance with good engineering practice. Sub-tropical or tropical Remainder minimum 1:60

1:80 Dt!corative or Ught: Reflective finish- For a decorative and light reflecting f inish, allow 2 full weeks to elapse after the Bitumen Emulsion is dry, before applying Weatherkote Aluminum or alternative. Drying Time: A Shell Weatherkote Bitumen coating can be considered sufficiently dry to proceed with the next coat when on rubbing vigorously with a wet finge r no brown stain is produced on the finger. Shell Weatherkote Bitumen coatings norma lly reach this stage in 6 to 12 hours depending on atmospheric conditions. Shell W ea therkote Bitumen coatings must not be applied if rain Is imminent before the coa ting has dried. ,-! Spraying: If spraying is preferred, Shell Weatherkote Type 3 and 5 can be spray ed by suitable equipment at no more than 2 1/2 gallons per 100 sq. ft. per coat. T he pattern of any embedded fiber glass membrane must not be visible when the final spr ay has dried. Expansion Joints: Expansion joints must be so designed as tobe waterproofed, irrespective of the main waterproofing system. 1. Finish the concrete to a smooth surface, free from dirt, dust, etc. To a dry sur Shell Weatherkote primer-consisting Typej mixed with equal volume of water. Allow it to dry. 2. Apply a heavy brush coat of Shell Weatherkote Type 3 and immediately embed a n open mesh fiber glass membrane. The apPlication of the membrane should extend beyond the joints about 2 inches on bo1h sides. Flashings: Flashings are not normally required. Skirting: Where skirtings occur the Shelt Weatherkote treatment should be taken some 9" up the wall. Where there is existing metal flashing, the Shell Weatherk ote should be carried up under the flashing sufficient distance to give an adeq uate lap. A Preparatory Work 1. Any roughness of the concrete should be removed from the areas to be wate rproofed. 2. The concrete surface should be brushed clean and any cracks or holes in it m ade good . . B. Main Waterproofing 1. Apply a brush of 50/50 mix Weatnerkote Type 3/Warer. Allow to dry (Type 3. - 1/2 gal. per 100 sq. ft.) 105 .. 106 2. Apply a heavy brush coat of neat Weatherkote Type 3 over the primed area and immediately embed an open-mesh (Type 3 - 1 1/2 gal. per 100 sq. Fiberglass membrane -110 sq. ft . 3. Apply a Heavy brush coat of - 1 1/ 2 gal. per 100 sq. ft.). fiberglass membrane. Allow to dry. ft . 10% for overlaps. Weatherkote Type 3. Allow to dry. (Type 3

4. After the application of the two coats of Weatherkote Type 3. apply a brus h coat of Weatherkote Type 7 appUed preferable in three coats (6 gals. pe r 100 sq. ft.). 5. For an Abraison-resistant finish, appl y Weatherkote/sand mastic. The masti c flooring consist of 1 volume Weatherkote Type 3 and 4 Volumes sand. 6. For heat reflecting and decorative finish, apply Weatherkote Bituminous Alu minum Paint ( 1 /2 gal. per 100 sq. ft.}. D. ESTIMATED QUANTITIES OF MATERIALS REQUIRED PER 100 SQ. FT. OF AREA Weatherkote Type 3 Weatherkote Type 7 Weathorkote Aluminum Sand Fiberglass membrane - 9 gallons - 6gallons - . 112 gallons - 3 cu. ft. - 110 sq. ft. . (10% for overlaps} NOTE: Weatherkote Type 7 may be substituted with Weatherkote 5. Howeve r, please consult the Spe:cial Products Dept., Pilipinas Shell Petroleum Co rp. on any substituti on in the specifications. E. ADVISORY SERVICE - Specific details regarding Shell Bituminous prOducts and their application are available on request. ....... . -.. . WEATl-IERKOT 1'YPE 1 FIBERGLASS MESH :141,._- 50/50 WEATMERKOTE TYPE 3/WATER MESH EMSEOOEO IN WEAll1ERKOTE TYPE 3 WEATHERKOTE TYPE 3/ WATER 3" CEMENT MORTAR FILL ET SPECIFICATIONS: D. CONCRETE TANK WATERPROOFING Introduction: This specification applies to the waterproofing of reinforced concrete wa ter tank built underground. For overhead installations, the interior waterproofing specified herein requires further reinforcement with one extra layer of fiberglas s mesh and another coat of Weatherkote Type 3 cement slurry, before applying the last 2 coa ts of Type 5 or Trowel coat of Type 7. General A. Preparatory Wort<. 1. Provide sand-cement fillets, about 3'" wide at all internal angles, i.e. , wall to floor, wall to wall and base slab to exterior wall .

2. Remove any projecting nibs of concrete on the surface, and holes and depressions made good using cement mortar.- The surfaces to be treated present a smooth wood float finish. 3. Make sure, all surfaces must be free of dirt and dust before treatment !>tar ts. 107 108 B. Treatment of Fillets 1. Prime strips approximately 11" wide, centraliy along the fillets, brushing o n to the surface a mixture of equal volumes of Weatherkote . Type 3 ancfclean water. Allow to dry. 2. Over the primed areas, apply a heavy brush coat of Weatherkote Type 3 cement . 3. Immediately _after. the above application, embed 11" wide strip of cl osely woven fiberglass. Ensure that the fabric is pushed well home into the comers so that it is in complete contact with the surface and wrinkles contact with the surface and wrinkles eliminated. Allow at least 3" overlap at all ends. * Mix 1 volume of portland cement to 1-volume water, then add this slowly to 10 volume of Weatherkote Emulsion stirring in thoroughly to achieve uniform dispersion. The mix must be used within an hour. Waterproofing the Exterior 1. Apply Weatherkote Emulsion primer on all untreated areas including the to p and let dry. 2. Lay heavy brush coat of Type 3-cement slurry on all exterior are as, observing special attention to the continuity between the base slab and exte rior wall. Before application, the base has to be thoroughly cleaned to expose the waterp roofing. It may be necessary to wipe off the surface with solvent soaked rag to re move stubborn dirt. 3. Embed over the still wet coating fiberglass reinforcing mesh. 4. Apply another heav-Y brush coat of Weatherkote Type slurry. Allow to dry. 5. Trowel to about 1/8" Weatherkote Type 7-cement slurry. 6. Provide sufficient protection of the waterproofing from possible damage by t he back fill.** . Waterproofing the Interior*** l. Apply Weatherkote Emulsion primer on all untreated surfaces and allow to dry . . 2. Brush on a heavy coat of Weatherkote Type 3-cement slurry includin g previously treated strips. 3. Immediately, lay fiberglass reinforcing mesh on the. still wet coatin g, observing at least 3" over.lap on all edges. Avoid wrinkles. 4. Lay another heavy brush coat of Weatherkote type 3-cement slurry and let dr y. 5. Trowel to about 1 /8" thick, Weatherkote Type 7-cement slurry for a tank depth of 10", and another trowel coat for every 10" additional .. Fill the tank with water after 14 days under good ventillation condition s. Before this,

clean tank interi.or, hosing down the surfa<:e with water, then draining i t off. Where topping is reQuired, proceed as'follows: a. Over the still wet last coating, sprinkle liberal amount of sharp and fine sand. Allow the waterproofing to cure for about a week so that the wet thi ckness is substantially reduced to its dried thickness before laying the c oncrete . topping. b. Install wire mesh or welded wire anchored to the waterproofed tank walls w ith the use of concrete nails and Gl wire ties. c. Seal the nail hole with Weatherkote Type 3. d. Install 1 1 /2" cement mortar plaster at the tank walls. and floor. e. Apply the desired finish after sufficient curing. * Buried or underground concrete tank is constructed over a lean concr ete base, poured .on compacted base course. This base slab is waterproofed with heavy brush coat of Weatherkote Type 3 over a dried primer, f inished wi th a 3 mm trowel coat of WeatherkoteType 7-cement slurry. The tank is now constructed within the slab leaving at least 10" allowance along perimeter. ** Depending on the :.everity of expected damage, such protection varies from sand cement topping. Weatherkote-sand-cement mastic, brick cement blocks. etc. * It is recommended that the tank floor be treated last to avoid possible dam age to it while waterproofing the side **** Weatherkote Type 7-cement slurry is prepared in the same manner as Type 3 and Type 5 cement slurry except that the cement water ratio is 1:2. WIATHf:RKOTE TYPE 7 50150 WIATWIUII KOTE TYPE 3/ WATEA FJ8ERGlASS WESH EMIIEOOEO IN WEATHER KOT'f TYP 3 50150 WEATH1111COTE TYP 31 WATER "-----------+-+-...;._ 3* CEMENT MORTAR FILLET Waterprooimg Interior 109 WV.TMERI<OTE SANDI CEMENT MASTIC----. WEATHE!AKOTE 1"'tP 1 ----___, WEATHERI<OTE TYPE 3 ------. FIBEROL.ASS WEATHERKOTE TYPE 3 - ------, 50/SOWEATHEflKOTE TYP3/WATEA - - ----, Waterproofmg Exterior 110 SPECIFICATIONS: CONCRETE TANK WATERPROOFING WATER CONTAINMENT CEMIHT FLLET 7"7"""--;1'9;-...--- W&\T!1EN)TE TYP 7 '7""7J:f.MCL...--- WEATHERt<OTE TYPE 3 Ftl!ltRGLASS MESH

TYf'E 3 50150 WEATWt:RKOTE TYPE 3/WATER A relatively new material which is used to contain water or as a reservoir. Some known products from Chevron S.F. U.S.A. 1. CIM-(Iiquid) Chevron Industrial membrane is a pourable, polymer izable black liquid which, when properly mixed with activator CIM, becomes an elastomer which full y cures in 24 hours. It forms a tough durable, resilient, impermeable barrier to wat er and most queous reagents. It may be sprayed or squeegee applied and retains excelle nt physical characteristics through hot or cold enl{ironments. The material is laid directly on compacted soil. AGI':WT { ( WH<"AE \._ MAIEJML(SOUP fA&RU: LIKE ., Ml)(: ONE VOUIME 0:: AGIVATOR NINE VOLUMES a= ffifMIX OM saut6EI!-t; .... From Denver, Colo. U.S.A. .. _ .... . .... - .. - - .. . -- .. . - 2. Water Saver-(ready made! membrane LININGS- The brand is called Hypalon (Chlo rosulfunated polyethylene). " Provides excellent resistance to weathering and chemical attack. Hypalon is avai lable ont ly as a reinforced membrane and does not require a protective cover for most a pplications. Hypalon is approved for potable (drinking) water containment. 111 Another brand is PVC- (polyvinyl Chloride) membrane offers good chemical resi stanCe, sealabllity and serviceability is unexposed applicationt, good as a liner for recre.tional lakes, canals, sewage lagoons, etc. It is recommended that an earthen cover be p rovided for PVC to maximize its service life as a fluid barrier. True knes5.b$ ZC!, (. Of.O lt10t) ?JO mils( o3o 111d1) mils (, mch) 45 ( Oi5 H1C..h) tJ.16 M. (''').earth toiJ!!i P.V. c.. lm.er 21 nul of an u1c.h 112 Another brand is CPE (Chlorinated Polyethylene)-Specially formulated. for resis tance to oils. Membrane features excellent weatherability, sealability, chemical re sistance anct long ' Term durability. CPE does not require a cover material for rriost application, 3. From imper - ltalia The brand is paralon NT4.:.... a pre-fabricated waterproofing membrane having an

asphaltic base. 1' l'tt.6S x %.a WATERPLUG -this is in dry-powder form and mixes easily with water to be cOme a heavy-duty patching material and is available in 1 pint cans ( 1 1 /2 lbs.) 1 quart cans (2 1/2 . lbs.) 1 gallon cans (10 lbs.) and 5 gal. drums (50 lbs.) or 567 gm., 1.13 kg., 4.5 kg. and 22.7 kg. containers. This is used to seal cracks and holes in your basement walls. Whether water is pouring in under pressure or seeping in as slow leak, waterplug stops it. Fast! Running wa ter is stopped in 3 to 5 minutes. It is non-shrink -expands as it sets and won' t pull away fro m the edges of the patch area. It even sets up under water. It's durable as the masonry concrete to which it is applied. It's simple to mix and apply. It requires no special skill or tools. It's non-metallic-won't trust out or deteriorate. You can also use Waterplug to seal cracks at the junction of your basement floor s and walls, and to anchor bolts and metal fixtures to concrete floors. Waterplug is available in 1 pint cans (11/41bs.), 1 quart cans (2 1 /21bs.), 1 gallon cans 110 lbs.) and 5 gaL drums (50 lbs.) [567 gm, 1.13 kg, 4.5 kg, and 22..7 kg contain ers.] Waterplug is packaged in dry-powder form, and mixes easily with water to become a heavy-du ty patching material. THOROSEAL-a cement-based, heavy-dutY. easy-to-apply, water proof sealant and c oat ing. Thoroseal is ideal for basement.walls. The concrete or masonry which comprises your basement is porous, permitting damp ness to enter and turn the space into a dank, unattractive void. Thoroseal ends all that by going deep to fill and seal the pores and minor surfa ce; imperfec-. tions, becoming as it hardens, a totally waterproof skin; positively p rohibiting moisture penetration. Thorosea! is not a paint. Although it comes in attractive colors, and is itself a natural painting surface. Thoroseal is cementitious. That means it chemically combines with the c oncrete or masonry surface it's applied to, to become an actual part of the wall. ~ n d thoroseal is a perfect decorator surface. Normally applied by brush, it c an easily be mixed to troweling consistancy to achieve the popular modern textures. What all thi s adds up to is no more soggy insulation. No more warped paneling. And no more flaking, peeli ng paint. . . .. ... -...... .. .: / ! ,' 114 2. VAPOR INSULATION (OAMPROOFING) The dampness that sometimes occurs inside buildings can be caused by pen etration of moiStUre from the outside or by condensation of water vapor generated on the in side. Protection from the outside is provided by water repellent materials which tum w

ater aside and force it to retum to the earth down the outside of the building. Moisture vapor on the other hand can permeate most ordinary building materia ls such as wood, paper, lath plaster, untreated brick, etc. The moisture 11apor wi ll condense v.iater when its temperature is reduced by contact with a cool surface or cool a ir. Hence, high humidity In a building may result in condensation of water not only on the insi de of walls and windows.but also on the outside or within the exterior walls, ceiling or roof. Moisture vapor is produced by cooking occupants, laundering, earth crawl s paces, basement floors, etc. VAPOR BARRIERS (Damproofing Materials) These are materials which effectively retard or stop the flow of water vapor and normally are produced in sheets or thin layers: Vapor barriers should be installed on the warm side of the insulation. They sho uld be continuous surfaces of asphalt or wax coated paper, aluminum, or other metal foil she ets or polyethylene film. They can be attached to the insulation as part of the manufactur ed product or installed separately in or on the warm side of the wall, floor, or ceiling. They must be continuous and allow no openings through which vapor may pass. Although asphalt paper is a goOd moisture barrier, it .is not a vapor barrier , and should be usedon the outside of a building for that purpose. NO VApC>R BARRIER WITH BARRIER Mteril Used as Vapor Berrien 1. Fil;,; .....:_Thus is chemically inert plastic, un-affec ted by acids, alkalis and caustics, produced in rolls .of 3 to 20 ft . wide. Common thlckn8sses are 2, 3, 4 and 6 nVI ( 1 mil = .001 in). This film is useful not only as vapor barrier for cemngs, and floors but a lso as a barrier to prevent the passage of moisture from the earth upward through a concret e stab lain on the ground. Polyethylene film can be applied vertically in 36 in. wide strips to studding on 16 in. centers with a full on alternate studs. Films are stapled to studs. "'v erlaps and ex tensions to floors and walfings shall be 6 in. WATER WHEN IT Ret.c..HE$ wAAM AS li Mot sture fi"001 ear111 L.CNGRETE GLA8 Pa . .'fETIfT"LENE . 2" So\ND C.USHION A tour or $IX mll f1\m for moJsture 2. Aluminum Fo//-used as vapor barrier as a single sheet, or as a t hin layer of foil laminated to a heavy backing of asphalt-impregnated Kraft paper. This is also

done with two layers of foil laminated with asphalt cement. GINGLE SHEET WITH I<RAFT PAPER SA)ojDWtCH WitH CEMENT 3. Kraft paper coated with asphalt or wax. Sometimes two layers of paper are cemented with a continuous layer of asphalt. Another materials used for damp-proofing of concrete walls is "WEATHERKOTE" Bitu minous Emulsion, by SHELL. 115 These are high-grade between emulsions, which, after drying, provide pl iable, fir,mly adhered waterproof coatings over dry or de,np surfaces such as concrete, brickwo rk, masonry, wood, steel, etc. they are always applied cold. All surfaces should be brushed to remove aU dust, loose particles, etc. Wash off with water, if necessary. If cracks or unusually rough areas are present, these should be properly chipped out and brushed clean of loose'-particles and dirt. Prime suc h areas with equal volume of Weatherkote type 3 and water by using a piece of sponge or simil ar material. Fill. these areas slightly proud of the general surface using 1:4 mast ic or a Weatherkate/cement slurry of 1:1:12 mixture. (One volume cement, one volume w ater, 12 volumes weatherkote type 3) To Damp-proof tor to Waferproof) 1. Prime all untreated areas by scrubbing in a mixture of equal volume of weatherkote type 3 and water, that is 1 gallon of mixture per 100 sq. ft. (type 3-1/2 gal. p er 100 sq. ft.) 2. Apply a heavy brush coat of weatherkote type 3, allow to dry. (type 3- 1 1/2 gal. per 100 sq. ft.) 3. CLEAR SILICONE WATER REPELLENT FOR LIMESTONE, CONCRETE a. THOROCLEAR SPECIAL -by Jardine Davies Description A clear, invisible silicone water repellent, specially formulated for app lication on aged limestone and horizontal concrete. Furnished in liquid form application b y.brush or low pressure spray. APPLY BY BRUSH OR BY SPRAY 116 u For invisible protection of most limestones (slight darkening might occur on so me limestone containing slate or iron teSt panels are suggested} horizontal concre te surfaces, highways, bridge abutments, bridge decks, driveways and sidewalks. Do not use T horo- clear Special on brick or freshly quar:ried stone 'wse. Thoroclear mJ.

AdVImfllges Prevents water penetration. Nonflammable AHows the wan to breathe. Reduces freeze damage. Extends life of Portland cement concrete. . One-coat application. Can be applied to slightly damp surfaces. High resistance to salt. Reduces water absorption on limestone to less thaill%. No objectionable chemical odor. darkening of "wet" concrete highways, imp.roves night visibility. Clean up application tools with water. Umit11tion Do not apply when temperature is below 40f (4.4C) Or is expected to fall below 40F (4.4C). Do not apply to frozen or frostfilled surfaces.Cover11ges 100-400 square .t per gallon (2.4-9.7m211) varies with porosity of surface. b .. THOROCLEAR m Limestone or other surfaces to be treated should be, clean, sound, free of stains, in good repair and flushed free of dust, etc. New stone should age for about one year before sealing. Completely flood entire surface with one coat of Thoroclear Special so that there is a rundown of 6 to 12 inches (15-30 em). Avoid longer runs. Low-pressure spray applications are preferred, but brushing is acceptable (do not use aluminum equipment). All shrubbery and adjacent surfaces not to be treated, particularly aluminum should be protected. Care should be taken to t reat in one coat; :after dfying starts T'tior.oelear special will repel itself. To remove Thoroclear Special from surface not to be coated, use xylol or toluol. Do not use.lf rain is expected within 8 hours or apply to water-soaked masoory as after a heavy rain. (Prior to applying Thoroclear Special to loose, weak, cracked or structurally defective masonry joints, Dryjoint pointing mortar should be used. P11ck11ging 1 and 5 gallon cans, 30 and 50 gallon drums, (3.7 and 18.91 cans, 113.5 2.aJ drums). . Clear Protective Treatments for Masonry, Concrete, Bricks, Synthetic Adobe Silicone liquid is used to be spread around the surfaces by using paint brush. Silicone liquid is clear and does not change the natural color of the materials. One b rand used is Thoroclear by Jardine Davies. 4 ... ANA Y" PROOFING-SOIL POISONING

It is important to poison the soil against Anay (white ants) or termites otherwi se an expensive house will be eaten away by these insects in a few years. To protect your soil poisoning is done. This stops the anay from infesting your main posts, wa lls and flooring. One known brand is ALDREX by shell which will last up to 30 years, and is n ot harmful to This liquid can be applied with an ordinary garden water can. A gal lon of Aldrex solution made up of 1 part aldnlxand 36 parts water or a gallon of Aid rex 4 sol ution made up of 1 apart Aldrex 4 and 95 part of water is enough to a square meter Of floor area for years and years. 117 . 0 0 0 , . .. : . \ -., c, .... . p 0 b ,.. Application is made after excavation and placing of footings, after grading and leveling, after construction and after earth filling. 1 . ; 2 . ... fw4ui$ll4f 1 pJ)RT 1 I=RT . .. RENTOKJL TERMITE PROOFING When the subterranean termite infestation is located, Rentokil termiticide solut ion is introduced into live mounds found within the premises. Trenching of the ground at 15inch depth immediately adjaeent to the outside faces of the walls and drenching of the tren ches with Rentokil termiticide solution at .the rate of two (2} gallons per lineal meter. Drilling 3/4 inch diameter holes .at 18.inch (0.45 m) cel'ltres and (0.0 75 m) distance from the outside/inside faces of main walls with the use of portable automatic r oto-hammer drills. Drilling of 3/4 inch holes around the infested post areas. Application by pressures of the solution into each drilled. hole at the rate of two (2) gallons per hofe by means of sub-slab injectors. Application by brush or spray of Rentokil woodworm killer and/or dusting with chl orinated hydrocarbon powder on wooden parts attacked by subterranean termites. 5. WOOD PRESERVATIVE (termite wood rot, fungi) - This is a wood preservative, which when thoroughly applied protects lumber for years. It is recommended for protection of wood against powder post beetles (BUKSOK) powder p

ost termites (UNO$), decay causing fungi such as sap stain and dryrot. One brand nam e by shell is ALOAITE. This is applied undiluted with a paint brush (2 or 3 coatings) or a sprayer. A liter of this preservative can treat a minimum of 10 $Q. m. of lumber per coating. T his come in two grades, clear and broWn, another brandname is XYLADECOR by Boysen. This i s light and weather resistant which protects the wood while beautifying it. Xyladecor i s highly recommended for exterior use and is available in eleven colors. Other known brands are cuprinol of Dutch Boy. Solignum and many others. Cuprinol also contains water repelle nt additives to protect wood against weather and comes in 5 colors such as teak, nut t ree, pine, chestnut and rosewood. i 1 ' I V 1.19 120 SOLIGNUM PRODUCTS (Jardine Oaviesl a. Exterior . Brown - (self staining external wood preseNative} a low-:co st, self staining wooef preservative for the treatment of alt external timbefs. It is av8Hable in three co&our . shades, lighr medium and dark b. Colourt ... -a cl8ar wood preservative fluid for the Pf8I8I'Y8tive tr8!8tm ent of al new and existent external and intemal timbefs . which witt afterwai-ds be protecte d wtth a double surface coating. c. Solignum Timbertone-an organi9 solvent decorative wood preservative whic h imparts colour to wood whilst allowing the grain to show through. It is of the p igmented fungicidal type and is compatible with wood preservative treatments and most pro prietary exterior wood stairs. It is available in range of ten decorative shades for us e on external . internal timber. The timbenone colour ral)9e includes cherry red, ma hogany. Birch gray, golden oak, black, forest green haz8l, Oxford blue and walnu t. . . For use 011 doors and windows, sheds, fences, wooden balcony floor and baluster s, panelings. d. Pre-treated Lumber-are lumber that is imp{egnated vvith a preservati ve through vacuum p;_.ure. One source is PACWOOD INC. which uses TANALISEO lumber , which is treated at their factory and delivered to the site. The preser vative used is Tanalith CCA-Type C which penetrates the wood from one and a half inches and dee per. 6. FIREPROOFING a. To prevent the fire from spreading at once, lumber, plywood, wood do

ors, etc. are painted with a liquid that penetrates into the wood. When there is fire, it reac ts by dispersing the flame, preventing progressive burning. One brand name is RESIST-A-FlA ME. This liquid, when applied, retains tbe natural beauty, gives strength and mo re marketable value as it protects materials against fire, weather, decay, insects and warping painting can be applied over this liquid. One gallon of this liquid can cover fr om 200 to 300 Sq. ft. b. Another good method is by using asbestos fireproofing boards instead of plywood. c. Provision of the Fire Code or Fire Safety Construction, Protective and War ning System. 1. Fire protectton features. such as sprinkler systems hose boxes, hose r eels or standpipe systems and other fire fighting equipment. Sprinkler Sysjem-Automatic fire suppressiOn is an integrated system of un derground or overhead piping or both connected to a .source of extinguishing age nt or medium and designed in accordance with fire protection engineering standard s which when actuated by its automatic detecting device suppresses fire within the areas protected. .. 121 PENDANT t ... ?> a__.., . 1\80 V'c f I p1 tJ Go WHElJ 8E1-0W lo()ftf.?)J f>\fE$ 1\Rf: corJCEALeO ON CEIUNG papa \.-. Dry Stllndpipe System -a type of standpipe system in which the pipes are normally not filled with water. Water is introduced into the system through service connections when needed. 2. Fire alarm systems. SIAMESE. TWIN fbr tla'l 3. Fire walls to separate adjoining buildings, or warehouses and storag e areas from other occupancies in the same building. 4 .. Provisions for confining the fire at its source such as fire resistive floo rs and walls extending up to the next floor slab or roof, curtain boards and other fire contain ing or stopping components. 5. Termination of all exits in an areas affording safe passage to a public way or safe dispersal area; 6. Stairways, vertical shafts, horizontal exists and other means of egress sealed from smoke and heat.

7. A fire exit plan for each floor of the building showing from each r oom to appropriate exits, displayed prominently on the door of each room. 8. Self closing fire resistive doors leading to corridors. 9. Fire dampers in centralized airconditioning ducts. 10. Roof vents for by fire fighters. 11. Properly_ marked and lighted exits with provision for emergency lights t o adequately exit ways in case of power failure. 7. RATPROOFING There are so many chemicals, powders, medicines rat food poison, that are being sold to kill rats but these are temporary as rats proliferate in all nooks and spaces, gna ws al most-anything and moat of an which is very disturbing, they make holes on th& corners o f floors and One way of discouraging rats and preventing them from gnawing the wood is to put a galvanized sheet on the corners of a room. Science had proven that r.ats almost alw ays start to chew or gnaw only at the corners of a room and not on the midd!e. (The natives o f Bontoc had used this theory although they used thick wood t o protect their floor place d on the four (4) postS of as a protection from other small animals). ,_.t:--- plaw1 g .1. g,m .r-T { 6 fla?r 8. RUSTPROOFING A. GALVANIZED Iron prote-ction System HOW. THe DO IT One brand name is WEATHERKOTE Type 5 by shell which is an emulsion to be applied G. I. sheets installed 6 months and more. PREPARATION 1. The surface to be treated: shall be clean, firm and free from grease or oil. Rust, flack ing paint, etc. shall be removed by wire brushing. 2. Treat any weak areas as a. Thin or weak areas, laps and nail holes shall be primed to approximately 4 .. (0.10 m.l each side of the weak area with Weatherkote block, diluted if necessary with mi neral Allow to dry for a minimum of 24 hours under average outside condi tions. b. An undiklted brush coat of Wll81herkote Type 5 Bitumen ErnWsion shaD be ap pledover the primed area. c. While the above coat is wet, an openly woven fiber membrane such 8S' therKote Fiber Glass Membrane 3401 shall be embedded into and covered by the wet film of Type 5 Emulsion, ensuring that the membrane is less in width than the film Emulsion. Allow to dry. 3. After the surlace has been cleaned ohust by wire brushing, it shall be prim ed with a brush or spray coat of Weathercote Black, diluted if necessary with Mineral Turp entine. Allow to dry for a minimum of 24 hours under average out side conditio

ns. 4. One heavy brush or spray coat of undiluted weatherkote type 5 Bitumen Em ulsion shall be applied to the whole area at the rate of 1 to 1 1/2 gallons per 100 sq. ft. Allow to dry. 123 124 - - ~ 5. Apply one brush or spray coat of weatherkote Aluminum at the rate of 1/3 91a llons per 100 sq. ft. Other colours, green, red, and blue are available, with a sprea d of 25-30, square meters per gallon. When a colored finish is applied, sand blinding of the last coat of Weatherkote Bitumen Emulsion (4) while still wet, is advisable. Brush off excess sand When dry and apply the colored finish. Allow a period of two (2) weeks after drying of the Bitumen Emul sion be.fore applying Weatherkote Coloured finish. ESTIMATED QUANTITIES OF MATERIALS REQUIRED PER 10 SQ. METERS OF AREA. Weatherkote Black Weatherkote Type 5 Weatherkote Aluminum Weatherkote Colours B. COLD GALVANIZING COMPOUND 1/3 gallon 1_to 11/2 gal. 1/3 gal. 25-30 sq. m. per gal. Another brand name is CHESTERTON, a zinc-rich coating that protects iron, stee l and aluminum surfaces against corrosion. It also protects all iron and steel indust rial equipment. piping, ducts, structural work, water tanks, automotive. marine, etc. Use indoors or outdoors-above, around or under water. Effective to 300F 1149C). * A superior onepackage, smooth flowing cold galvanizing compound. *Microscopic pure zinc particles give intimate bond to iron or-steel. Self-form ing oxide prevents rust and corrosion by galvanic action. * Dries to a flexible, noncracking coating that permits bending without chippin g. Protects welds on both bar metal or previously galvanized surfaces. Use as a touchup or marred, hot-galvanized surfaces. Forms strong base primer for painting or may be left as final protective surfac e. CHESTERTON COLD GALVANIZING COMPOUND is a zinc rich compound with 95% zinc in the dried film. Unlike hot galvanizing, it well readily take a top coati ng. It is an ex cellent primer for painting providing three optimum benefits: (1) bonds to metal , (2 provides rough surface allowing the paint to bond to the primer. In large scrapes, it will pre vent rust creeping under the area still coated. In production it provides a quic k, low cost way to cold galvanize parts of finished products. In maintenance or construction , it elimi-

nc!tes costly down time and provides years of protection for all iron and steel surfaces, structures or equipment such as air conditioning units, agricultural machinery, automo tive bodies, fences, _marine equipment, oil rigs, and offshore drilling st ructures, oma mental iron works, pipe lines, railroad equipment, structural steel tanks , transmission towers, underground pipe lines, etc. C. ROOFING GALVANIZED IRON G.t SHEETS To prevent rust and insure longer life to galvanized iron sheets, apply red oxi de primer to. the roofing sheets, or apply REO LEAD PRIMER. When dry, apply an all weatber .roof paint or galvanox roofing paint. (see Chapter or paints for different brands). D. GALVANIZED METAL WATER TANKS A known brand used is Shell Weatherkote Bitumen Emulsions which may be used for tanks containing drinking water without fear of contamination but complete dryi ng of the Bitumen Emulsion is essential before placing the vessel into service. This s hould not be used in tanks where the temperature of the water is in excess of approximatel y 100F. Where the entry of water would impinge directly on the bituminous surface this should be protected by setting tiles in the Bitumen Emulsion. Galvanized must be allowed to weather for approximately six months before treated as under. PREPARATION AND TREATMENT OR SURFACE AREA The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of light rust deposits by wire brushing or sand blasting (or. if heavily deposited with rust or mill-scale, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by grit blasting, flame cleaning, mechanical chipping, etc.) and must be completely dry. Neutralizing rust solutions can be used to give satisfactory resu lts. 1. A priming coat of Weatherkote Black shall be applied at the rate o f 1 gallon per 300-400 sq. ft. Allow to dry for a minirm:.m of 24 hours under average outside weather conditions. Mineral Turpentine may be used cautiously to dilute shell Weatherkote black of c onsidered necessary to facilitate ease of appiication. Note: Oil based Primers are not suitable for this application. 2. Apply at least two heavy brush or spray coats of shell Weatheri(ote Type 3 Bitumen Emulsion, each coat being .laid on the rate of 1 1/2 gallons per 100 sq. ft. E ach coat shall be allowed to dry (no brown stain when rubbed with a wetted finger). Brush coats should be applied at right angles to each other to minimize the effects of brush marks. Note: Where water is of neutral or alkaline reaction, a cement slurry should b e added to the Bitumen Emulsion before it is applied consisting of 1 volume

cement, 1 volume water and 10 volumes shell flintkote type 3 Bitumen Emulsion which is added slowly to the cement slurry. CURING: The above pr.otective coating shall be completely Clry and cured before 1he tank is filled with water. This may take a week or more, depending on ing conditions and some form of artificial drying may be required in order to accelerate the drying process. Estimated Quantities of Materials Required: 1 gallon of Weatherkote Black per 30()...1100 sq. ft. 3 gallons of Shell Wea1herkote Type 3 per 100 sq. ft. 125 126 9. FLOOR PROTECTION AND SURFACING A. FLOOR SEALER (Anti Skid) By Pilipinas shell is in synth,etic resin-based coating incorporating an abrasiv e aggregate to provide an anti-slip finish: Nonnally applied by tr.owel. It comes in differe nt like blue, green, grey, red, yellow. This is an anti-sUp coatjng over many types of base, especiaUy in location$ whe re wet or oily conditions prevail, ex: on steps and ladder treads, around machinery , or inclined . ramps, platforms, steel or wooden decks, around swimming pools and showers, in kitchens, garages, etc. It may also be applied to steel, wood, aluminum, filed surf aces but should not be applied to asphaltic surface. APPLICAt'ION 1. Always ensure that the surface of the base is clean, dry, sound and fre e from oil, grease, flaking paint, etc. 2. Stir the material thoroughly before use. 3. Apply the material thinly by means of a steel float with as 1ittte trowellin g as A . one-coat application of 1 mm (approx. 1/32") thickness is normally sufficient. ( for exposed steelwork, 2 coats is nonnal). Covemge: 5 liters per 10 sq. m. at l mfT1 thickness. B. WEARSCREED Wearscreed is a three-component flooring unit containing exact quantities of epoxy resin base and hardener with specially selected aggmgates. A coloring pigment may be used when a coloured finish is required. Priming must be carried out with Wear sereed Primer a two-component unit containing measured quantities of epoxy resin bas e and hardener, ready for mixing. Application is done by stiff bristle brush for the P rimer and steel trowel for screed mix. The POT life for primer is approximately 1 hour and for screed mix by approximat ely 46 minutes curing time: after laying, a minimum of 24 hours should elapee before li ght traffic. is allowed. Heavy traffic only allowed after 72 hours the coverage: Prime r-approximately 8 sq. m. per unit, Screed mix: approximately 1. 7 sq. m. per unit at .6 mm thick-

ness. C. TENNIS COURT SURFACING This is a brand name by shell Filipinas. Weatherkote sand mastic playing surfaoe for tennis, pelota, squash, and basketbaU courts is a 12 mm thick topping laid on s uch base as asphalt, concrete, asphaltic concrete, steel or anyfirm base that can withstand t he load requirements. This is a resilient, jointless and quiet surface recommended for both indoors and outdoor applications with good sufficient drainage in case of the lat ter. a. Baae Preparation 1. Observe proper slope, ex: 1 inch for every 12 feet from end to end. 2. Remove all debris, dirt, dust and loose materials. 3. Repair cracks, patch up holes and uneven or broken areas. b. Mastic Laying (on concrete base) 1. Suction: Wet out the concrete surface by hosing-down widl clean tap water. A tlow to soak overnight. Pooling of water should be removed before priming. 2. Priming: Mix thoroughly Weatherkote type 3 with equal amount of clean water , using a suitable stirrer. Apply the primer with a stiff brush in a scrubbing act ion to achieve good penetration and bonding with the surface dust. Allow the primer to dry. 3. Bonding: :ro achieve positive bonding of the mastic on to the base, apply u ndiluted Weatherkote type 3 over the dry priming coat, using a soft broom or brush just prior to laying of. the mastic. Don't lay over dry bonding coat, care must be taken to keep the area free of all foreign matters. 4. Mixing: The Weatherkote sand mastic comprises Weatherkote type 5, c lean fine sand, .and water in 1:4 ration. (1 part Weatherkote ahd 4 parts sand by volume). A pan type mixer is recommended, although in its absence it could b e done manually with shovels in the following sequence: Add one volume of weatherkote to 4 volume of sand and mix. Add water to obtain proper consistency. 'tt is essential that the quantity of w ater be established at the first and second mix. On subsequent mixes retain 10% of t he water required to adjust mixing consistency. Mixing must continue until unif orm color and homogenous mixture is attained. 5. /..Bylng: It is suggested that the mastic mix be laid in alternate bays of 2 m wide using 12 mm screed bars. However, it has been found out that with the aid of gauge No. 18 G:l. wire as levelling guide, the mix is poured and spread in bays' Qf . about .SO. em. Atong the length of the court. No screed bars are used, hence no ir. regular edge. In a way this helps in minimizing directional cracks. This .co uld be done as follows: a. Over the still wet bonding coat spread themix borrowed from the mixer.

b. Level the mastic with a wooden float at the same time it. c. After the initial set, that is from 40 to 90 minutes, after laying, finish t he surface with a steel trowel. 6. Rolling: The second stage of compaction is with the use of a 200 k g. roller, done as soon as the surface can take the weight without pick-up .. This i s done along the whole length of the court, then across, observing an overlap of 3 .. t o 4" in each stroke. If rolling is delayed, a much heavier one is required. If the n ext bay is laid to form a joint with an existing dried edge, apply a bonding coat where the new mix lap with the old bay. 7. P.lnting: Pri""t the rolled and cured surface with acrylic latex paint and allow to dry. Paint the primed surface uaing two undiluted coats of filled acrylic latex observing proper color combination8. ' D. ACRYLIC FLOOR FINISH -a brand name by CHESTERTON is a clear, high-glass, non flammable copolymer, Chesterton Acrylic floor finish can be used as re ceived for as phatt, vinyl, linoleum rubber or terrazo floors. It is specially formulated f or high traffic areas such as public buildings, offices, schools, industrial plants, institution s, hospitals and shop floors. Chesterton Acrylic Floor finish is an effective, tetSgh, water base surface floo r finish that needs to buffing after it is applied. Acrytic floor finish is an acrylic base, self-polishing, non-scuff, floor finish that provides a bright, durable, protective coating on a ll typeS of floors. using an acrylic copolymer emulsion of optimum particle size to assure a dean, smooth, glossy film: . Chesterton Acrylic Floor Finish will resist repeatesJ mopping-, scrubbing, wat er 8pills and detergents, yet can be easily removed with Chesterton Ammoniated stripper and cle aner when desired. When it is uneconomical to buff and where heavy traffic areas a re subjected to frequent scrubbings, Chesterton ac.rylic floor finish, a metallic cros slinked acrylic copolymer is recommended. E. CHESTERTON URETHANE ENAMELS -a brand name used for protective coating for floors, walls, machinery & equipment. It is super-tough, abrasion and chemical r esistent, high-g1088 and aetf-curlng. Chesterton urethane Erlamets comes from a family of synthetic reeana used ae protective coatings. The aelf-curing, oil modified, rathane floor enamels are recognized for their superior toughnela, wearabilty an d good cheriicaltllilnance: Th8'v yield ... th8t are touqh, ltard end flaxi)le. They p an8ball8 andseal porous yet retain a surfac' that gives a tough, resistant, high glo

ss or nevv or old floOrl. It is excellent abrasiOn resistBnce to withstand heavy traffic in work area&. Chemical resistance permits use' in loartions subject to spills, drips and le aks. Coverage is 400 sq. ft./gal. or 37.2 aq. m/1. and comes in variety of colors li ke black, clear, tile red, white, medium gray, light gray, medium brown, yeiiQW, forest gr een, raw lienna. , . F. POLYURETHANE FLOOR.VARNI.SH Another brand name for protection of wood floor especially gymnasiums is HUDSON polyurethane floor varnish by century chemical corp. This is a sealer-topcoat fl oor finishing .system that cures to a tough, non--slip glcuy polymhane film. This is tlef'd. film which does not crack, peel or chip off. Reaists staining scratches and abr asions. Aoor washes dean ta.t and eaay with plain wet-mopping. One application works fo r years. ft aa.o emphasizes woOd grain. Its cofoumess formulation enhances the natural shede ancf beau1y of wooden .fl0of8. Wood -colour .stains accentuate wood grain s. tt adheree firmly to propelty sand&d and cleaned wood and parquet floors with ord inary paint brush. . 10. DESCALERS, PAINT & CHEMICAL STRIPPERS A. CHESTERTON PAINT STRIPPER-is a brand name which is a heavy duty gel that softens and lifts paint from wood, metal, plaster, concrete, etc. It a tso removes varnishes, lacquers and industrial finishes. All brand names in the.paint industry has also their own paint remover brand s. B. CHESTERTON DESCALER and CHEMICAL CLEANER Another brand name which etches concrete prior to painting. It cleans stains, ru st, algae fron1 concrete buildings, walks, etc. It removes cement build-up from for ms, trucks, equipment, tools, etc. It removes hard water build-up, lime scale, corrosion fr om boiler tubes. Concentrated formula may be diluted with water. Chesterton Descaler and Chemical cleaner with. Metal Acid inhibitor is a st rong, mutti:use, liquid a<:id, formulated with a compatible inhibitor for a wide range of a pplications. In use, its dissolving action on rust and scale is fast and thorough. Its acid formulation dissolves lime scale and rust right down to the base metal or concrete with the s e l ~ i v e inhibitor protecting metal surfaces. 11. CONTROL. PROTECT AND MANAGEMENT Actrol Systems PTE ltd. of Singapore is supplying and installing these systems f or the.contrQi, protection and Management of Buildings. Some of the protective and contro ling items are Architectural Hardware, Electric locks, alarmed Exit Devices, Gentra l lighting control,

Central Proprietary Management System, Access Control Systems and Others. 129 CHAPTER . . . ~ ~ ~ ITi1 u ~ ffl1 ffi1 [Q) ~ c g @ J ~ ~ rnJ ~ ~ . PAINTS and PROTECTIVE COATINGS 132 Painting is done for the reason of decoration, to be used tor sanitation, pr eservation, im- ~ proved lighting effects, improved heating effects, improved working conditions, safety, and economy. MATERIALS: 1. PAINT -a mixture consisting of vehicles or binders, with or without colori ng pigments, adjusted and diluted with correct amounts and types of additives and thinners , which when applied on a surface, forms an adherent continuous film which provides pro tection, decorati on, Sl'nitation, identification and other funct ional properties. Drying: Paint dries by evaporation, oxidation, condensation, polymerization, or any comb ination hereof. a. Oil Paint - The components of an oil base paint are: 1. Body - That sol id, finely ground materi81 which gives a paint the power t o hide, as well as color a surface. In white paints the body is also the pigment. The prod ucts most widely used for paint body are white lead, zinc oxide, Lithopone, and Ti ta nium white. 2. Vehicle - a nonvolatile f luid in which the solid body material is susp ended. The vehicle should consist of !rom 85 to 90 percent drying oil and the remainder thi nner and drier. The drying oils include linseed oil, soya-bean oil, fish o il, dehydrated castor oil, tung oil, perilla oil, and oiticica oil. 3. Pigment-materials which give the paint its color. In the case of white pain t, the body is the pigment. Color pigments are classified into two basic groups. a. natural group - obtained from animal, vegetable and mineral . sources, suc h as iron oxides, chrome oxide, cobalt oxide, siennas, ochres, umbers and also carbon black. b. synthetic pigment group ...,.- phtalo-cyanines (coaltar derivatives) similar to those used to make dyes. Red pigments - red lead, vermi lion red ochres. Brown pigments - burnt ochre, burnt sienna, burnt umber Yellow pigments- chromium oxide, zinc oxide, cadmium oxide Blue pigments-cobalt blue, prussian b t u ~ , ultramarine blue Green pigments- chrome green, viridian and emerald green. Black pigments- carbon black and lampblack 4. Thinners -are volatile solvents, materials which have a natural affin ity for the vehicle in the paint. They cause the paint to flow better; They evaporate when t he

paint is applied. The most common thinner is Turpentine, made from distilling gu m from a number of pine trees. 5. Driers - organic salts of various metals such as iron, zinc, cobalt, lead ma nganese, and calcium, which are added to the paint to accelerate the oxidation and harden ing of the vehicle. Oil paint therefore signifies a paint in which the vehicles is a drying oil. Linseed oil is most generally used due to its great ability to absorb oxygen and change to a solid state. This oil vehicle is modified by the use of thinners and driers, for which the best thinner is Turpentine. ' b. Alkyd Paints-so called because of the syr:tthetic resin-alkyd resin, used in the paint formulation. Alkyd resin is obtained by the combining of an alcohol and a n acid. Alkyd are produced by combining a drying oil, such as Linseed oi l .or dehydrated castor oil with glycerine (the alcohol) and phtalic anhydride (the acid). Styrenated oils are also used to produce paints that possess fast drying and excellent adhesion characteristics. Alkyd paints have mild alkali resistance but excellent water resistance because of its excellent weathering ability, alkyd paint is particularly useful for por ch and deck enamel and paints for other such exposed conditions. With modifications, it is used in making white baking enamel, such as is used on stoves, refrigerators, etc. Linseed alkyds give fast drying times and tougher films. Alkyd resin may also be mixed with latex paints. They usually produce grea ter permanence and better adhesion properties. c. Resin- Emulsion Paints (latex) - paints iA which the vehicle is a syn thetic resin emulsion, usually made from one of four basic resin types: but11diene-styrene, polyvinyl acetate, epoxy resin or acrylic resin. The body of these paints is usually titanium dioxide or lithopone, and soyabean p roteins are added to the formulation using butadiene-styrene and polyvinyl acetate to increase consistency and stability. The thinner is water. and it must be added a dispersing agent to keep the pi gment and other materials suspended in the emulsion. These emulsion-based pai nts , tend tO foam, so as a defoaming agent, usually tributyl phosphate is added. Finally methyl cellulose is added to improve the floor qualities of the paint. Polyvinyl acetate emulsions produce a much tougher skin than the butadiene-styrene types and so can be used as exterior as well as interior paint. One of its m ost important applications is in exterior finishes for and stucco. Acrylic and epoxy-resin emulsion paints require no oxidation to form a fi

lm and remain flexible after drying. They exhibit great resistance to weatheri ng and no tendency to lose their adhesive qualities or color with age. They contain n o protein and therefore are not subject to deterioration. However they are more costly than other emulsion paints. d. Metallic Paint - consist of a metallic pigment and a vehicle. The pigment is very fine flakes of aluminum, copper, bronze, zinc, or tin. They are suspended i n a vehicle which may be a natural or synthetic varnish, a quick drying lacquer, special br onzing lacquer, or bituminous-based vehicles, depending on where the paint is to be us ed. Spraying is the best method of applying metallic paints as it permits the spread ing of a uniform film and encourages even depositing of the metallic flakes used for decorative purposes. e. Luminescent Paint -made by adding fluorescent and phosphorescent pigments to any one of a number of drier free vehicles. including alkyd marine varnish, spirit varnish, or quick-drying lacquers. Color also may be incorporated into luminous pa ints. Luminescent paints may be used in buildings to produce special effects. They are used in hospitals, schools, factories, hotels, etc. f. Intumescent Paints (Fire-retardant) paints which retard the passage of f ire to the surfaces beneath them. When a surface coated with an intumescent (fire-retard ant) paint is exposed to heat or fire, it puffs up and forms a thick, insula ting crust which greatly retards the penetration of heat to the coated surface. These crust is composed of tiny air cells which build up to a thickness of about 3 in. It seals out the ai r, or oxygen, required for combustion so that only very intense exposure to heat will result in charring the undersurface. 133 134 A variety of these paints are available, with a vinyl, alkyd, polyurethane, epo xy or solvent base. Both opaque and transparent products are manufactured in flat, s emigloss, gloss, or satin finishes. They may be applied by brush, roller or.spray over a variety of surfaces such as wood, paper, acousticaltile, concrete, stucco, plaster, conventional paint, enamel or varnish. Drying time to a dust free condition will vary from 30 minutes to 20 hours, co verage will vary from 150 to 500 sq. ft. per gal, depending on the particular type of paint used and the kind of surface to which it is applied. g. Polyester-Epoxy Coatings - a heavy-bodied paint used on concrete and

masonry walls and has a higher percentage of solids than normal. The coating system consists of high - solids vinyl filler material to be applied directly over a concr ete block or other masonry surfaces, and high-solids, pigmented polyester epoxy topcoat . The filler material may be applied by brush, roller or spray at a w hich will give approximately 16 mils of dry film. The top coating, available in either semigloss or gloss finish in approximately 90 different colors, will add another 6 m ils of dry film to the coating. This coating system creates a tough, long-lasting finish which is highly resista nt to water I grease and many chemicals and which can be cleaned with harsh caust ics. This is suited to areas of heavy traff:ic such as schoolrooms corridors, kitchen s, cafeterias, laboratories. ' A similar top-coating material is available for a clear finish, in either gloss or semigloss. It is to be used over previously painted surfaces or to preserve the nat ural appearance of wood, brick or stone. Both filler and top coating overnight drying time before applying a seco nd coat and approximately two weeks for complete cure. 2. VARNISHES Varnishes constitute a group of more-or-less transparent liquids which are used to provide a protective surface coating, at the sametime they allow the original surface to show but add a lustrous and glossy finish to it. All varnishes have basically the same components as paints, body, vehicle, thinn er, and drier. However, varnishes may be divided into three groups. a. NaturaiResin Varnishes Made from natural resins, or exudations from living trees, while others are fos sil resins. Some of these must be heat-treated to produce an oil -soluble gum, white others are naturally soluble in oil. Resin, a by-product from the distillation of iurpentine, is also used to make v arnish. Varnishes made from a combination of oil and natural resin are known as ol eoresinuous varnishes. The best thinner for varnishes is turpentine, a distillate of gum from a group of pine trees. It evaporates slowly and gives varnish brushing and flowing qualit ies that no other solvent can give. It also aids oxidation of the drying oil by absorbin g oxygen from the air and passing it to the oil. Marine and Spar varnish are classified as long-oil since it contains from 40 to 100 gal. of oil per 100 lb. of resin. The result Is a varnish which will produce a s tougher,

more durable and elastic film.' but which takes longer to dry and produces only moderate gloss. Floor Varnishes are classifiP.d as medium-oil varnislles. It contains 12 to 40 gat of oil per too lb. of resin. They dry faster and have a harder film than long oil varnishes but are not as impervious to water-. Rubbing and Polishing varnishes belong to the short-varnishes. It contain from 5 to 12 gal. of oil per 100 lb. of resin. They dry quite rapidly and form a hard , brittle film that will not stand much rough usage. b. Modified N.aturai-Resin Varnishes This group of varnishes is made with a natural resin which has been altered b y chemical action. Common Resin is heat treated with glycerin to form an es ter gum, and this gum is used as the body for the varnish. T-his varnish is less exp ensive than oleoresinuous varnishes. c. Synthetic-Resin Varnishes These are varnishes produced by the plastics industry, including phenolics, nit rocellulose, amino resins, alkyd resins, vinyl resins, polyethylene, polysterene , silicone, acrylic resins, and epoxy resins. Some of these are thermoplastic, and some are thermosetting. Many varnishes made with plastic resins reach their greatest potential only when baked. 3. ENAMELS - when pigment is added to a varnish, the result is an enamel. Any o f the varnish types can be used, and the durability of the enamel depends to a large exte nt on the quality of the pigment. Since varnishes do not contain the opaque body materi al which paints do, enamels do not have high covering power for best results, they requi re an opaque undercoat. Baking enamels, made with synthetic resins are used on most household appliances , curtain-wall panels of various kinds, aluminum shinSies and sidings, and var ious interior and exterior trim materials. 4. SHELLAC - shellac is the only liquid protective coating containing a resin of animal origin. The resin is an exudation of the lac insect of India and Southeast Asia , deposited on the branches of trees. The resin accumulations are collected, crushed and dissolved in alcohol to pr oduce orange shellac, so called because of its color. By bleaching the resin, pure whi te shellac is produced. Various grades of shellac are made by varying the amount of resin dissolved in a gallon of solvent. These grades are known as cuts; a 4 lb. cut means that the shel lac contains 4 lb. of lac resin per gallon of alcohol. The al cohol used is usually special denatured alcohol or proprietary denatu red alcohQl. Shellac dries quickly, is easy to apply, and produces a tough, elastic f

ilm on wood, metal glass, cork, and leather. However, it should not be used on work expose d to outside conditions especially under strong sunlight since it will discolor and to w ater containing alkali since it causes the shellac to soften and whiten. Shellac finds considerable use as a seal coat over stains and fillers and is so metimes used as a complete finishk1g material by itself. This is known as french polish, using a linseed oil -soaked applicating cloth, co"nsists of many layers of shellac applied one over the other. 5. LACQUERS -a new product made from synthetic materials to take the place of v arnish for clear finishes. Most modern lacquer is based on nitrocellulose used i n combination with natural or synthetic resins and plasticizers. There ingredients are disso lved in a mixture of volatile solvents which evaporate, leaving a film to form the protectiv e coating. Thinners are mixed with lacquer just prior to application to reduce the consi stency for spraying, to control the rate of drying, and to reduce the cost of lacquer. They include a group of alcohols ethyl, butyl, amyl and isopropyl. When another class of materials, "pigments" are added to clear lacquer, the resu lt is lacquer enamel, available in a wide range of colors. 135 136 Eight varieties of clear and colored lacquers: '1. clear gloss lacquer-a clear lacquer that dries to a glossy finish in one to four hours. It 1 may be rubbed and polished with oil., 2. clear flat lacquer-dries without gloss. 9ften used to produce satin effec ts. 3. Tinting lacquer-a concentrated colored lacquer mixed with clear lacquer to produce lacquer enamel. 4. Brushing lacquer-a slc:>w-drying lacquer formulated specially for brush ap plication. 5. Bronzing lacquer-a clear lacquer into which are mixed metallic pigments to produce metallic effects. 6. Shading Lacquer- a slightly colored lacquer used to produce wood color tone effects on furniture. 7. Water-white lacquer-this is an exceptionally clear lacquer that produces a p rotective coating of greatest transparency over pale finishes. 8. Dipping lacquer-this is designed for1application by the dip-tankjmethod and is avail able both clear and in colors. 6. STAINS-materials used to apply color to wood surfaces. They are intended to impart color without concealing or obscuring the grain and not to provide a protective coating. They may be used to accentuate the color contrast of a wood grain, to even up c olor

differences or to imitate expensive wood colors on surfaces which lack desirable color or grain. There are a number of types of wood stain available, based on the kind of solvent used to dissolve the coloring mattera. Water-soluble stains -synthetic dyes, many of which are coal tar derivatives manufactured in powder form and in various strengths. They are dissolved in hot wate r at a specified rate in ounces per gallon, depending on the depth of color required. Water stain is easy to apply by brush, sponge, dipping or spray. It is nonf ading and nonbleeding, and it gives deep, even penetration. However, it has a tenden cy to raise the grain of wood. thus roughening the surface and necessitating careJul s anding. Water stain will air dry in about 12 hours. b. Spirit Stains-made from dyes which are soluble in alcohol and are manufac tured both in powder form and in ready mixed liquid form. This type of stain produces the brightest and strongest colors but is most sus ceptible to fading. It also tends to bleed and to raise the grain of the wood. Because they dry rapidly spirit stains are usually applied by spray; because of their high penetration quality. they are often used for iefinishing, repair work, and f or staining sap streaks. Drying time is usually from 15 minutes to 2 hours. c. Penetrating OU Stains -made by dissolving oil-soluble dyes in coal tar solve nts such as tolnol, benzol, or xylol and further thinning the vehicle with common petrole um solvents. Oil stains are usually produced as a ready mixed liquid. Stain is easy to apply by the sponge, spray or dip method, but the surface must be wiped after application to remove excess stain. Oil stains have a tendency t o bleed into finish coats and are not as light-fast as water stains but have no tendency to raise the grain. Drying time varies from 1 to 24 hours. d. Non Grain-Raising Stains-this type of stain is made using light-fast dyes wh ich are soluble in such substances as glycols, alcohols, and ketones. They are des igned to produce all the advantages of the stains previously mentioned with none of their disadvantages. They moderate penetration, do not raise the grain of wood, and dry in from 15 minutes to 3 hours. They do not run or bleed and; because of their fastdrying properties, are usually applied by spraying. e. Pigment Wiping Stains-this type are made from translucent mineral pi gments ground into a drying oil. They are applied by brushing or swabbing the surface w ith a cotton cloth and are allowed to set for various lengths of time after applicatio n. They have good light resistance, no tendency to raise the grain, and color uni-

formity. However, they lack the staining capacity of many other stains, and, be cause they are not as transparent as some others, tend to obscure the fine grain of w ood. 7. FILLERS-finet'S are finishing materials which are used on wood surfaces, particularly those with open grain, to fill the pores and provide a perfectly smooth, uniform surface for varnish or lacquer. Filler is also used to impart color to the wood pores an d so emphasize the grain. Two general types of a. Pasta fillers-used on open-grained woods. This consist of a base or body, pi gment, nonvolatile vehicle and thinner. The body is generally a translucent, i nert material {such as silica, some silicates, and carbonates of calcium and magnesium) which will fill the pores withoufstaining the wood. Color pigment is usually umber, sienna, or similar colors which will give the fi ller the desired color. Use thinners similar to those used in varnishes: Filler is applied by brush, by spray or by dipping and must be thinned to the pr oper consistency for the method of application used. It is then wiped off, acr .oss the grain, before it sets on the surface. b . Liquid Filler-used on closed-grained woods. Usually a varnish with a small amount of body material added. It is used on medium, close-grai ned woods in essenti ally the sa.me way as paste filler but has much less filling capacity. .. 8. SEALERS- the primary purpose of a sealer is to seal the surface of the wo od and prevent the absorption of succeeding finish coats. It may be 3pplied to bare wood th at has been sanded smooth or applied over the stain or filler: A sealer also tends to seal in the filler, blend the stain, stiffen any raised wood grain and thus make sanding easier, and form a bond between the wood and the finishing coats. Shellac is a widely used sealer. Thinned out to a 2 to 41b. cut, depending on w hether varnish or lacquer is to be used. Varnish sealer is available for use under varnish or lacquer. It is similar to v arnish cut back until the material contains 30 to 35 percent solids. This type of sealer air-dries in about 8 hours or may be force-dried in 1 to 2 hours at 150 F. The surface must be sanded after the sealer is completely dry. Lacquer sealer is the type of sealer most commonly used under lacquer finishes. It consists of the same type of resins from which lacquer is made, with plasticizer s and solvent and, in addition, solid content in the form of zinc and calcium stearates. These are called sanding agents and increase the ease with which the sealer surf ace

may be sanded when dry (Sanding Sealer!: 9. SILICONE WATER REPELLANT To be used on all non-painted concrete, synthetic finishes, rubble, brick, a nd wash-out finishes as a protection trorn absoiJ)tion of water and prevent moss, alkali, fungi to destroy the surface. 137 138 PRODUCT NAMES INTERIOR & EXTERIOR FINISHES All of the finishing paints have different product for each brand of paint an example is as follows: Nalcrete flat paint is Dutch Boy Tropicote flat paint is Sinclair Product to use as per Location of Surface 1. For interior and exterior concrete surfaces a. concrete sealer b. stucco and concrete primer c. interior flat paint d. exterior gloss paint e. quick dry enamel f. portland cement paint-oleoresinuos base paint. g. gloss or semi-gloss AQUA paint-thin with water Note: before painting newly plastered concrete surface apply a mietralizer an alki free concentrate (using 1/2 liter per Bottle to 10 liters of water of any brand) use d to wash unfinished interior or exterior stucco, concrete masonry, or plaster surfac es before painting where free alkali may be present, or where moisture conditi ons may cause efflorescence 2. For exterior wood.surfaces a. Exterior Gloss House paint b. enamelized house paint c. latex house paint Note: before painting exterior wood surface, apply wood primer which i s fungicidal of any brand. (non-fungicide is also accepted) 3. For exterior galvanized iron roof. Tiles of asbestos a. portland cement paint b. tatex roofing paint c. acrylic roof paint Note: before applying paint. Apply red oxideprimer or red lead primer-(a high q uality rust inhibitive primer formulated to prepare iron and steel surfaces for subsequ ent coats). 4. For interior wood surfaces a. flat wall enamel b. satin egg-shell semi-gloss finish c. interior semi-gloss finish d. interior gloss enamel finish e. latex semi-gloss finish (ideal for acoustic boards) Note: before applying paint, sand paper and apoly interior primer ana sealer-an alkydbased sealer for interior wood panels, cabinets. Thinner is added.

5. For interior & exterior ferrous metal surfaces a. Quick drying enamels b. aluminum paint c. slow chalking tank enamel Note: before applying paint, coat surface with red oxide. primer or red lead primer, or zinc chromate primer. 6. For furniture and wood craft finishing a. wood pasta seeler-designed to fill and seal open grain interior wo od used for paneling, ftoor, furniture it will produce an even level finish. Use thinner or oilwood stain. b. oilwood stains - for staining open-grained or close grained wood filler. c. lacquer sanding sealer-a clear sealer f or wood to be finished with lacquer . It has excellent holdout properties requires pess sanding. d. clear gloss lacquer -top quality high gloss clear lacquer for cabinet fixtur es, doors, paneling and furniture. Use lacquer thinner. e. clear dead flat lacquer-flat finish for wood cabinets, doors and. paneling a nd other surfaces requiring a flat finish thin with lacquer thinner. f. super dead flat lacquer g. natural finishing oil h. polyurethane clear or pigmented finish -is a tough, floor varnish recommend ed for wood tiles especially for basketball Gyms. (Hudson brand) . i. lacquer glazing & spot putty-is a heavy-bodi ed putty and glaze for fi lling dents and imperfections on metal or wood surface use lacquer thinner . Gladng putty-:-a high quality alkyd resin fitler for repairing dents, holes and cracks oo metal or wood surfaces. Use thinner and tinting colors: EXTERIOR WORK MATERIAL TO BE PAINTED: 1. Cement Plaster Sprayed Cement and Concrete SPECIFICATIONS: For FLAT, WATERBASED FINISH First coat Finish coat First coat Fi nish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Fi nish coat First coat Finish coat MATERIAL BRAND Sinclair's 18 Epoprime Sinclair's 475 Stuc-o-life Fuller's 70-W-6 Acrylic primer Fuller' s 820-Speedflo Exterior Latex #1436 concrete white Dutch Boy's Flat

Nalcrete Thinned with 1/2 liter water per 4 liters of paint Dutch Boy's #55 BOO Flat Nalcrete Sherwin William's No. 650 S ~ W House Paint Sherwin William's No. 551 S-W Exterior house paint Boysen's Permacoat concrete sealer Boysen's Permacoat or Monol(ote 139 ' 2. Hollow Block Masonry II II II II II II II ll I[ :11 II I 140 First coat Finish coat For GLOSS, WATERBASED FINISH First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat . First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat For FLAT, WATERBASED FINISH First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat f::irst coat Davies #1350 Acrylic concrete sealer Davies #600 Acrylic latex paint Sinclair's 18 Epoprime Sinclair's 5000 Aqua Gloss Fuller's 70-W-6 Acrylic primer Fuller's 3200 Gloss Latex

Dutch Boy's #100x Exterior gloss latex house paint Dutch Boy's #100x Exterior gloss latex Sherwin William's No. 650 S-W Exterior house paint Sherwin William's No. 550 S-W Exterior house paint Boysen's #7{E, white permacoat concrete sealer Boysen's permacoat gloss latex Davies #1350 Acrylic concrete sealer Davies #525 Acrylic glass latex paint Sinclair's 1010 HoHow Block primer Sinclair's 475 Stue:-o-life Fuller's 70-W-6 Acrylic primer Fuller's 820-Speedflo Exterior latex Dutch Boy's Flat Nalcrete Dutch Boy's #55 BOO Flat Nalcrete Sherwin William's No. 650 S-W Exterior house paint 3. Wood Siding, Paneling, Trims, Fascias, Eaves, Soffits \1 H' II I II Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat For GLOSS, OIL FINISH First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat Sherwin William's No. 561 S-W Exterior house paint Boysen's #705 white

permacoat concrete sealer Boysen's permacot or monokote Davies #1350 Acrylic concrete sealer Davies #500 Acrylic latex paint Sinclair's 289 Exterior Wood primer Sinclair's 500 SPI Exterior House Paint or 290 100% Exterior House Paint Fuller's Exterior Wood Primer No. F-3588 Fuller's 2900 Exterior Gloss house paint or 620 Exterior Glossy house paint or 8605 Exterior Semi-gloss or 8100411 purpose Latex Dutch Boy's #25 F Exterior Wood Primer Dutch Boy's #100x Latex house paint or #113 Enamelized house paint.or #10x exterior gloss house paint Sherwin William's No. 450 S-W undercoat Sherwin William's SWP Gloss house paint Boysen's #302 white exterior wood primer Boysen's Exterior house paint Davies #1320 Exterior wood primer Davies 1200 Exterior gloss house paint 141 Fo! CLEAR, VARNISH FINISH Two coats Sinclair's 460 Varshield Gloss Varnish or Sinclair's 463 Varshield Flat Finish Door, Trim primer Fuller's 17782 Sanding Sealer Two coats Fuller's #7737 Clear dead Flat lacquer #34-F1 Clear Flat laquer #34C-7F Clear gloss lacquer #6500. Heavy duty varnish gloss #6502 Heavy duty varnish flat , #V-223

Water resistant SPAF Varnish Two coats Dutch Boy's TT-V-lZC versatile Spar Varnish Two coats Sherwin William's LIN-X Clear Gl oss Varnish Two coats Boysen's 154 Supper Varnish (for eaves only) TV'!O coats lJavies #68 Daxpar varnish Two coats . or #69 Urespar ~ For SEMI-TRANSPARENT STAIN FINISH One coat Sinclair's 3900 Stainteke semi-Transparent stain One coat Fuller's Non-grains Raising Wood stains or (Oil woodstain) penetrating One coat Dutch Boy's One coat Sherwin William's penetrating oil stains One coat Boysen's oil Wood Stain One coat One coat Davies Oil woodstain 142 4. Galvanized, Iron Sheet Roofing For FLAT, OIL FINISH Pretreatment First coat Finish coat Pretreatment First coat Finish coat Pretreatment First coat Finish coat Pretreatment. First coat Finish coat Pretreatment First coat Finish coat Pretreatment First coat Finish coat Pretreatment First coat Finish coat

Sinclair's 12 GALVAwash Sinclair's 26 Zinc Chromate Primer Sinclair's Portland Cement Paint Fuller' s Turco prepaint , or Redipaint Fuller's Red lead primer R-4171 or 83-Y-1F Red oxide primer Fuller's #2200 series allweather #1400 series Galvanox #3001 series roof Decor Dutch Boy's tex thin Dutch Boy' s #041 zinc Chromate Primer Outch Boy' s Portland Cement (3 coats) Sherwin William's Galvanized Iron Primer, B50 Ax1 Ner roofl Sherwin William's Galvanized Iron Primer, B50 Ax2 or S-W Kromic Metal primer or S-W Red Lead Primer No. 1-A-. Sherwin William's S-W exterior house paint Boysen's Boysen's 1009 Acrylic Roof Paint Boysen' s 100% Acrylic Roof Paint Davies Wash Primer Davies #940 Zinc chromate primer Davies Portland cement or Davies Acrylic roof paint 143 144 5. Galvanized Iron Gutters, Cappings Conductors, Flashing For GLOSS, OIL fiNISH Pretreatment First coat Second coat Finish coat Pretreatment First coat Finish coat Pretreatment First eoat Second coat Finish coat Pretreatment

First coat Second coat Finish coat Pretreatment First coat Second coat Finish coat Pretreatment First coat Second coat SinClair' 12 GAL VAWash Sinclair's 26 Zinc Chromate primer Sinclair's 248 Sash and Trim primer Sinclair's Sinco lux Quick Dry Enamel Fuller's Turco red paint or WO #1 or 7861 acid component Fuller's Red oxide primer 83-Y -1 F Fuller's 2900 or 620 Exterior Gloss house paint or Galvanox or roof decor Acrylic Latex Boysen's Boysen's 100% Acrylic Roof Paint Boysen's 100% Acrylic Roof Paint Boysen's 100% Acrytic Roof Paint Sherwin William's Sherwin WiHiam's S-W Galvanized Iron Primer or S-W grip primer Sherwin William's S-W metal tastic S-W-P house paint or sitver brite aluminum paint 115 Sherwin William's Same on 2nd coat Dutch Boy's #61-006 metal treatment solution mixed with equal proportion of tap water. Dutch Boy's 1040-Zin Chromate Primer Dutch Boy's Dutch Boy's exterior house paint or nalcrete Davies Wash primer Davies #940 Zinc chromate primer Davies Exterior house paint or

Davies Roofshield 6. Asbestos and Ceramics Finish coat Pretreatment First coat Second coat Finish coat For FLAT WATER BASED FINISH FirSt coat Finish coat First c o a ~ Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat EXTERIOR & INTERIOR WORK MATERIAL TO BE PAINTED: 1. Metal Sash, Trims, Mullions Ornamental iron and other Ferrous Met&J Sutfaces SPECIFICATION: For FLAT, OIL FINISH First coat Second coat Finish coat Sinclair's 100% Acrylic Roof paint Sinclair's 100% AcryUc Roof paint Fuller's Roof Decor Acrylic Latex paint Fuller's Roof Decor Acrylic Latex paint Dutch Boy's Flat Nalcrete Dutch Boy's gloss of Nalcrete Sherwin William' s Sherwin William' s Loxon' s Exterior Masonry Acrylic Latex Paint, K12 W x7 Boysen's #705 White Permacoat concrete sealer Boysen' s permacoat or Monokote Davies 11350 Acrylic concrete sealer Davies Acrylic roof paint MATERIAL BRAND Sinclair's S-15 Chrome oxide pnmer or Sinclair's SP.01

Red lead primer Sinclair's 248 Sash and Trim primer Sinclair's Sirico Lux Quick dry Enamel 145 Apply Turco WO #1 146 First coat Finish coat First coat Second coat Finish coat First coat Second coat Finish coat First coat Second coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat Fuller's 183-R-9F Red oxide #R-4171 Red Lead #567-Y-1 Sine Chromate Fuller's #2900 Exterior Glossy paint #620 Ext. Glossy paint #4720 Series Synthetic ODE or Quick drying Glossy Dutch Boy's #057 Red Lead or #056 Red oxide #041 Zinc Chromate Primer Dutch Boy's Dutch Boy's #6-105 silver Finish Aluminum Paint or Quick drying Enamel in 25 popular colors. Boysen's #371 P.O. Red Lead primer Boysen's #1070 Red Bootoping Paint Boysen's same as 2nd coat Sherwin William's Kromik metal primer Sherwin William's Sherwin William's Keon Lustral Enamel Davies #950 Red Lead or #940 Zinc chromate or #915 LZI or 910 Preparakote Red Oxide

Davies #400 Series quick drying Enamel or Davies ffl-00 Series Marine Finish 2. ALL NON-PAINTED Concrete, Synthetic Finishes, rubble, brick and washout INTERIOR WORK 1. WOODWORK, Plywood, Wall and Ceiling For FLAT, CLEAR, FINISH Two coats Two coats Two coats Two coats Two coats Two coats For FLAT, OIL FINISH First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat (Use Fulatile. or First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat Sinclair's 445 Watershield (Silicone Water repellent) Fuller's #6610 water repellent sealer Dutch Boy's #4-()45 Concrete Sealer, #103 tucco and concrete primer," #61-198 clear masonry water repellent Boysen's #99 Aquaseal (water repellent) Sherwin William's Weather Clad Penetrator Davies #400-X Silicone Water Repellent or Davies #100-X Aqualock Sinclair's 975 Since prime undercoat Sinclair's 1900 Canyon color Flatwall Enamel Fuller's Sinto Seal 4789 Fuller's 420 Int. Flat wall paint Fuller's 4440 Flat wall enamel 400..000 Fulcoat

Flatwall Dutch Boy's #001 Interior primer and sealer Dutch Boy's #813 Flat Wall Enamel Sherwin William's S-W Wall primer and Sealer No. 25 Sherwin William's S-W. Flat tone alkyd Flat Enamel Boysen's 1300 white interior primer and sealer Boysen's Flat'Wall Enamel Davies #1360 Interior primer & sealer Davies #3/X) Flatwall enamel 147 148 For SEMI-Gl:OSS OIL FINISH First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat For FLAT, TEXTURED FINISH First coat Second coat Finish coat Finish coat Sinclair's 975 Sinco prime undercoat Sinclair's 1000 Sinco Satin Fuller's Sintoseal 4789 Fuller's 520 semi-gloss Enamel or 300-000 Fulcoat semi-gloss or 8600 ODE or 200..000 Fulcoat ODE Dutch Boy's #001 Interior Primer and sealer butch Boy's #22-101 Interior semi-gloss finish Sherwin William's S-W . Flat rite enamel undercoat

Sherwin WiHiam's S-W Flat rite enamel Boysen's 1300 white interior primer and sealer semi-gloss finish . Davies 11360 Interior primer & seater Davies #600 Interior Semi-gloss finish Sinclair's 890 Pigmented Sealer Sinclair's 975 Prime undercoat Sinclair's 515 Nusurf Textured .Paint Fuller's 18300-AB-02 Textured Acrylic Bond Fuller's #8301-W-01 Gloss white gloss white 18303-W-01 Flat white Fultex Latex Textured . paint Acrycast' S<;>lvent acrylic Textured paint 2. ACOUSTIC WALL and CEILING First coat Second coat Finish coat First coat Second coat Finish coat First coat Second coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat I For BLEACH FINISH Wear rubber gloves for protection. May be applied either by brush or spray. Always start with wood;,leach No. 1 first while it is w t, follow immediately with woodbleach No. 2. Do not wait for woodbleach No. 1 to dry up before appl-.:ing woodbleach No.2 in order to obtain a good bleach. For FLAT, WATER BASED FINISH One coat One coat One coat One coat One coat

One coat One coat (1/4 liter of water per 41iter can of paint) Boysen's #300 white interior primer and sealer Boysen's wondercoat Boysen's same as above Sherwin William's S-W Wall primer and sealer No. 25 Sherwin William's S-W tone alkyd Flat Enamel Sherwin William's same as 2nd coat Dutch Boy'!; Dutch Boy's Dutch Boy's Davies #1360 Interior primer & sealet Davies Classitex textured coating Sinclair's 1100 10-sountt.. Dutch Boy's #88-510 x Latex semi-gloss finish Sherwin William's Boysen's Davies #500 Series latex paints Davies #25 Paste woodfiller natural Davies #20-00 Series oil woodstains 149 3. Wood Paneling, door, closet cabinets ' 150 Prepare sur:face with one coat of Paste wood Filler. If stain isrequired, use colormat ic wood stain For CLEAR, LACQUER FINISH Rrst coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat Sinclair's 50 paste wood Filler Sinclair's wood colormatic woodstain if required Fuller's #1205 natural

paste wood filler Fuller's #779 Water clear gloss Dutch Boy's #23-11 natural wood paste Dutch Boy's #13-56 clear flat lacquer Sherwin William's Sherwin William's Boysen's tlfl) Natural Wood Paste Filler Boysen's Davies #25 Paste woodfiller Natural, Davies 20-00 Series Oil woodstains Sinclair's CL-101 Sanding Sealer Either one of the following: Sinclair's CL-150 High Gloss Lacquer Sinclair's CL-151 water white High Gloss Lacquer Sinclair's CL-156 Flat Lacquer Sinclair's CL-157 Water white Dead Flaat Lacquer Fuller's Fuller's Boysen's lacquers primer surface Boysen's gloss lacquer enamel Sherwin William's Sherwin William's Dutch Boy's #23-11 Natural wood paste filler Dutch Boy's #13-56 clear flat lacquer Davies #701 Hi-solids First coat Rnish coat Davies #702 Hi-solids clear gloss lacquer or Davies #703 Hi-solid dead flat lacquer or Davies #704 Water white gloos lacquer 4. DOORS, CLOSET and CABINET work (Kitchen) Subject to water For FfNISHING OIL FINISH One or Two coats One or Two coats One or Two coats One or Two coats One or Two coats One or Two coats One or Two coats

For QUICK DRY ENAMEL FINISH SPRAY APPLICATION First coat Second coat Third coat Finish with Two or more coats First coat Second coat Third coat Finish with Two or more coats First coat Second coat Third coat Finish with Two or more coats First coat Second coat Third coat Finish with two or more coats First coat Second coat Sinclair's n7 Finishing oil Fuller's Sherwin William's penetrating oil clear, V82 V X 50 Dutch Boy's #31-001 Natural Finishing Oil Boysen's Davies #66 Finishing oil Sinclair's AF-22 Sinlux Primer Surfacer Sinclair's AF-24 Sinlux Glazing putty Sinclair's AF-22 Sinlux Primer surfacer Sinclair's Sinco lux Quick dry enamel Fuller's Fuller's Fuller's Fuller's Sherwin William's Sherwin William's Sherwin William's Sherwin William's Dutch Boy's lnsanto Primer surface. Dutch Boy's lnsanto Glazing putty Dutch Boy's lnsanto Enamel Dutch Boy's lnsanto Reducer #1 076 Boysen's #303 white

Enamel undercoat Boysen's Quick drying Enamel 151 r 152 Third coat Finish with two or more coats Rrst coat Second coat Third coat Finish with Two or more coats For DUCO FINISH (Pigmented lacquer) SPRAY APPLICATION First coat Second coat Third coat Finish with Two or more coats Rrst coat Second coat Third coat Finish with Two or more coats First coat Second coat Third coat Finish with Two or more coats First coat Second coat Third coat Finish with Two or more coats First coat Second coat Third coat Finish with Two- or more coats First coat Second coat Third coat Finish with Two or . more coats Boysen's same as 2nd coat Boysen's .Davies Pro-lux primer Davies Pro-lux glazing putty_ Davies Pro-lux primer Davies Quick-drying enamel Sinclair's LU-100 lacquer Primer surfacer Sinclair' s LU-202 lacquer Glazing & Spot putty Sinclair's LU-100 lacquer Primer surfacer

Sinclair' s AL-100 Automotive lacquer F u ~ e r ' s Fuller's Fuller's Fuller's Sherwin William's Sherwin William's Sherwin William's Sherwin William's Dutch Boy's Dutch Boy's Dutch Boy's Dutch Boy's Boysen;s Boysen's Boysen' s Boysen' s Davies l1f1J LacQuer Primer surface Davi es 1700 laCQUer putty Davies 1700 lacquer primer surface Davies 1700 Series automotive lacquer INTERIOR WORK MATERIAL TO BE PAINTED: 1. Cement Plaster Sprayed Cement and Concrete First coat Second coat Third coat Finish with Two or more coats First coat Second coat Third coat Finish with Two or more coats SPECIFICATIONS: For FLAT, BASED FINISH First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coats First coat Finish coats First coat Finish coats First coat Finish coats MATERIAL BRAND Sinclair's 300 Acrylic primer Sinclair's 475 Stuc-o-life or 1600 vinytife Fuller's Acrylic primer Fuller 88 Flat Emulsion Latex 100-000 Fulcoat

Latex Sherwin William's S-W Wall Primer and Sealer No. 25 Sherwin William's S-W Flat tone alkyd Aat Enamel Dutch Boy's #4-046 Concrete Dutch Boy's #105 Stucco and concrete paint Boysen's #700 white permacoat Boysen's #703 white permacoat tinted to desired shade. Davies 11350 Acrylic concrete seater Davies #500 Series acrylic latex paint 153 154 For FLAT; WATER BASED TEXTURED FINISH First coat Finish coats First coat Finish coats First coat Finish coats First coat Finish coats First coat Finish coats First coat Finish coats First coat Finish coats For SEMI-GLOSS WATER BASED FINISH: First coat Finish coats First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coats First coat Finish coats First coat Finish coats First coat Sinclair;s 300 Acrylic primer Sinclair's 515 Nusurf Textured Paint Fuller's Fuller's Sherwin William's Sherwin William's

Dutch Boy's Dutch Boy's Boysen' s Boysen's Davies #1350 Acrylic concrete sealer Davies Classitex textured coating Sinclair's 300 Acrylic primer or SP-4000 Acrylic Emulsion clear sealer Sinclair's 4000 Aqua Satin Fuller's 70-W-6 Acrylic prir.1er Fuller's 3400-semi-gloss ,..latex Sherwin William' s S-W Wall Primer and sealer No. 25 Sherwin William's SW Semi lustre Dutch Boy' s Dutch Boy's Boysen' s 1705 white permacoat concrete sealer Boysen's permacoat semi-gloss latex Davies #515 Semi-gloss latex For STIPPLE ENAMEL FINISH First coat Second coat Finish coat First coat Second coat Finish coat First coatSecond coat Finish coat First coat Second coat Finish coat First coat Second coat Finish coat First coat Second coat For STIPPLE FLAT FINISH First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat

First coat Finish coat Sinclair's 890 pigmented sealer Sinclair's 975 Sinco Prime undercoat Sinclair's 782 Semigloss stipple Fuller's Fuller's Fuller's Sherwin William's Sherwin William's Sherwin William's Dutch Boy's Dutch Boy's Dutch Boy's Boysen's Boysen's Boysen's Davies 11350 Acrylic concrete sealer Davies Classitex 155-02 semi-gloss Davies 156-m Gloss Sinclair's 890 Pigmented Sealer Sinclair's 781 Flat Style Fuller's 70-W-6 Acrylic Primer Fuller's 8300 Series Textured coatings Sherwin William's Sherwin William's Dutch Boy's Dutch Boy's Boysen's Boysen's Davies 11350 Acrylic concrete sealer Davies Classitex 155-01 Flat 155 156 2. HOLLOW BLOCK MASONRY OTHERS Semi-gloss or Flat Semi-gloss or Flat Semi-gloss or flat Semi-gloss of Flat Semi-gloss or Flat Semi-gloss of Flat Semi-gloss of Flat For SEMI-GLOSS OR FLAT WATER BASED FINISH First coat

Finish coat Finish coat First coat Finish coat Finish coat First coat Finish coats Finish coats FirSt coat Finish coats Finish coats First coat Finish coats Finish coats First coat Finish coats Finish coats First coat Finish ci>ats Finish coats Sinclair's 1010 Hollow block primer Sinclair's 400 Aqua Satin Sinclair's 475-Stuc-o-life Fuller' s 70-W-6 Acrylic Primer Fuller's 3400 Semi-gloss latex Fuller's 8100 all purpose . latex Sherwin William' s Sherwin William's Sherwin Wiiliam's S-W. Flat tone alkyd Flat Enamel Dutch Boy's Dutch Boy's Dutch Boy's #55 BOO Flat Nalcrete Boysen's 1700 white permacoat concrete permanent semi-gloss latex Boysen's Bovsen's Davies #1350 Acrylic concrete sealer Davies 1500 Series latex paints 1. Neutralizer-for new masonry to neutralize the alkali and ensure adhesion. 2. Concrete putty Filler 3. Paste wood Filler-natural, oak, mahogany, walnut. 4. Sand paper 5. Turpentine 6. Lacquer Thinner 7. Latex paints 8. Paint and varnish remover 9. Blackboard Slating 10. Steel and Water Tank-red oxide primer then chlorinated Rubber paint. 11. Silk-Screen paints 12. Acoustical Ceiling paints

13. Polyurethane Gloss Finish - For wood surface, Heavy duty plastic varnis h. 14. Tinting colors-yellow ochre, lamp black, purssian blue. Bulletin red, lemon yeflow, medium chrome yellow, dark chrome yellow, chrl;)me green, dark chrome,.. ,enetian red, Burnt umber, Raw umber, Raw Sienna, Bumt 15. Bleach Finish - use woodbleach No. 1 and woodbleach No, 2. 16. Sanding Sealer-a lacquer sanding sealer composed of nitrocellulose and hard gum resin. Airdry to recoat or to sand in one hour. Any lacquer may be used over th is sealer. F:or " Interior use only" Application of paint a. surface preparation c. First topcoat b. primer d. Second topcoat .Methods of application of paints and coatings 1. Brush 9. Electrostatic Spray 2. Dip 10. Electrostatic Air1ess Spray 3. Handroller 11. Utho Coating roller 4. Decorative roller 12. Plywood coating roller 5. Cup Gun Spray 13. Flow coating roller 6. Pressure fed spray 14. Powder Dip Coating 7. Airless spray 15. Electrodepositlon 8. Hot airless spray Brands of Painte 1. Davies 2. Fuller 3. Dutch Boy 4. Sinclair 5. Boysen 6. Sherwin Williams 7. Finch 8. Others PAINTS Paints - include the many fluid materials used as thin coating on wood , metals, cement plasters, brickwork and stucco per protect fire or decorative purposes. These m aterials are classified into true paint and varnish, the distinction being that the true paint is a mixture of a pigment with a vehicle where as varnish contains no pigment. The ve hicle is the fluid portion which is oil and water. It is used for iron sheet and meta l to protect them from corrosion and for wood to guard it from decay and warping. 011 paint -this signifies a paint in which the vehicles is a drying o il. Linseed oil is most generally used because of its great ability to absorbed oxygen and charge to sol id state. This oil vehicle is modified by the use of thinners and driers, the best thinne r is turpentine. Water paint ...:..signifies a paint in which the vehicles is water paint include s white wash and calcium. Water paint is made by the slaking quicklime in water, then straining t o remove the lumps and adding water. They are used in a powdered forrr t) mix wi th water.

Varnish '(Surface)-varnish is a solution of resin in drying oil or in a Y\.. .r tile solvent such as alcohol in turpentine it contains no pigment and hardens a smoother, hard and gloss coat by. oxidation of the oil or the evaporation of alcohol. 157 CHAPTER 160 HARDWARE HARDWARE -metal products used in construction, such as bolts, hinges, locks , tools, etc. They are classified as: a. finishing hardware-Hardware, such as hinges locks, catches, etc. that has a finished appearance as well as function, esp. that used with dooi'S, windows, and cabinet s, maybe considered part of the decorative treatment of a room or building. b. Rough hardware -in bui lding construction, hardware meant to be conceafed, such as bolts, nails, screws, spikes, rods, and other metal fittings. Some Finishing t1ardware Brands: 1. Sargent 2. Stanley 3. Vale 4. Corbin 5. Schlage 6. Kwikset 7. Rabbit ; 8. Universal 9. Eagle 10. Master 11. Alpha 12. Yeti I. DOORS-an entrance way a) TYPES a. flush -a smooth-surfaced door having faces which are plane which conceal ns rails and stiles or other structure when used inside, it Is of hollow core, when used for exterior it is of solid core. ' ~ ' b. Panel door - a door having stiles. rails and sometimes muntins, which form o ne or more frames around recessed thinner panels. Jod< r.21tl Kinds of Doors 1. Swinging Door open to __,--t--tap \ \ \ \ r-t-- lcXk 2. Overhead swing-up garage door - a rigid overhead door which opens as a n entire

unit. 161 M*'Mf 162 3. Overhead roll-up garage door-a door which, when open, a8sumes a horizon tal position above the door opening, made of several leaves. COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL 4. Roll-up door (solid or see-through aluminum shutters) a door m<!de up of small horizontal interlocking metal slats which are guided i n a track; the configuration cDils about an overhead drum which is housed at the head of the opening, either manual or motor-driven. 5. Accordion Door - a hinged door consisting of a system of panels which are hu ng from an overhead track. When the door is open, the faces of the panels close fl at against each other. When the door is closed, the edges of adjacent panels butt against (or interlock) each other to form a solid barrier. " ;I ry ,. ., ,: i: '$ >C 'I !, I ' 'J :J \} :! whgn 6. Bi-Folding door-one of two or more doors which are hinged together so that they can open and fold in a confined space. wtwJ-1 .. 4 "" 7. Revolving Door -an exterior door consi.sting of four leaves (at 90 to each other) which pivot about a common vertical axis within a cylindrically shaped vestibu le, prevents the direct passage of air through the vestibule, thereby eliminating drafts from outside.

8. Sliding Door -a door mounted on track which slides in a horizontal direct ion usually parallel to one wall . t-- --t 9. By-Passing sliding sliding door which slides to cover a fixed door of the same width or another sliding door . 163 164 10. Sliding Pocket Door - a door which slides inside a hollow of the wall . 11. Dutch Door -a hinged door which is divided into two. The upper part can be opened while the lower portion is closed. 12. French Door Examples of finishing Hardwares A. To Hung a Door HINGE -a movable joint used to attach support and tum a door about a pivot, co nsists of two plates joined together by a pin which support.the door and connect it to its frame, enabling it to swing open or closed. 1. Butt Hinge-consist of two rectangular metal plates which are joined with a p in. in large hinge, the pin is removable, it is fixed. ... :r8 , .. ' ... J' . dYie of 'th2 0'ht1dnc.a/ly . ,-\ .. . .. of #Je rnge tM>ugh wYr0J the ! f'lrl e e , Ll Fllst Pfn Hlng11-a hinge in whichJhe pin is fastened permanently in place. '" Full Surfllce Hinge -a hinge designed for attachment on the surface of the dOOf and jamb without mortising. z z ~ z z z z , L006 Joint Hinge -a door hinge having two knucktes,. one of which has vertical pin that fits in a corresponding hole in the other, by lifting the-door up, off the vertical pin, the door may be removed withl unscreWing the hinge. Loose Pin Hinge-a hinge having a removable pin which \ permits its two parts to be separated. 165 166 Ptlume/16 Hinge - a type of door hinge having a single ;oint of the pivot type, usually of modern design. 0/we Knuckle Hinge - a paumelle hinge with knuckles

forming an oval shape. 2. Spring Hinges - a hinge c o n t a i n i n ~ one or more springs, when a do or is opened, the hinge returns it to. the open position automaticaUy, may act in one directio n only, or in both directions. b. Double action ExceUent for u5e in restaurants, hospitals, kitchens, the door opens by just p ushing it with the shoulder or feet. b. Single IH:tlon C'i,' -r:::::? _,:.e .. ., e e :9 e 3. Pivot Hin .. - the axle or pin about which a window or door rotates. VtHtk:tll Spring Pivot Hingtt -a spring hinge for a door which is mortised into the heel of the doOr. the door is fastened to the floor and door head with pivots. top prvot 167 From Sunut Magazine How to make bookshelves ves p. 30 ROUGH HARDWARES I. NAILS C. W -common wire nail with head and for strength [! :> -box nail also used for strength ..---------FIN- finishing nail without head COl========;>> -casing nail also withOut head SIZES, 1", 1 1/2", 2", 2 1/2", 3'", 3 1/2", 4'", 6" Masonry nails or concrete nails These are nails which can be driven 3/ 4 deep to concrete mortar, or brick. NOTE: Choose a nail three times longer than the top thickness being fastened. For example, use a 1 1/2 nail when nailing 1/2 plywood to a 2 x 4 stud. Other common Hammer- driven fasteners O:D ==== . ,.. I . 'T . . 168 II. SCREWS Ctassified by gauge length, head type, and metallic make-up. HEAD TYPES FLAT HEAD ROUND. HEAO OVAL. H E:AD SCREW PHILIPPG f-IEAD . . Sl-fEET-ME'tZ'L .

I :Gauge 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14 FLUSH CruNTER GlMK low - 169 l lagScrew V screw hooks and eyes can hang object WASHERS .i%14' tl4M @ @ Tr Flat Counter Sunk ~ l u s h BOLTS Bolts have threaded shafts that receive nuts. To use them, a hole is drilled, pushing the bolt through and adding a nut. NUTS Flat square nut 170 bolts tightened with screw while holding the nut with a wrench. Hex nut Square nut 8 . acomnut Hunger bolt8- for hanging fixtures from walls. L = 2" to 6" diam. 1/ 4, 5/16", 3/ 8" W/ll!ll/J.. ,. . UDStn Wing nut to attach flat surface to round poles or pipes. Binding Sctews-Join two $lJrf&ces and are demountable 1/ 4 .. to 4". JOINERY BRACKETS To form strong joints for. decorative -Zinc-plated steel for Hidden view...:.... steel ones for "chest" type- brass-plated type T ~ Pl.A"'fE 171 .17.2 L-BRACKET JAW END 'TURNBUCKLE B. To Fix One Sash chain. head and foot bolt Expanded Lath (HYRI8) a IMtal lath having an open mesh formed by t1tt1ng; metais sheet. Used to admit mortar 0[ plastered cement. EYE .A.NO TURN9UCKU: . : ... . ' SURFACE BOLT Cremone Bolt fused to fasten upper end lower door

DOOR BOLT (BARREL BOLT) FlUSH B.OL T - a door bolt so de signed that when applied it is flush with the face or edge of the door. CHAIN DOOR FASTENER A,device attached to a door and its jamb which limits the door opening to the tength of the chain. Usually used in Hotel roOms. ~ C :::= .. ===:::l ~ ' .. 173 A variation of this is a mueical chatn -door fastener when door is opened the b utton ac n v a t ~ the battery operated button holder. C. To Lock The Door 174 LOCKSET -a complete lock system including the basic locking mechanisms and all the accessories, such as knobs escutcheons, Plates, etc. LATCH- a simple fastening. devi&e having a tatch bolt, b\.lt not a dead bolt contains no previsions for locking with a key, usually openable from both sides. VIEW FROM ~ ~ ~ Wfta1 ~ PJn ~ tOOl.,, rt I S ~ ~ iheblr ar not M ~ 6efllltf wrl1.a k.f)'. NIGHT LATCH - Key operated Latch LIFT LATCH-a type of door latch which fastens a door by rl)eans of a pivoted bar that engages a hook on the door jamb. a lever which lifts the pivoted bar used to unfasten the door. LATCH for .doer OEAO BOLT Button-a small rejecting member used to fast<.:1l the frame of a door or window. Knob -a handle. more or less spherical usually for operating a lock. RABBETED LOCK :a lade: or t1 Wh1d11h 2 faa fJuQ1 r.abbet on ;a r:abl).etAJ .&:A?r jamb ;nner Kndl --- -=flhRa1 '---k:aJ 175 Escutc/Hion -a protective plate surrounding the keyhoie of a door or a light switch (also a Flange on a pipe) . Plllta -a thin flat sheet of material. strikes -a metal plate or box w h i ~ h is set in a doorjamb and is either placed or recessed to receive the bQit or latch of a lock, fixed on door. Lip Strike....:. The projection from the side of a strike plate which the bolt of a lock

strikes first, when a door is closed; projects 0 ut from the side of the strike plate to protect the frame. hpw-1kl Bored Lock -a lock intended for installation in a circular hofe in a door. Roller Latch -a type of door latch has a roller under spring tension instead of a bevefed spring bolt, the roJier engages a strike plate, having a recess formed to receive. 176 Use a different Lockaet for each room. 1. Entnmce Lockset - with a key and universal button which when pushed stays put and locks the door. 2. 8(JC/room Lockset - same as the entrance lockset but simpler in design. 3. Toilet Lockaet-without a key has a button that is pushed to lock inside . lntegml Lock - a type of mordse lock having its cylinder in the knob; Cylinder Lock- a bored lock which has a cylindrical case into which a separate latch case fits. OfLINOEQ LOGK ' 0 MllgiHitlc Ptldlock -a kind of lock which opens by using the corresponding magnet which goes with it. paJiod< Door Llltch-a small locking or latching device used on screen .and generated by a knob or lever handle, some- ' times equipped with .a dead bolt. . . Bored Llltch -a latch intended for instaDation in a circular hole in 8 door. Hasp -a fastening device consisting of a loop or staple and a slotted hinge plate normalty secured with 8 padlock. Key-Ptldlock -a devjce which fastens in position may be operated by a key. .Huplock-a kind of hasp that has a bt,Jift-in locking device which can be opened only with a key. 177 178 D. Automatic Door Closer 1. Pneumatic Type 2. Semi-Concealed Overhead Type ~ - Concealed Type ' ~ . 4. Overhead Liquid Type jamb - .door '

' ~ ~ i ~ i II f 1 . i . J (' 11 ~ i 1 I r j ~ ('\ I I }i i i l I : I ,. l f : ' ' : ' ~ i ! l \ j I!/)\ ! \\ 1 ' ! I 'l I ' I 1 iJ I .1 t I I ' I l i ! i I . ! I: r-. ' 1 iii i . I I 1/il II 179 SLIDING DOOR TRACKS rdiAr CABINET DOORS-Hinged, sliding, drop down, roll away. a. Hinged Doors -are of 3 types, flush, overlapping and offset tlip). 180 HlNGES a. Butt Hinges loo.7A p11 LOmmon butt p121110 (tOttlnuouf;) up f.B.et ... _. -- .------11-. v il up t1oor Ltm Pi? by giVIng two 181 ---. \ / \ I --.--+- I ' .......... __ , ~ '-.._ ', / ' / ____ ...... -. b. Offset Hinges-used for hanging lipped or overlapping doors, available in semiconcealed and surface-mounted styles. I '\ .I .... . / , __ ..,..,. c. Pivot Hinges -made for both flush and overlapping doors, come in t hree main types: 1. side-frame pivot hinges that attach to a doors top and bottom edges.

2. side- frame pivot hinges that attach intermediately along a door's side edg e. 3. Top and bottom-mounted "knife" hin_ges that are quite difficult to attach. (This is recommended for use where !he cabinet door is touching the side wall). Sometimes called the washington hinge. --- --) __ "_[ / ' _,1 ....... __ , 182 l I --.:.--- I II\ "" I -.---- ', ,I ........... _,..,.. \ '., , , ____ , I ----.--' I \'\ / .............. ~ " -d. Invisible Hinges -don't show from the fr.ont and is expensive. They can b e used for both flush and overlapping door. ' ___ ..._ __ =:} I r ~ , . , 1 I --L\ I -- ---- I """ / ,. / ..... / _"'1f" __ I ' I ', // ~ - - . , . ...... ...,. __ ..,. 183 184 e. Flush Counter Hinge- for a drop down door that can be lowered to serve as wo rk surfaces (level with the cabinet's bottom) require hinges that lay flush in the surface, mortise them into both surfaces, they don't show when the door is closed. A dr oPdown door also requires a chain or stay to hold the door's weight when it's open. ,.,--........ "' / ' __ > t : _____ _ wunt2r SLIDING CABINET DOORS Use track hardware; CATCHES FOR CLOSING OF CABINET DOORS IN PLACE

Three Kinds of Catches 1. Friction Catch -any catch which when it engages a strike, is held in the en gaged position by friction. u 2. Magnetic Catch - a door catch flat that uses a magnet to hold the door in a closed position. 3. Bullet Catch -a fastener which holds a door in place by means of a project ing spring arctuated steel hall which is depressed when the door is closed. KNOB ffiowi3 w l<tlO D KriOD fa- !1h.d1i1 9 P.I}SI1B.d 111to Jni!PJ FLUSH RING. ;a flush Joor pun whrth rnto a .Jcvr; a n11g th2t fl2t 1nto the tup of 1M puR whltl not JYI t.u. Joor pulls rnfo .dotJr 185 186 PULLS OTHER FINISHING ACCESSORIES Adjustable bracket comes in any width from 4" to 1r. Grab Br-a hand grip usually installed in a shower, which may be used for steadying are self. Self Bracket - any over hanging member projecting from a wall or other body to support a weight. M ~ t s l brckst-used to support any cabinet or shelf. Spring Door Clo6w-attached above a screoo door to automatically close it. HOOk_S AND EYES Hospital Arm Pull-a handle for opening a hospital door without the use of. hands, by hooking an arm over the handle. Psnic Exit Device -Fire exit bolt a door locking device used on exit doors; the door latch releases when a bar, across the inside of the door is pushed. {Convenient for use in hospit.al theatres, Hotels, Schools, with fire exits. Eye Bolt - a. bott having its head in the form of a loop or eye. 187 co,bination Hook and Eye -Used for putting in place, a door or a window. Concrete Insert-a plastic, wood fiber, or metal usually' leads either built in a

 wan or ceiling or inserted by drilling, used as an anchor or support to hold attached DOOR STOPPERS OR 'UMPERS ROLLER GTOP / -fla""J rubber I '--Hook Bolt - a bolt having one end in the form of a hook. diameter 1/4" to 2" lengths 1" io 4" Threaded Rod - all thread from 2, 3, 6, and 12 feet long (0.60, 0.90, 1.80, 3.60) 1/4N to diameter. Door Stopper-to prevent the door its lockset from harming the wall or ti les ; 188 CHAPTER PLUMBING MATERIALS . 190 CAST IRON PIPES .AND FITTINGS ,----zt-fl ' .. . . .. ,, ., t . ,..----"""---t.: AND DOUQLE COMBINATION Ye SEND AND OOU9L..E UPRIGHT WYI= SNGLE AND DOUBLE \NVSRTED )lND DOUBU: 11 "1"1::5 4''x '1." ICE (-'ANfTAR'() 4"X4'' \ 451> . (.10 X lJ!5) 1? "tAPPE=D 1EE ,, ,, 2. X 2. "f!' ,. 4'j(4( 1 z')( l' .11,: X z'' .,-,:e TEE (TAPPED)

TEE

(TAPPED) z'x2" LEA() FeRRULE 191 GT"RAINER ( NICKLE PLATED ) (BRAS<;) ( &TE::.eL) DRUM 'TRAP RUNNING ll<AP 192 C'i<ON t"OOI FtTTINGE; LEAD '' P'' TRAP P ,. I RAP RUNNING !RAP DOUBLE VENT . '5'' TRAP WITH VENT TYPES OF CA<;T IRON PIPE [II ~ ~ J STANCl'\RD PIPE = h . DOUBLE HUB Ill ~ u b 4.SOM 0 ] SINGLE HUB [ I H UBLEGS PlPE 193 194 "' SPECIAL CAST IRON ( SEWs:< ) . l f DOUBLE HUB P-ll<AP W/CRWJTHOUT VENT<; AND CLEAN OUT<; REOUCING Q.IORT T LONG TEE W'f'l: RE:DUC.ING +S 0 Y REDUCING LONG Y PLASTIC. PIPES AND FITTINGS ( DRAINAGt::)

8.7.5 ( IS<30 OOOBLE gNGLE eRANQ1 e15 tJ 1:E= e1. 5 TSE P TRAP W/ pu.JG . ?/' REDUCER OIAMETERc; - 50, 75 . TEE 110111tt1

x 2''

1111 11 ,.. -:7 !'X 1 ;-q.. z''x 1 LENGTHS - 2.00M . .aHJ CI...E;AN OUT Q=' FITTINGs; IN t11n1 ) so ( ... J . 75 ( -5' 110 (+'') COLOR COOING wat.llr - bl . -c::r-2k1ge or Jlfitt q;-3j ll1dt.Jc;tnal gray car1 muntc.atoo c.able - '#JloN ' 195 PIPE AND TEE SANITARY CAOS$ TEE CROSS TEE 75fJ ELBOW WYE . 8:J 0 ELBOW . RUNNING P-TRAP :30E'L90W 196 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES ( <S 'eWER ~ ~ T E M ) ~ L A N T .. CUT L- CUT CURVE TEE BRANCH RUNNING "'TRAP OFFsPET TEE BRANCH . 197 ' GAlE V A L V E . ~ 198 . GALVANIZED STEEL PIPS FITTINGS HOT AND COLD WATER Dlf.;fRIBUTJON SOCKET REOUClN6 TEE

:' 0 COUPLING REOUClNG ELBOW TeE UN\ON PUJ6 CAP 199 l l _ ~ l llll RETURN SI=ND FLOOR FLANGE SXTENgON PIECE 200 . PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS I=) COUPLIN6 ADAPTER POLYTHYLENE FITTINGS 90El...BOrV POLYviNYL GHLORIOE ATTINGS (p.y.c.) ADAPTER POLYBUTYLENE S:ITTINGc; ( P.B) ~ T R A I G M T COUPLING 90 E.LBOW 201 COPPER PIPE FrrTINGS R'R WATER , HOT WATER 6PhSOT .JOINT <:.OPPER TO GAL.V.ANJZED STEEL FLARED TEE TO THReADED FITTING SLIP k NUT 202 FLARED OR a:>MPRESSia-J COPPER lOGAL.VANIZEO s;TEEL FL.ARE.D FITTING WATER CLOSET VIC.TORIA FREE PF ZJXJ0 WATERCLQ6ET illr RXpmavA mamr izHIJrl fatotL# t01Jet

GYLVANA WA.TER CLOQ;i for . .203 CARMeLA flu91 valve PF 3531-FV bottom Dt>wl. fmLtffimon !o!:by

FERNDALE PF f?Jr : ORIENTAL.

Wli1? nm. Wrfh

BOWL PF 3446 V N.OtJOmlt.aJ fftp fur .a saf.er footk&

low 6%t aHt:J rur2J] ha7Jt1'j - publu: OJ AMANTE PF 3'130 ;a oowr ihat. pwvltks a prat"hc.al mart; of t;amt.atJon. fa-: - rural ar;ea low Cb;f-. todm 205 LAVATORIES SABRINA LAVATORY PF 1005 206 hung l.avatry wrth rAar otJTftow a1J and lt1tAg"al d11t1a for ram VENTURA . PF 100Z lava-tz:ry WJih r.ear OJBrflcw aid for low #:.

DIANA LAVATORY PF Javztvry WJth rs-OJJr flow aid at7t"1H -fur aJN'TESSA PF 5105 nm a1A todot LAVATORYPF 1<X\91t19 w11i1 fum overflow hotBI lttby 207 _URJNAL 208 ADMIRAL P F w.all hl11g wa4lrut unrtal wrf11 9MJ/Js auf Jnt.fgral flu91 r,et.ommPnJE.d for : . mBn $ -?u,t.abJ.e for_ hots COMMODORE. PF G6CXJ wallhung urrna/ vv1th . flu<;rung nrn ahd 111tB;T.al tr.ap. 5Utt for attd offrtpt;

60APANO SPONGE HOLDER SOAP HbLOER P A P E ~ HOLDER 5HOWER HEAD TONEL RAIL 209 . CHAPTER - ELECTRICAL MATERIALS TYPES OF C.ONVENIENCE 2.. POLE - Z WIRE e@e. .f-RJLE -3WlRE 1'YPE5 OF SWITCHES FL.U<;H MOUNTE.O TRIPLEX DUPLE>< CUTDOOR WEATHER PROOF RECEPTACLE 0 OD 8 1 0 J GANG Z GANG 0 @ 0 4-GANG 0 @ 0 SWtrQ-1 W/ Pl LOT LIGHT pusH 8UTT0tJ PUSH SWITQ-f ll.JM8L$R c:;WITCH 212 JUNCTION BOXES XTAGON BOX CSGUAJC?E l:.EILING OUTLET 90X c.JRCULAR BUGHING VARIOUS .OF PORCELAIN INSULATORS J:'ORCELAIN TUBE KNOB c;R?OL INSULATOI< 213 ' . . . 214 LAMP

! . : ' .

1'1'l:?E:. <:;OGKEI SYl'/IEk'L GElLING OUTLET RU88ER WATSRPI<OOF <;OGK.Er.;. FOR CUTI;IDE PENDANT iYPE <;a.kET CIRCULAR LOON\ u aif r; ==ijJ ~ ~ ~ ~ ELECTI<ICAL TAPE. TYPE<; C)F CONDUIT FITTING<; 215 c; FLE.X'\9LE LLIMS (NOll MET.ALU(.) FLEX18LE GTEEL CCNOOT 216 u:AD BOX C.LIP "TYPE MOULDING OR

RACf:WAY . FLEX'IBLE DUPLEX WIRE:. 6 A p PS R F c. BULB .. TYPE MINIATURE LAMPS 217. INPIRECI'" LIGHi DIRECT LIGHt Dli<ELT ( . } ( ) GEN. DIFFUQ: JNDIFZEC.T ( ) GEN. CLAS51FJCA110N OF 60 WATT<; THREE:.- tOO WATT<; -iOOW16 . THREE 40 THREE 40 218 . 100 Z.OWTG.

, .. FOUR 30WATT fi..UORESO:NT TWO 40 WAIT 40 100W1.; . 40 WATTs. 75-W WAI"t?; LAMP UGED IN THREE 219 cHAPTER .. 222 FLOORING MATERIALS FLOORING MATERIALS The final wearing surface which is applied over the subfloor. Factors in Choosing Materials a. Type of building involved - residential , industrial or commercial. b. Type of usage to which the floor will be subjected- Light foottraffi c, heavy foot traffic wheeled traffic. c. Special requirements-sound absorption qualities, resilience, color, sm oothness resistance to chemicals, resistance to abrasion, or ease of maintenance. d. Cost- includes both labor and material. . = -1 _ ___, w c..apaoty of a 1 ongnal <S"tZI! an.d . dBformat 1011 1. WOOD FLOORING -made both in softwood and hardwood. SOFTWOOD (PINE) a. Strip Flooring -standard strip is used for residences, offices and sch ools, heavy strip is for industrial uses, bowling alleys and dance floors. tor19u.e znd gf(X)vB locJtM th.a LRrltBr STANDARD grcov60 for HEAVY HARDWOOD {NARRA, TANGUILE, YACAL} This material is Kiln dried and made with tongue-and groove edgeS and ends and u sually has a channeled or grooved bottom surface. The purpose of the single or doub le channel or groove is to equalize moisture absorption and reduce cupping, thickness is from

3/8 up to 1 11/16 in. width is from 1 1/2, 1 3/4, 2, 2 1/4, 2 1/2, 2 3/4, 3 1/4 in. ::- I J Strip flooring is also available in what is known as colonial plank, strips of various widths with round inserts of some contrasting wood. Usual thickness is 25/ 32 in. Widths trom 3 to 8 in. Edges are tongue-and-grooved and the ends are grooved with splin es supplied. [ b. Parquet Flooring-(Wood Tile) Consist of blocks or fillets of hardwood of va rious sizes which can be laid in any number. of patterns such as herringbon e basket weave, and squares, common thicknessis 25/32 in. and dimensions are 2 1/4 X 1 3/4 in 9, 11 1/4, 13 1/2, 15 3/4 and 18 in.; or 18 x 18 or 12 in. x 12 in. S mall fillets of about 3/8" thick by 9/10" width by 41i41ength are assembled into blocks usually 18"' with 16 squares of 3, 4, 5 or 6 fillets each, with a gummed paper backing which ill later removed upon installation. Parquet glue used for this flooring are th e brands of stickwell. 1 1e:' J GLOVER OESlGN .. 18''--RANDOM OftSIGN 223 STAR DIAMOND c. Block Flooring-Floor blocks are individual pieces of wood with edge-grain fa ce made in a number of sizes a common one is 2 x 2 x 31/2'in. and laid down in mast ic. 2. CONCRETE FLOORING ~ gran blot.k m25""tlL Concrete floors are done in the best of workmanship and materials since they are subjected to every kind of wear and abuse, such as impact, abrasion, attack by salt s and aggressive liquids. It is the aggregate which lies at the surface of the floor th at absorbs abrasion and impact, and must withstand the wear and the tear of traffic. a. Floors may be poured as single monolithic slabs or they may be composed of a base slab covered by a topping. The base slab must be well roughened surface to provi de a good bonding surface for the topping mix. b. A particularly hard surface can be achieved by introducing metallic aggrega tes into the topping. These consist of especially processed, size-graded iron particles, with ofte.n a cement dispersal agent added. Metallic aggregates are normally applied to

the freshly ptiured surface as shake worked into the top by float and trowel. c. Metallic-aggregate topping can be finished to produce a non-skid surface, Finishing with a wooden or cork float produces a surface as shown in the illust ration. Nonskid surfaces can also be produced by using aggregate such as aluminum oxide and silicon carbide in the floor topping. This is also done i n stair treads. f?WL -aGt non LOI1Ll"Et.e fioor tili! e"x 8" non d. Colored concrete floor'S are produced by adding some type of inorganic c oloring agent to the topping mix or by shaking it over the surface and floating it into the top. One type of coloring agent consist of mineral oxides in powder form. The mi x is 10 lb. or less per bag cement. US.EO DRIVEWAYS 225 226 Cobalt oxide produces Blue color. Brown oxide of iron Brown color. Synthetic yellow oxide of iron produces Buffs. Chromium oxide produces Green Red oxide of iron produces Reds Black iron axide produces Grays and Blacks Another coloring agent consist of a fine grade of silica aggregate synthetic inorganic pigment, and a water reducing agent thoroughly mixed together. This is a pplied as a shake over the freshly finished floor top at the rate of 1/ 2 lb. s quare foot and floated into the surface. Final troweling produces as smooth surface Metallic aggregates are produced which have a coloring agent added. It i s a synthetic, inorganic metallic oxide, and produces a nonsparking floor. e. Concrete is also used to make Floor tile (Cement Tile) by forcing the conc rete into molds by hydraulic pressure and by allowing it to set and cure. Sometimes til e are made in two layers, the upper one being made of mortar with white cement and marble chips as aggregate. The upper layer can also be made of colored m ortar . After curing, the tiles are surface-ground to produce a smooth f inish. p211t1 color -1''i11Jtk Py 8"X8'' or 1Z 1 X1Z'' 3. CLAYTILE FLOORING Clay tile are made by a process similar to manufacturing trick. Tiles ar e made into either: a. Glazed Tile-a Tile composed of ceramic materials fused into the body of the Tile. The body may be nonvitreous, semivitreous or impervious, and either white or colored. tVITREOUS)-descriptive of that degree of vitrification evidenced by low water a

b sorption; generally signifies less than 0.3 percent absorption except for floor and wall tiles for which it signifies less than 3.0 percent absorption .. b. Unglazed Tile -a hard, dense ceramic Tile for floor or of homogenous composition throughout, deriving its color and texture, from the materials of which the body is made and from the of manufacture. " 1 Example is the Vigan brick Tile 1" x 12" x 12" or 16" x 16" _ VITRIFIED TILES Manufactured by Pioneer Ceramics, Inc. Advantages: a. almost diamond hard, no chipping, no cracking or peeling. b. Slip resistant (Matte Finished) c. through and true colors (No wearing out) d. completely waterproofed ,won't absorb moisture, warp or curl} Grades: Class A - These are tiles specially selected from the regular production run for their superior quality. (no imperfections beyond 1/64"1 Mil/run - These are tiles from the regular production run. (imperfection s between 1/32"1 Sizes: Tile No. 001 00 0 1 2 Products: 1. Vitrified Floor Tiles Basic size 41/4" X 41/4" 4 1/4" X 4 1/4" 4 1/4"' X 41/4" 4 1/ 4" X 4 1/ 4" 4 1/ 4" X 41/ 4" Actual dimension Greater by 1/16" Greater by 1 / ~ " exact size Smaller by 1/ 32" Smaller by 1 / 16" a. White Milltun 108 mm x 108 mm (1/4" x 4 1/4" x 4 1/4") b. Porphery Colors Millrun yellow, blue, green, brown. c. Matte-Semi glazed tiles, white d. Matte-Semi glazed, color e. Round-white and color 2. Grande Series (Dark Red) a. Hexagonal 10" 0 b. Octagonal 10" 0 227 c. Diamond 8'" 0

d . . 6 X 12'' 1 t e. 6" x 6" 0 f. 8" X 12" D 3. Semi-Vitffled (Kitchen; Terraces, Din. BR) a. Patio - 2 1/2" x 8" 63.5 mm x 203.2 mm g. a x 8" D h. 4,.x8"'x3/8" 0 101.6 mm x 203.3 mm x 9.53 mm i. 4 1/ 4" X 4 1/4" [ 1 b. Romana-3/8" x 4 x 6 .. 101.6mmx 152.4mm c. Morena-41/ 4" x 41/4" { 1 ~ m m x 108mm) 4. Quarry Tiles (Unglued) a. Patio-2 1 /2" x 8" x 5/16" [ 1 163.5 mm x 203.2 mm x7.9 mm) b. Padana -2 1/ 2" x 8" x 5/ 16 .. c. Chisel-5/16 .. x 8" x 2 1/2 (63.5 mm x 203.2 mm x 7.9 mm) d. Roman e. Morena 228 BRICKS Floor bricks size 5 em x 10 em x 21.3 em I I i""""= F='; . 229 be.d&ng QtB$ 230 .. . tnldular a1 tAus 11ntlll 1 ...._ -uri1t pme-n J beLiding fJLA.s .;::::: Ip.. .. = 1-

II Ll II PRODUCTS OF MARIWASA . a. Matt Floor Tiles II If II 4 1/ 4 x 4 1/4 (108 mm x 108 mm) White and colored Millrun-more expensive . ECO-cheaper 6" x 6" (152 mm x 152 mm) white and colored turning 2 LOrtU?I; w. itJ f.ate> l 231 b. Vitrified Floor Tiles 4" X 8" (1{)() X 200 X 9.5 mm) 1. White splashing (white) millrun Non,,Skid (white) millrun Earthone (white} millrun 2. Colored splashing Brown carpet Nuvolato a -Series Earthtone Non-Skid regular colors splashing blue 3. Seliniums red red-orange c. Vitrified Floor 'tiles 8" x 12" {20() x 300 x. 9.5 mm) same series as above d. Matt Floor Tiles 6" X 12,. 4. ASPHALT FLOORING Two types of flooring using asphalt as basic ingredients are: (screed)- a long narrow strip of a. ASPHAlt MASTIC FLOORING-Made by plaster applied .at intervals on a mixing an emulsified asphalt with portland cesurface to be plastered, carefully ment, sand and gravel, or crushed stone to form a leveled and trued to act as a plastic mixture. !his is spread over the floor guide for plastering to the speci - screeded, compacted, and floated to a de pth of tied thickness. 1/2 in. 232 The mix is usually made in this proportion, 1 bag portland cement or { 1 cu. ft .) is to 2 cu. ft. ( 12 1 I 2 gal.) emulsified asphalt, 2 cu. ft. clean sharp sand, and 4 cu. ft. hard washed gravel chips.

This asphaltic types of mastic flooring can be applied over a wood, concrete, or steel base. In each case the base must be primed with the propet type of asphaltic primer. In addition, a tack coet of asphalt emulsion should be applied over . the primer, in the case of a wood base. Asphalt planks can also be made which is precasted and formed in molds. They are laid on a solid level base and cemented down with an asphaltic bonding preparation. 5. TERRAZZO FLOORING b. ASPHAlTIC TilES-are COI!lPOSed ot asbestos fibers bound together by a blend of selected asphaltic binders. Pigments are added for color and in some cases polysterene plastic is added to produce a stonger tile. The ingredients are machinemixed and formed into sheet of i/8 or 3/16 in. thick under pressure. The sheet are then cut into tiles of 9 x 9, 12 x 12 in., and 18 x 24 in. Floor Patterns are done due to unlimited colors and designs. Asphalt tile can be laid over a wood, asphaltic mastic, or concrete base using an asphaltic adhesive. The surface must be smooth and even, those tiles are highly resistant to water but not to organic acids or petroleum solvents not preferable for industrial use. Marble aggregate concrete that is cast in place or precast and ground smooth, us ed as a decorative flooring. A base slab is poured first, reinforced with wire mesh to reduce shrinkage and ment.of cracks. Next, a layer of cement and sand, mixed very dry, is spread ov er the base, worked Flat, and compacted. This forms a cushion on which the terrazzo i s placed. A grid-work, consisting of thin strips of brass, bronze aluminum or plastic, is laid on the sand-cement cushion, bedded in and leveled. Standing approximately 1 in . above the cushion. The topping mix, consisting of cement, sand and marble chips or an abrassive mat erial as coarse aggregate is made up. It is mixed dry as is practical for placi ng. This topping is spread over the floor and compacted until it is level with the top of the grid s trips. After the topping has cured sufficiently, the surface is ground and polished by machin e. Terrazzo has a tendency to be slippery, so on ramps, elevator entrances, where n onslip surface is required, abrasive aggregates such as aluminum oxide should be used. By the use of white cement, colored pigments and carefully chosen marble chips of one or mo re colors, a great variety of effects can be produced. TERRAZZO SURFACE SECTION br.a>> 5'trip lerrAZZO tcp ma-t.Jr

233 234 . (Granolithic Concnite)-Suitable for use as a wearing surface finish to floors. M ade of cement mix with specially selected aggregate (granite chips) of suitable hardness, surface tex- ture and shape. 6. PLASTIC FLOORING Used in several types of flooring, including plastic Terrazzo plastic topping, v inyl -plastic tiles, vinyl asbestos t iles, and vinyl-cushioned Flooring. a. Plastic Terrazzo-an epoxy resin is used instead of portland cement paste as a binder for marble chips a mixture of a liquid epoxy reSin, inert filler pigment , and color pigment is used as the resin component. Formulation consist of 100 lb. of epoxy resin, 50 lb. of fine calcium silicate, 2 114 lb. of titanium dioxide; and 314 lb. of mineral pigment to this is added 10 lb. of a hardening and curing agent, an alip hatic polymine. In this a'fnount of binder, 450 lb. of small marble chips can be used. This plastic mixture is spread over the floor about 114 in. thick which weighs about 3 lb. per sq. ft. 1 I 4 in. thick. After hardening (one to two days aft er application) the topping can be ground smooth and polished. This type of topping can be applied over wood, concrete or old Terrazzo base. Mixes should be limited to abo ut 100 lb. total because the .plastic has a limited pot life, about 1 to 1 1 I 2 h ours at 75F. Metal grid Strips can be secured to the subfloor with an epoxy. resin adhesive. b. Epoxy resin, are used to produce floor toppings in a variety of c olors. The liquid resin, color pigment, and curing agent are mixed and spread over the sur face in thicknesses of 1/4 to 1/2 in. The material may be troweled smooth or left wit h a dimpled finish. c. Vinyl Tile- is made of a layer of vinyl plastic bonded to a flexible backing . Tiles are 6 x 9 in. and 9 x 9 in. thickness of 3/32, 118 and 81100 in. feature strips 1 x 36 in. and rolls 54, 46, and V in. wide are also made vinyl Tiles are laid in vinyl cement for con crete floors on grade, a special waterproof cement is used. Vinyl is highly resi stant to . fats, oils, most acids alkalies, and petroleum derivatives a wide range of co lors and designs available (This is resilient .., ) --== --d. Vinyl asbestos 1 Tiles are made a composition of thermoplastic vinyl and. plasticizer asbestos fibers, pigments and filler. These are mixed hot and form of into

sheets 1/16 or 1118 in. thick under pressure. Tiles 9 x 9in. and feature strips 1 or 2x 18 in. are cut from these sheets. The same general large of colors is found as in asphalt and vinyl This tile is lain in an asphaltic base cement, and is highl y resistant to grease, acids and alkalies. (This Tile is nonresilient it breaks but is ver y durable when finally laid ) \ e. Vinyl-cushioned flooring is composed of a thick sponge vinyl backing covered with a layer of closely woven fiber 'glass fabric to provide strength and stabilitY. Over, this is laid a layer of vinyl plastic imprinted color or colors desired, and finally a surface of clear vinyl is applied. These layers are bonded together by heat and result in a flexible flooring material of approximately 0.15 in. thick. This flooring is produced in rolls 54 and 72 in. wide and is laid in a special cement made of the purpose. Adjoining edges are joined with a special cement stri ng solvents should be used for cleaning and shellacs or lacquers should no t be apptied to the surface. - f. Vintl inlaid wear-layer constructions (exclusive armstrong brand process ca lled coraon}. The rolls are done in such a way that vinyl chips or cubes are inlaid, embedded and bonded together by clear vinyl mortar. In this process, the coior and desi gn of the wear layer go through the backing. A moisture-resistant hydrocord backing allows installation on any grade level. Thesefloorsare made up in rolls six feet wide and up to ninety feet long, wh.ch greatly reduces-the amount of Seams. Vinyl corlon floors be installed by eit her the P&rimiflor or perimiflor plus installation process which uses a special adhesi ve that chemicaliy welds the seams to provide a continuous monolithic surface. A small b ead of adheSive is forced into and up through the seam, providing a strong, tight b ond. The seams virtually disappear and are sealed against the penetration of moisture and dirt. This is accomplished without the use of special tools or heat thus reduCin g ir.stallation time cost. This eorlon vinyl sheet flooring is styled for high tr affic areas such as h0$pitals. Schools, commercial and shopping center interiors, lobbies, e tc .. --h&.king -dear Wl'yl rna-t.ar in 5 styles;- the seagate, montina, sandoval, brigantine and palestr a. 7. MAGNESITE FLOORING Made from calcined magnesium oxide and magnesium chloride. These material s are

mixed into a plastic state and applied to the floor in two separate coats, total ing 1/2 to 3/4 in. thick. A considerable quantity of fibrous filler is mixed with the f irst coat to give it strength and flexibility. The second coat has no ftber, but color pigment is m ixed with it to produce any color or colors required. Magnesite flooring is applied over either a wood or concrete base. Sometime s metal lath is laid over a wood base to produce a better bond. Marble chips may be adde d to the freshly poured surface and rolled in to produce magnesite terrazzo such flooring is quiet, resilient, non-slip and fireproof but not completely water resistant. 8. RUBBER FLOORING These come in the form of tiles. Synthetic rubber is used since it has less ten dency to oxidize than natural rubber. Pigments and plasticizers are mixed with the liqui d rubber and the mixture is rolled into sheets under pressure and cut into 6, 9 and 12 in. sq uares and 18 x 36 in. rectangles, in thicknesses of 3/32, 1/8 and 3/16 in. 235 236 Rubber tile is suitable for floors above grade and is latd in a rubber-base cement: It is very pliable and provides good resilience and relatively good sound absorption. 9. CORK FLOORING Cork-isused as a basic ingredient in two types of flooring. a. linoleum -linseed oil is used as the binder in the manufacture of linoleum. It is oxidized by air treatment until it becomes a tough plastic substance somewhat like rub ber. Powdered cork, resin gum, wood flour, and color pigments are then mixed with it and the resulting mixture is spread over a burlap backing and rolled into sheets. three grades are grade A - 3/ 32 in. grade AA - 1/8 in. grade AAA - 1/4 in. It is produced in rolls 6 ft. and as 9 x 9 in. linoleum tiles. Two types of roll linoleum are made: Plain -one single color Inlaid-made several colors which extend through the burlap linoleum can be laid on any wood Floors above grade and can be laid over sus pended concrete Floors, providing they are dry. Two types of linoleum cement abused. a. Plsin - for ordinary installation. b. Waterproof-for kitchens and bathrooms. linoleum and linoleum tile should be laid over a thick feet paper base, which ca n be bonded to the subfloor with the same .. b. Cork Tile -Made by mixing cork shavings with resin and compressing the plastic mixture into molds. Tiles are baked to set the resin. Two thicknesses of tile are

produced, 3/16 and S/ 16 in. sizes include 6, 9 and 12 in. squares and,6 x 1 2 in. and 12 x 24 in. rectangles. They are laid on Floors above grade in a special adhesive and rolled down with a heavy roller. The surface l?f sanded and given a coat of filler and final ly waxed. Cork Tile are warm quiet and resilient but as durable as other materials. They resist water but not oils and grease. Resilient Floorings- The group of flooring materials which includes asphalt, vi nyt, yinyl-asbestos, cork, rubber and linoleum (resilience_: The capacity of a materia l to recover its original size and shape after deformation) 10. PEBBLE WASHOUT Pea sized sandstones or pebbles either no. 5, no, 10 or no. 15 are mixed w ith cement mortar. This is spread on the surface with or without brass strips. Before the cement dries water is spread to remove the cement on the surface of the stone or by Rubbing s ponge to seep the water of excess cement. This is done until all the pebble stones are c learly exposed recommended for balconies, walks, stair ways where slippery floor is being av oided. 11. MARBLE This is a expensive flooring from Marble Stone Cut into one inch thick and sizes of .40 x .40, .30 x .60, .20 x .40 and other extra special sizes. Laid on the floor with white cement and when already set, a grinding machine is worked on the surface to smoothen .the face after waxing is applied. 12. CRAZY CUT MARBLE With granulithic: Odd shaped broken one inch thick mafbte is laid out on the floor with mortar. After which the spaces in between will be-filled with granulithic a mix ture of granite chips of white cement. When the setting has hardened the floor is smoothened by using a grinding machine then waxed. 237 . CHAPTER ' .. INTERIOR FINISHING MATERIALS 1. WOOD FINISHES For interior use, there are two basic groups: A. To cover walls and ceilings. a-1 Solid wood - Those in the form of boards which are 1/ 4, 3/8, 1 I 2 and .1 in. thickness and widths of from 2 to 12 in. and lengths 4 to 10ft. The face of the boards may be plain, saw-textured, V-grooved or channeled and edges may be square or tongu eand-groove. a-2 Wood sheets-Made from varietyof soft wood and hardwoods, kiln dried, and

edge-glued to form sheets which are usually 1 in. thick, 3ft. wide, and 8ft. lon g, in a variety of face patterns. Surfaces are sanded and sheets may be factory sealed and prefinished. a-3 Plywood- See building board chapter for different types. One way of attach ment to studdings is by leaving a f /4" inch space using edge of plywood or a 4 c.w. n ail to separate edges to give an effect of planking. PLAN . J B. Those used as trim materials around door and window openings, as baseboard, and as various decorative moldings. ~ DOORJAMB MULLION CASING HANDRAIL (: L) ~ t? w . . NQS;IN6 CASING COVE. c.ROWN '/. :-j (J D . . . : ROJND QUAQ"ft;R Ra.JNO BASEBOARD 2. GYPSUM FINISHERS (plaster) STIPPLED ~ D FIHlSH One of the best known types of intE!fior types of interior f inish produced by plaster in which gypsum is one of the basic ingredients. Plaster surfaces can be troweled smooth, stippled or sand - finished and can be applied over gypsum lath, metal lath, fiberboard plaster base, or directly over a masonry surface. In addition, acoustical plaster, involving the use of lightweight aggregate such as vermiculite or perlite, is used to produce a textured surface and to provide sound insulation. Gypsum board is also used as an interior finishing material. It is applied i n 'either a single or double layer, using 3/8 in. board for the double or laminated application. Joints and corners are taped and filled with joint fi ller, after which .th,e surface is sized. and painted. Gypsum board interior paneling is also produced with wood-grain printed surface. Such boards have beveled rather than recessed edges, so .that a V-groove is produced at joints. Colored nails or gypsum cement is used in applying the board to a wall surface. Square-edged gypsum board covered with a vinyl plastic fabric is also produced as an interior. finish, joints are usually covered with an alumin um,

plastic, or wood batten. 241 /' 2 I I .. .... > '' ! ... .... ' . . ' .. ' ; ,, I I . I I I I rt I :L. _sI 1; ' ' , # , f ' I J. I I I I f I , . " r ; ' . , ,. I I ______ ,,....- . c r-. 3. CLAY FINISHES (bricks and tiles) Clay products of all kinds can be used for interior finishing. They include comm on brick, face brick, glazed brick, structural"tile, gla{ed tile, ceramic veneer, ceramic wall tile, and ceramic mosaic. In addition, several imitation brick veneer products are made, using l ightweight aggregates, cement paste and artificial color. Common brick is usually used for interior work to 'produce a rustic or roughcast effect often emphasized with extruded mortar joints. t<?OI JOttrl 4" SO\...lO BRIC.K co111mon bnck us.M for wall ., , . ' 2 242 WALL PATTERNS: L I

[ [ r I .1 . :101 IOf 01 !Dr I 101 !01 :=JDI. 101 JOI IDC I IOL 101 : JOC FLEMISH BOND I II [ I DC [: If II I 1 n . n 1 ENGLIGH BQND .. I[ ]I } JC: II 1 II ILJ II J[ I II ]I J ll II J STACK BOND . PROJECTING BRICKS, GAPOEN WAI...L 243 244 GLAlED TILE -Ceramic tile having a fused impervious glazed surface finish (whi te or colored or with designs! composed of ceramic materials fused into the body o f the tile; the body may be nonvitreous, semivitreous, or impervious. Comes in sizes of 4 1/4"' X 4 1/4"' 2 1/2" X 6 1/2"' 6" X 6" 8 1/2'" X S 1/2'" Ceramic wall die in various sizes and s h a p e ~ are usually 3/8 in. thick is used in kitchens, bathrooms, washrooms, laboratories, for a feature wall, or as a dado or wainscot with ano- ther material covering the upper part' of the wall. Ceramic mosaic -small pieces of plain or cotored tile mounted on a paper of cloth netbacking-is used for similar purposes.

~ 0 B D Jl I I ( 1'1115 t.at1 bA us.cul for floorn-tq ) GLAZED TILE / _, .. .. , _,;:- -iCC. '. CAPPING 245 tl r'cc. - lt1tS"lor 0 EBBlm'tom b.Q2d GaPf'lt19 0 .. ITB- h1tbnar top res- . tt1tk1a- botttm Mati 0 ETB - EXtMor top bJ!U 4. STONE FINISHES This can be produced by using solid stone walls and exposing the interior as wel l as the exterior surface. The other method is to cover the interior surface with thin stone slabs, from 1 to 2 in. thick. The stone is applied over a backup wall of concrete, concrete block, b rick, ti le or hollow blocks and is held in place with some type of stone anchor. , GUT FINISH 246 ll II I ETI l ] [[ D l u I[ 10 DP I ID ra:JUlzJr CH 9 Bl..Q';K RANDOM FINIGH 5. CONCRETE FINISHES a. Plain concrete walls may be used by giving them specral treatment to mak e them as smooth as possible. This is done by rubbing down with abrasive stone or with an equipment called a sander, and filling the holes and pores with cement grout. b. Precast concrete sandwich panel-One face is finished for interior e

xposure. The face may be textured, patterned, or colored, or it may of exposed aggregate . ROPE c. Synthetic stone (adob.e, adobe with sheii)-Mixture of plaster cement with grounded adobe stones or sometimes with sea shells are plastered on a backup wall . After it has.hardened, the surface is chipped off with an axe or tomahawk to bring out the aggregates. d. Pebble washout finish - A mixture of plaster cement with selected pebbles, white or gray in color. Sizes are no. 5, no. 10 and no. 15. These are plastered on a backup wall , usually a hollow blockwal1 with brown coat. When the proper sizing up of wall has done, a spray of water is applied or in the absence of sprayer. a sponge is used, to eliminate excess cement plaster to ex-. pose the pebble stone aggregates. e. Sandblasting-The final finish is done by mixing plaster with colored cement or just plain cement. Thisis placed in a sandblasting contraption which can be made at the site. When the handle is turned, the plaster mix is blasted and forced to adhere to the concrete back up wall . 247 248 \ 6. BUILDING BOARDS a. Plywood 1/4H x 4' x 8' ordinary narra veneer bookmatched ribbon grained pre-finished. wood paneling already comes in color tones (Danarra brand) b. Hardboard-(lawanit brand) See building beard chapter for designs. c. Insulating fiberboard d. Chipboard e. Particle bbard f. Gypsum board g. Straw board h. Asbestos-cement board i. Corkboard j. Paperboard Wood slats or wood grilles- This comes in a form of panel screen and used as a w all paneling, ceiling, ventilation, movable room divider, etc. available in a fine selection of kiln dried philippine woods in standard and special design perforated panels. Widths are 2, 3 and 4 feet, height is 8 and 10 feet, thickness 1/2", 3/4 ... and 1 1/2 in . .J011.e by router 7. \NALL PAPER This is produced in a wide range of wood grain, fabric, stone, brick and mural p atterns. Wall papers are produced in single and double rolls 20 to 36 in. wide contain ing 36 sq. ft. per

single roll. Selvage edges 3/ 4 to 1 in. wide are removed from each end of a ro ll before hanging. To install with a perfect fit, an overlap of 1 in. or more is done and a vertical straight edge rs used to cut with a sharp blade. l 8. WALL COVERING The material comes in rolls of 1.00 m wide of either. a. Wall paper or b. Wall vinyl (washable) It also comes in plain, colors, prints wood grain . mural patterns, or with texture, and about a thousand different designs and colors, or even photograph and view effects. Method of laying: Mix wall covering paste (suggested brand is muty. lan) with water and when it is sticky, use a brush and spread on the back of the wall covering evenly then make or loose fold with about 1 inch excess on the ceiling, apply pressure on the meeting corner of the wall and ceiling with a squeegee and let the wall cover fall freely. 249 250 The walling must be a smoothened. cured, cemenJ plastered wall , or a well aligned plywood wall, (all nails and imperfections must be puttied). The walling must receive a thin coat of brushed wall covering paste. Immediately squeegee the wallcover from inside out and from top to bottom to spread and to SQueegee the paste evenly and remove air. When there is an air bubble, use a pin to punch a hole or inject with glue. When in place, repeat a second wallcover but this time, allow another inch o_f side overlap. Squeegee all over again and when satisfied, using a straight edge and a very sharp cutter, cut vertically at the center of the overlap and remove all excess while the paste is still quite wet then squeegee again the joint. --. BRUSH WAl..L PAPER ( ... ,, ) WALL VINYL W 04 Be careful that the design of the next piece must coincide with the first piece to insure continuity of material design. Always allow at least one inch excess on all vertical or horizontal corners and apply pressure at the corner and edges. Then remove excess with a sharp blade. ,, 1 ex.L./!SS NOT THIG 9. GLASS Glass is used for finishing inside rooms. For light -diffusing or light directi ng, glass blocks are used. For interior partitions, room dividers and screens, structural glass is u sed. Plate glass

mirrors and architectural glass with designs are used for interior decoration an d to produce special effects. Architectural glass comes in thickness of 1/16" or 3/32" and us ually 111/2" x 11 1/2" in. or 24" x 36" and in two types, clear glass mirror plain or black tinted. Glass tile or panels are available also as a type of wall finish. '--.....lo--.J e f h The architectural glass is attached to a backup plywood walling with a rugby glu e to form a pattern. This can also be used for ceilings. (The back portion of architectura l glass has a ctothlike material for the glue to attach quickly). 251. 252 J 10. STEEL Stael waH tile are made from thin-gauge sheet steel to. give them rigidi ty and coated with porcelain enamel in a full range of colors. Common sizes are 41/4 and 6 in. squares and 3 x 6 in. with cap, base, outsi de and inside corners, feature strips, and others. Special tile adheswes are used to secure tile to smooth surfaces. Stainless steel wall tile are produced in 4 1/4, 5, 6,. and 10 in. squares an d in 3 x 6 in. rectangles in a polished satin fini.sh. Corners, caps, etc. are available to co rresponding to field sizes. Galvanized sheet metal casing trim is frequently used in plac of wood casing arou nd door and window openings. jamb 11.: NON FERROUS METALS Aluminum, copper, and zinc are all used to make wall tiles. Copper tile are usu ally supplied with a burnished finish, while aluminum tile may be enameled or anodized. Zinc tile are chrome plated. Cove base and window and door frame trim, are made from aluminum and chrome. The se are trim moldings to cover exterior corners of walls or edges of window stool. 12. PLASTICS Plastic wall tile in 4 1/4 and 8 1/2 in. squares are maqe from polystyrene and urea formal dehyde re51ns in a range of colors. Theyare applied with special adhesives, and joints are pointed with special grout after the tile are in place. Plastic laminate wall panels in wood grain, stone and mottled finish or patt erns, as well as solid colors, are applied with contact adhesives or as a facing over plywood sheets. Special mouldings are used as panel dividers, edgings and corner trim. COVE

D I V l ~ I O N QIJTGIDE CDRNER Plastic wall fabrics and films of vinyl are used in much the same way as wall paper. Molded sheets of plastic reinforced with fiber glass which simulate brick and s tone may be used for either interior of exterior. Molded plastic acoustical tile, backed by fiber-glass wool, along with opaque pl astic ceiling tile for use with suspended ceiling systems. 253 ( \ 13. PAINTS Are used to cover unsightly surfaces, to provide decoration and to prevent absorption of moisture into the waU, to act as vapor barrier, and to provide a washable su rface. Three grades of paint are produced. a. Gloss - walls of kitchen, bathrooms, washrooms b. Semi-gloSs -other rooms c . .Rat - usually for ceilings. Two general groups of paint a. Paints that flow out under a brush or roller to produce a flat smooth surfa ce. b. Paints that are stiff enough that when applied by rollers, the surf ace produced is rough or stippled. This is called "Textured" paint. Apply roller with sufficient pressure to impress texture onto surface and roll in an upward motion. EXfERIOR WALLING MATERIALS There are three basic functions of walls. a. As load-bearing component of the structure. b. To protect the interior from the elements. c. To present an attractive exterior appearance. Types of walls 1. One made of a framework of studs and plates and having the upper-floor frame , the .. ceiling frame, and the roof frame attached to it. CAIt1!1 w.all .--+-+-ffa?r i.:..:.-:.-:...-:,..- ...... _L _-_ ..... If'---wall 2. A second type consists of a framewall of wooden or steel arches, rigid frame s or A frames, which constitutes both wall and roof framework. WALL ROOf: A- FRAMe WALL- ROOF ARCH 255 / 256 . . ... ... .. . ... 3. A soHd unit consisting of some type 9f masonry, hollowblock

wall or solid concrete wall . 4. A wall foond in large buildings, where skeleton of the building is made from heavy timbers, steel .or reinforced concrete. The wall materials fills in the spaces between those mem bers. This is called curtain wall Curtain Wall - A no11 bearing exterior wall between piers or columns, that is not supported by the beams or girders of a skeleton frame. NOTE-stud walls are normally covered first with some types of sheathing-bo ards, plywood, insulating fiberboard, or exterior gypsum board. This sheathing helps to g ive rigidity to the frame, provides one weather barrier and acts as a base over whict) water pro ofing paper and exterior finish are applied. Often this sheathing is covered with one or.two layers of building paper. Over t his is applied . the exterior finishing material. For this type of wall, it may be stucco, bric k veneer, artificial stone veneer, natural stone veneer, terra-cotta facing, wood siding, board s and battens, aluminum siding, plywood, insulating fiberboard siding, rolled siding, wood sh ingles, hardboard siding, asbestos cement siding and siding shingles. Kinds of exterior finishing material FRt=.J\ICH ANA'( 1. Stucco -a type of plaster made with portland cement which is applied to exterior surfaces to form a finish coating. Commonly used treatments on finish coat to produce textures are French trowel, Italian f inish, modern American, spatter dash, English cottage and travertine. Stucco can be applied directly to masonry walls, but over wood sheathing, some type of wire must be used to tie the sheathing and stucco together. BROOM Two types of wires can be used. E)(.PANDED METAL LATH ( HYP.IB) 6ASE OR SCRATCH C::.OAT . c: c " c: c i "i r c c .. c .. 4 c

c:

Stucco is applied in three coats, (or steps) a

base or coat, a second or brown coat, and a final finish coat. All three coats are composed of 1 volume of portland cement to 3 to 5 volumes of clean sharp sand, sometimes 1/ 4 volume of hydrated lime is added to increase plasticity. The scratch and brown coat should be applied about 3/8 in. thick, each coat kept moist for at least 48 hours. The finish coat should not be l.ess than 1/ 8 in. thick applied within seven days after application of the brown coat. rlNAL CCAT 257 2. Brick veneer- Brick veneering over a iight wood frame is done either by usin g regular brick taid up to produce as 4 in. thickness of veneer, or by :using thin slabs o f brick rna nufactured for the purpoSe. A regular 4 in. thickness brick is laid in two methods. One is to lay up the br ick over the sheathing, using metal ties nailed to the sheathing to hold the brick in place. The other is to cover the studs with paper-backed wire mesh apply a 1 in. thick layer of m ortar and set the brick with their backs in the mortar. 4-' hriGk . .. ,,. ar .. c;}JQ;;ft11f179 .. .-1 '' mt.ar . p.apAr l?.ul< .. IMtaf plaG+Ar When thin veneer slabs are used, they are set in a mortar base which is applied over a stucco wire backing. mortar 3. Artificial stone veneer-This is sometimes called cast stone, made by casting colored mortar into molds which turn out units having faces resembling roughhewn stone. The units are about 1 in. thick and made in various sizes such as2x Bin., 2x 16in., 4x 4in., 4x 8 in., 4x 16in., 8x 8 in. and 8 x 16 in. These units are set in a mortar bed which is applied over a stucco wire backing. 4. Natural stone veneer-Thin slabs of some natural stones such as sandstone, lime stone, riverstone, adobe, gray and black kermon stone, slate etc. with either re gular or irregular dimensions are laid up in a mortar bed in the same way as artificial stone or

brick. s:t ... AIE LIMe F= LAT KENNON OR A009E STONE ADOBE .C J FLAT , 5. Terra-Cotta Facing-Most commonly used. for buildings with light frame walls is known as vitrolite. It is made from china clay in thin s1abs.11/ 32, 7/ 16, 3/ 4 in. thick, Units are made in 4 to 24 in. squares and 8 x 12 in., 8 x 16 in., 12 x 16 in., and up to 30 x 36 in. rectangles. Common colors in elude white, black, red, tan, blue, green and gray. Asphaltic mastic is used to attach the vjtrolite units to external surfaces, leaving joints of approximately 1/ 16 in. These are later buttered with joint and painted. Direct contact with metal concrete, or other hard substances should be avoided. jatl1t 259 6. Wood Siding-!he common wood specie usect. for sidings are Tanguile, or pinew ood. This is manufactured either in T and G, S-CUT or RIZAL CUT. This types are either sun dried or kiln dried. S . -1" _. 4" 1"x8" 1"x12" x , , I G VCUT 260 t1r RUGTIC. 7. Boards and battens -When boards of various kinds, apitong, Tanguile, pine , rough- . sawed or planed are applied to a wall vertically with narrow strips of the same material nailed ovef the vertical joints. I I PLAN a. Aluminum siding - Some types consist of a single thickness of metal formed into the re.quired shape. \ C..URVr::;.D FACE: Otilef's have a rigid insulation backing. In addition, a baked on vinyl ename l is u_sed to produce siding a permanently colored surface in a wide range of colors. The thickness is from 0.02 to 0.025 in. th'ick. Siding is from 9 to 12 in. wide is se ctions, 12 feet long, while vertical panels are made J2 and 16 in. wide and 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12 , ft. long. ' I 9. Metat -made of pre-painted, baked-on zinc coated galvanized. iron used in curtainwall panels. Steel, stainless steel, ah.Jminum, galvanized iron, copper

and brass are .. metals commonly used. Colors are silver, champagne bronze, coppertone, brass . Gauge range from 0.19" to .040". Gauge no. 3.1 to gauge no. 24. Three types of colorgrip soandrel by metal forming corp. i f a ,... t:lte SPANDRI: L wtd . . h<1rizartal s-tw V4!?rtttal lt .o' em PLAIN GPANDRcL I SPANDREL 10. Plywood exterior finish- Marine plywood or waterproofed plywood are used ei ther in its full size of 4 Y.8 ft . (1.20 x 2.40 m .) with the long edges vertical and th e joints covered with batten. or it can be cut in strips and applied horizontally. r ' _I 11. Insulating fiberboard siding - This material is made fro.rn 1/ 2 in. wQ.Od fiberboard with one face covered with a heavy coating of asphalt. Finely crushed slate is embed ded in the asphalt in patterns imitating brick, stone and wood grain. The board is pro duced)n strips 8 to 16 in. wide and 24 to 96 in, long, with shiplap edges. 261 262 12. Wood shakes and shingles-Jhere are two ways in applying shingles o r shakes to sidewalls one is by single course' and the other one is double course. The maximum recommended exposure for 16 in. shingles on sidewalls is 7 1/2'". f or an 18 in. shingle. It is 81/2" in. and for a 24 in. shingle it is 111/2 in. for a s hake up to 32 in. it is 15 in. .GltfGLE. COURSeD 9De.WALL s.HINGJ...J:iC;; tx.>llSl..S -CQURQ:D 13. Hardboard iding-Tempered hardboard cut 12 and 16 in. stdps 4, 8, and 12ft. t ong is used as siding. Three methods of application are used. One consists of apply ing the strips in the same way that bevel siding is applied. Another method Is by usi ng a rab. beted wood strip at the bottom of each course to .accentuate the shadow

Jine. fn the third method, preformed metal a strips hold the siding in place and give a deep shadow line. These metal strips have .holes drilled in their bottom surface to provid e ventilation behind the board. hllrJ $ol.diH9 't'JOQ1 14. A1beato1-cement siding and siding lhinglea-Asbestos-cement-siding boards ar e made in stripe 12 in .,.vide, 481n. long, and 3/16 thick with a smooth face : and straight edges. The shingles are 12 x 24 in. with deep vertical wood-grain pattern on the face and a wavy bottom edge. Both siding and shingles are prepunched for application on 1 6 in. centers. Walls are'usually .Strapped on 12 in. centers ' and the sh.ingles are f astened with soft-headed nails, which will not crack the material; .,Asae;TOG a:MB'IIT .. Glbeetoe-Consists of a core of sheet steel which is first dipped in a bath of m oltenzinc. Immediately a layer of asbestos felt is applied under great pressure and is bonded to the zinc coat. The felt is then impregnated with asphalt, ctnd finally a to ugh, water proof colored coating is applied to both sides. Galbestos sheets are available i n widths of 3Cr and 33 in. in lengths up to 12 ft. 263 264 15. Curtain walls-Materials which are fastened to the frame and carry no structural loads themselves. The steel framewall and floor decks carry the load. Curtain walls are of masonry materials. Also wood, glass. concrete and steel. 16. Brick-The wall can be made of face brick over a backup wall of common br ick, clay tile or concrete block. bukup w/l 17. Tile, ceramic venettr and terra-cotta-Structural tile .and facing tiles are used in various ways in the construction of curtain walls. Structural tile is used as a bac kup wall for face brick, facing tile, stone ceramic veneer or ar(;hitectural terra cotta. Eight-inch through-wall glazed or textured structural tile can be used alone. ,, . 6 THROUGH-WALL T I L ~ Two kinds of ceramic venner are produced: a. Adhesion type -set on the wall in mortar bond only. Slab thickness is lim ited to a maximum of 1 1 I 4 in. and the face area, which is normally glazed with ceramic

colors is limited to 600 sq. in. ( W f.6lr.atn!L VBM.ei!r 'lz;' mort31 a>at 2J:lPI!lid to vt;HJu;.r 3J4' !bat 1 1z! co2t -h1gh nbbe.d b. Anchor type -- ceramic veneer is fastened to the backup wall by some type of metal anchor and supported at intervals by steel angles. Thicknesses vary from 1 1/ 2 to 3 in. and units are produced in maximum width of 24 in. and maximum length of 36 i n. 265. no Terra-Cotta is a term used to describe a material consisting of a burned clay body with some type of face, produced in slab form. There are two general types, ceramic veneer which is ffat slab and arqhitectural terra-cotta which usually has some sort of sculptured face. 266 18. Stone (marbla)-Stone facing can be used either over a backupwaU of mas onry or supported by a subframe of aluminum or steel. . . . . . . . v: : .. 0 ;, .- .... 19. Preca1t concrete slabs-Made up as curtain wall using both st andard and lightweight concrete. Blocks may have a smooth, plain concrete surface, plain co ncrete with textured surface, or an exposed aggregate surface. A layer of colored aggr egates and white cement is sometimes used on the surface of the panel to produce a terr azzolike finish . . Slabs may also be faced with ceramic veneer. 20. Washout finishes-Concrete walls may be finished With either pebble washout, glass washout, or even shell and granite washout. The mixture of mortar and pebbles either no. 5, no. 10, or no. 15 is mixed in no t too wet mixture, applied to the brown coat and when the mixture is troweled and not yet dry, a spray of water is applied to remove the excess cement and expose the stones. The same procedure is done with glass washout, however white or green or blue colored cem ent is used. -,:: . :. wall . biO'M1 w.a@!t 21. Synthetic adobe, brick -The final coat is cement plaster mixed with grounde d adobe stones, grounded brick waste, sometimes mixed with\pebbles and sea . . This is. then plastered to the wall from 3/4" to 1 1/4" thickness. When it ha

s hardened, a regular vertical chipping with an axe is done to expose the aggregate. Colored c ement is sometimes added for effect. 22. Sandblasting-The final finish is done by mixing plaster with colored ceme nt or just plain cement. This is placed in a sandblasting contraption which can be made at the site. When the handle is turned, the plaster mix is blasted and forced to adhere to t he con crete backup wall. w()()J 267 268 23. Bush-hammered finish-A plastered wall which is hammered from a spec ially designed hammer. Bush hammer-A hammer having a serrated face containing many pyramid-shaped points, used to dress a conCJete or stone surface; (manual or power driven). Finishes: Bush-hammered concrete - Concrete having an exposed aggregate finish; usually obtained with a power-operated bushhammer which rE'moves (by percussive cutting) the sand-cement matrix . about the aggregate particles to a depth ranging from 1 I 16 to 1/ 4 inch. (1.59 to 6.35 mm.) Bush-hammer finish-A stone or concrete surface dressed with a bush-hammer; used decoratively or to provide a roughened traction surface for treads, floors, and a pavements. 24. Glass -Glass is used in curtain wall construction in sheet, block an d tile form. Glass blocks are 4 in. thick and comes il') sizes of 6 x 6 in., 8 x 8 in. , 12 x 1 2 in., and 4 x 12 in. They are laid in mortar in stack bond. The entire panel must rest on a res ilient pad of some kind so that blocks do not come in contact with the structural frame. a>lum11 jamb pad biod: .. 25. Plastic - Plastic panels are produced in flat and corrugated sheets . and in sandwich panels. Many of the sheet type panels are made from fiber-glass-reinforced p olyester plastic. They may be clear, translucent, or colored. Used in factory build ings. 26. Logs-Comes from medium trunks of trees which is either half log or sl abs or full trunk. OTHEil STUCCO FINI5H ,A,N,.\"f

W&Hi GTE!:L-ll?OW!:Ll.ED) 269 270 PNEwx:t> FJ".hGH Bbwfd1 r;Nwood) bru91. 'Mfl1 AFPY ftntt od, 111.en iMA wald a' in;t;w.t li; paoJ) *tt 'IJ(XNd imtt an.d l.8ft1ent 'fin!Q1 wrU Ida wtcJ. : .. 0 . . . . . . ,. .. CEILING AND ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS 272 Besides providing an attractive overhead surface in a room or space, ceilings ma y also be required to: 1. Function as the primary sound-absorption surface in the room. 2. Contain most or all lighting fixtures. 3. Conceal utility services including plumbing, wiring, heating, and air co nditioning. 4. Provide outlets for heated and conditioned air. The most popular system for ceilings in commercial buildings is the suspend ed ceiling. ~ 1 ~ Gt. gaiVAnru..J W ! r ~ 1 . While residential buildings have ceilings generally fastened directly to the flo or joists or to a ceiling joists. Suspended ceilings c.onsist of a grid of metal track suspended from the structural ceiling with wires or cables, the grid openings of which are filled with ceiling panels, light fixture's or other utilities. The space created by lowering the ceiling in this manner is very useful, and is usually neces- . sary for concealir:lg utility services. Residential construction utilizes attics and crawling spaces for this purpose. The ceiling panels may be flat or shaped, and av ailable in a wide range of textures and patterns. Typical panels are 1/ 2 to 1 inch thick and (6() x 601 2 x 2 feet or 2' x 4' feet !0.60 x 1.20) panels for residential ceilings are usually fi::Jt, and are applied to plaster, drywall, or wood furring strips. It is to be remembered tl')at the materials to be used for eaves or outside ceil ings must be of waterproofed plywood, tempered hardboard (Lawanit) flat asbestos sheet, kiln d ried wood. Sometimes the cardboard material egg container is used for decorative ceiling a nd acoust ical material. .. Other material used in suspended ceilings are light diffusers of solid plastic , flat or moulded, open grid or honeycombed design, or of metal AC louver and stainless steel for ceiling of banqt.:et halls, lobbies, department stores and screens for shops and restaur ants. One of the most important materials used for c.eiHng panels is:

1. Mineral fiber -a generic term adopted to cover several mineral based materials used for similar purposes, including asbestos, perlite, vermiculite, and other less common materials. For ceiling panels, mineral fiber with the addition of a binde r may be molded, pressed, or compacted to whatever density is desired, from a soft abs orbent panel to a hard rock-like surface. One of the more common panels, once cal led asbestos-cement board, utilizes portland cement as a binder. T',e face of mineral fiber panels may be left natural, painted, or covered with a variety of material s from plastic to aluminum. Mineral fiber products are.noncombustible, and thus e njoy a very good fire rating. 2. Fiberglass- another popuiar material for ceiling panels. Most fiberglass are flat, and the face side is typically covered with vinyl -paper, or aluminum. These may b e obtained with a variety of textures and surfaces. 3 .. Metal wall and ceiling panels are generally perforated for acoustical perf ormance, and are often backed with fiberglass batts to improve both insulation and acou stic qualities. Metal panel may be narrow planklike pieces about four inches wide. Stainless Steei - (Tajima AC louver and S.S. Bishop II). A ready made metal lo uver with a wide range of uses, it is light, durable, high precision and non-flam mable. For banquet halls., hotels, lobby ceilings, department stores, grilles and screens for restaurants and shops. 273 274 ,, \\ II. t.l. "' \. \. \\. . \\ II. '\\. " 11. \\ ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS II /L /1 N N H 1/ Jl II fL /./H ff IL ,, When sound waves strike a surface such as walls or ceilings, they are reflected and the reflected sound, as well as the original. is heard by a listener, resulting .in an increase in sound intensity. While a sound source is operating, a room become.s filled with ref lected sound waves and when the source is stopped, then r'flected waves continue to travel back and forth between room surfaces. As a listener picks up these reflected waves, he he ars them as the original sound being prolonged and finalty becoming inaudible as the refle cted waves gradually lose their energy by absorption. This prolongation of sound is called reverberation. Control of increased intensity and of excessive reverberation are two of the m

ajor problema of sound engineering. Along with them are the problems of control of unwanted so und an.d of transmission of sound from room to room through walls, floors and ceiling s. A large part of acoustical correction deals with the improvement of hearing con ditions and the reduction of unwanted noise in rooms by reducing the energy of refleeted sou nd. This is done mainly by the use of acoustical materials. Materials which have a substant ially greater ability to absorb sound than such conventional ones as wood, gins, hard plast er, or con crete. Tlie percentage of the energy absorbed by a material when a sound wave is reflect ed from, it is called the sound absorption coefficient, or acous1ical absorptivity. This abs orption coeffi 4 cient depends on the nature of the material, the frequency of the sound, and t he angle at which the snUnd wave strikes the material. When comparing materials to be used f or the im- provement of hearing conditions, it is common practice to use the coefficient at ~ h e frequency of 512 cycles. In comparing materials for noise-quieting applications, the n oise reduction coefficient (N.R.C.I which is the average coefficient for the four frequencies of 256, 512, 1,024 and 2,048 cycles is generally used. Most acoustical materials can be classified in groups: 1. ACOUSTICAL TILES These are made from wood. cane, or asbestos fibers, matted and bonded into s heets of various thicknesses, ranging from 3/ 16 to 1 1/ 4 in: The s h e e ~ are cut int o tiles of several Size,' ;ncluding 12 x 12 in., 12 x 24 in., 16 x 16 in., 16 x 32 in., Z4 x 2_, i n., 24 x 28 in. Edges nay be square cut, beve4ed or tongue and grooved. . . . . . These tiles are intended primarily for ceiling applications, they can be appl ied to solid sur faces with adhesives, nailed to furring strips attached to a ceiling frame or t he underside of a solid deck, or installed in a suspended ceiling frame .. GL.UEO aR SU$PENDED A great variety of designs, colors and patterns are available. The acoustic open ings in the surface of the tile in themselves provide many different designs. The ope nings may be holes drilled in uniform or random patterns or a combination of large drilled ho les and tiny punched ones. 0 0 0 0 0 .. 0 0 0 .. 0 .. 0 " .. REGULAR t:J:liLLEO . . . . :

o . _o : C) # :. It C> -. C! o .. . " . ... - . o. . . . . .. . .. 0 .. ". 0 R1NOCN DRILLED The openings may be slots, striations, or fissures, or the surface of the tile m ay be sculp tured in various patterns, with a factory painted surface so that it does not r equire paint ing after installation . . r ... ": . \ .. . , .. \ .. , .... ' .. : _ ... . . i ' . . \ ... "\ . . ' .. . . .. f .. \. . . . \ . ''-'. ... . . . ..t ' .. '. ' ... . ..;... .......... . STRIATeD The noise reduction coefficient of tiles of this type is about 0. 70 with some v ariations, depending on the particular material, the thickness of the tile, and the kind of p attern used. Asbestos-fiber tiles 12 x 12 x 3/4 in. weigh approximately 1 1/41b.; wood or cane fiber tiles are slightly lighter. 275' 276 2. ASS.EMBLED UNITS Consists of some type of sound absorbing material such as a rock-wool or fib er-glass blanket fastened to an 'acoustically transparent facing. This facing is generall y some type of rigid board, such as hardboard or asbestos board, or a metal sheet. T he facings are perforated to allow the penetration of sound waves. Such acoustical panels can be fastened to a wall over a frame work of f urring strips or suspended in front of the wall by some mechanical means. . HbBrgla's 3 . . SPRAYED-ON ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS There are two types of material used in this sound control application. a. One type consisting of plaster made with vermiculite or perlite aggre gate. Vermiculite acoustical plaster is generally a premixed product, requiring only t he addition of approximately 10 gal. of water per bag of mix. if applied by hand, two c

oats is applied, 3/8 in. thick for the first and 1/8 in. for the finish coat. If applied by machine, two, three or four thin coats are applied so that the to tal thickness of plaster will be at least 1/2 in. The noise reduction coefficient for 1'/ 2 in thick vermiculite acoustical plas ter applied by trowel is 0.65, a 1" thick is 0. 75. For machine-applied plaster 1/2 thic k the coefficient is 0.55. Perlite acoustical plaster is usually mixed on the job, using calcined gyp sum as the binder. lt can also be applied either by hand or machine. The main advantage of using machine spraying as a means of application is th at this method presents no difficulties in plastering over irregular surface. b. A coating of mineral fiber mixed with an adhesive. Acoustical treatment with mineral fiber involves the use of specially prepared m ineral wool or asbestos fi,.bers and an adhesive to hold them to the surface. The fibers are prepared and mixed with an inorganic binding material, which h elps to give them body, and packed in bags ready for application. The area to be covered is first primed with a thick coat of adhesive, and the fi ber is then sprayed over the surface in one or more coats, depending on the thicknes s required. For thickness of over 1 /2 in. at least two coats are used. Each coat is tamped to consolidate the fibers. The final surface can be sprayed with sealer or co oler. POPULAR BRANDS FOR SPRAYED ON MATERIALS 1. Sprllrt!JX - usually for hotels, offices and residences. 2. Umplt $pray-usually for theatres, convention halls, radio statior:ts. Transmission of sound through floors may be either of the im.pact or airborne type. 11"1pact insulation can be prevented by floating floors. . . .. Methods for _reducing impact t ransmission through wood-frame floors. 277 ' 78 . : . ... . : . ...... 4 CORK a . Acoustical board -a popular material is the corkboard. This is agglomerat ed cork from cork granules, toasted and mixed with special binders to form into a mass. The mass is compressed inside moulds and finally baked under controlled t emperature. Its characteristics are: a. efficient insulation b. great acoustic absorption c. light in weight, easy to install d. excellent decorative appearance e. a nay and rat proof

f . prevents condensation on walls and is moisture proof g. density of 6 to 9 Jbs. /cu. ft. h. coefficient of thermal conductivity 0.29 Btu/ sq.ft./h/deg/F/in. i. specific heat: 0.40 Btullb/deg/F SIZES: f / 2H X 12" X 36,. (.0125 X 0.30 X 0.90) lH X 12" X 36" (.025 X 0.30 X 0.90) r X 12" X 36" (.05 X 0.30 X 0.90) J " X 12" X 36" (0.075 X 0.3() X 0.90) Corkboard is installed by glueing (rugby) or nailing. b. Ceiling board-a popular brand is the 'WALCORK'. This is made from carefully selected natural cork on agglomerated cork backing, agglomerated serecte d cork granules or a combination of both. Walcork is both sound absorbing and heat insulating. Its natural texture and easy-blending colours make it always delightful ly pleasing to the eyes. Best for use in conference rooms, offices, churches, and cQncert halls. In residential homes, walcork is used f or living room, study room, dens, and bedrooms. Its characteristics are: a. decoratiVe b. sound absorbing c. heat insulating d. comes in a variety of patterns and colored de signs, e. durable and economical, requiring practically no maintenance. SIZES: available in sheets 2 mm. x 60 em. x 90 em. 3 fl1m. X 60 em. X 90 em. 4 mm. x 60 em. x 90 em. Walcork is instaUed by using impact adhesive or contact cement on smooth clear, dry surface from which all loose paint, grease, wax are removed. : ; ' . CEILINGS: Philippine wallboard corp. -lawanit Sarmiento industries -plywood Campos rueda -cork Stainless steel industries inc.-Tajima stainless steel 279 ROOF STYLES a. Common Tyjt8& SHEO WINGI=-0 GABLE EUTTERFLY 6ABLE WITH 5Ht=O 282 FLAi HIP OUTC.H HIP

.WITH DORMeR GABLE: WITH VALLEY C.LER E ~ T O R Y A- FRAME VAULTED PLEATED c.YUNDR1CAL PARABOLDIO HYPER80UC PARABOLOID coNOID DOME PYRAMID 283 : PtTCH a_lll a PITCH 4/5PITCH - s 58. , .. 5!. 45. . !9. 33..7. 2e.sr22 Ia:!* 14* gos -orr 16 ' '+ 24 P,.\RTS RUN -! ca/b "6124 OR 1/4 PITCH .. . SLOPE 12 12 ' 12 RUN TO I 'RISE " 4Jf' RuN TO 2 RISE= 9.4 l2 RUN TO 3 RISE= J4 RUN T04 RtSE = l&A = 22.,5 l2 RU" TO 8 Rl SE = 26 .sROOF GLOPES IN t. PITCHES AND. DEGREES 284 . . . ROOFING MATERIALS There are three components of a roof. 1r 1: Frame or skeleton 2. Rigid inner layer or skin which is fastened to the frame.,and supports the o uter layer or (only used for roofing materials that requires the roof to be waterproofed). 3. Exposed outer layer (roofing rnatenaO. W.P. rooftdA When the roof is flat , the material used to form the inner layer is ca lled a Decking. When the roof is sloped, the inner skin material is called the roof sheathing .

azmvz nu;;&,npnununnz Materials for roof deckings or sheathings may be boards, plywood, concret e, st eel , gypsum, rigid insulation boards, strawboards, or tile. The exposed outer, waterproof layer of the roof is known as the rQofing. Materials for roofing include shingles of all kinds, wooden shakes, clay roofing tile, cement roofing tile, slate, sheet metal, asbestos cement sheet roofing, asphalt roofing, glass and plastics. 1. SHINGLES (a roofing unit of wood, asphaltic material, slate, tile, concrete, asbestos cement or other material cut to stock lengths, widths and thickness; used as an ex terior co vering or sloping roofs and side walls; applied in an overlapping fashion . 285 286 Different kinds of shingles a. Wood shingles-Made from trees that are light when dry, has high cru shing strength, and slow growing trees which produce narrow rings. This in turn, result in a fine, evenly grained wood with uniform texture. Wood shingles are also made from large trees with few knots, so lhat shingles free should from blemishe s and distorted grains can be produced in large quantities. The tree should have a low coefficient of expansion and contraction due to changes in moisture conditions, so th at in changing. frorn a wet to an air-dry condition, the shingles are less l ikely to split or check. Carefully chosen logs are first sawed into 16, 18, or 24 in. lengths. EvefY'effo rt is made to produce blocks which have and edge-grain face upright, machines then saw these . blocks into shingles, graded. a_nd packed into bundles containing enough to cover 25 sq. ft. Shingles are packed green and .may be shipped green or stacked and air dried or kiln dried. No shingles is allowed to be wider than 14 in. or less than 3 in. standard lengt hs are 24, 18 and 16 in. , The amount that a roof shingles should be exposed to the weather depends o n the pitch of the roof and the length of shingle used. The maximum exposure on 1/ 8 and 1/6 pitches should be 3 3/4 in. For 16 in. shingles, 4 1/ 4 in. For 18 in. shin gles and 5 3/ 4 in. for 24in. shingles. For roofs with a pitch steeper than 1/6, the maxim um exposure for 16 in-shingles should be 5 in., for 18 in. shingles 5 1/2 i n, and for 24 -in. shingles 7 1/2 in. 1&"' b. Wood shskes -Shakes are used for the same purpose as shingles but are split

rather than sawed from the blocks. This produces a much rougher face than in the case with shingles. . Three types of shakes are made 1. Hand split and resawed- made bY cutting planks of proper thickness an d running them throught a bandsaw diagonally. -two 2. Taper split-Produced by hand-spliting. A shingle like ta!"ler is achieved by reversing the block end-for-end with each split. 287 3. Straight-split shakes-Similarly done as taper split exceptAh,at splitting is done from one end of the block only. . Hand split and resawed shakes comes in 18, 24 and 32 in. length with thicknesses of 1/2 to 3/ 4, 3/ 4 to l 1/ 4. The taper split comes in 24 . in. long from 1 /2 to 5/ 8 in. taper. Straight split shakes are made in 18 and 24 and 3/ 8 in. thick. c. Asplullt shingles - Made frrJITI heavy rag felt, saturated with asphalt and coated with high-rnelting point flexible asphalt. Ceramiccoated mineral granules are into the asphalt coating on the exposed face to provide. a fire-resistant surface . . A number of weights and styles of shingles are made, each in a variety of co .lors. The weights refer to the weight of the quantity of shingles re quired to cover 100 sq. ft. usually referred to as a square of shingles. This weight varies from 1351b. for light shingles to 325 lb. for .very heavy ones. Weights are varied by altering the thickness of the fe lt used, the amount of asphalt absorbed by the felt, the thickness of asphalt coating and the amount of mineral used on the surface. Roof slopes should be at least 4 in., 12 shingles. Broad-headed roofing nails or staples are used to fasten them down, and corners if exposed tabs should be cemented dow n with asphalt roofing gum to prevent damage by wind. SHINGLES STYLES: \ n } TWIN TAB 1.2 !10-2'-S /bG. g_;.TAB HeXAGON X 11 1'511:>. .INTE"RL-OCKING f10 lb. [ n n 1 TRIPL...E TAB 3'"X1Z"' 3-lAB HEXAGON 11 Y3" 1'-5 lb. INTERL.OC.KING 1b '' 1f5"- 1!>5/b .

Asphalt roof shingles are also manufactured with fiber glass self-sealing thermo plastic agent which when activated by the sun, actoaJly ft.ISeS the shingles_ togethe r to form a " one piece root" no costly cementing operations a ~ r e required. This shingle is firepro9f since the mat base is fiberglass and coated with high grade waterproof asphalt. This prevent rotting, curling and oxidation. This shingle also has a ceramic granu le surfacing and available in seven different colors. si:ze - 13 1/4 x 39 3/8" strips per square - 66 weight per square - 225 lbs. exposure - 5 5/SN head lap- 2" I r ~ - - - - - - ~ 9 ~ - - - - - - - - 1 lit'\A rnai'k ------------------1( d. Asbestos cement shingles-Made from a combination of asbestos fibers in po rtland cement paste. To this mix is added quantities of small colored ceramic granules to produce permanent colors. The material is rolled into sheets 5/ 32 in th iclc, often with a wood-grain textured surface. Sheets are cut into shingles of various siz es and shapes with nail holes predrilled. Because this type of shingle is hard and brit tle, heavy felt underlay is required and soft nails of copper or aiuminum should be used. Cutting is done with special shear. 3o"x 14" 289 e. Aluminum shingi'es.-Made from sheet aluminum approximately 0.020 in. thi ck in the form of a 9 in. square. They are folded on all edges with folds so that adjacent shingles will interlock. Starters are made by cutting a shingles as shown in the figure. Each shingles is fastened down with a sjngle nail. This type of shin gle may be used on roofs with a slope of 3 in 12 or steeper. They .are manufactured with a plain aluminum surface, with an finish, or with a baked-on vinyl-enamel fini sh in a variety of colors. 2. ROOFING TILE a. Terracotta - Because of jts weight, being a terra-cotta product, wood sheathi ng and strong well-braced roof frames are necessary. All of the styles of te rra cotta tiles should be laid over an asphalt felt base and are fastened with copper nails. El astic cement is use.d to caulk joints that are otherwise not watertight. Sometime co rrugated galvanized sheets are used for sheathing.

STYLES <.1r G-.f . n.all -1''lt't'' honztJttt.al b.attM .__ _ __ .I.;)'/. 91Mt lNOUlA ";------rN.rt '-------rr fl. 7JI 6. L rir .Jp tor 1.00 111 . A toRR. 61. SHEET SHEATHJNG 290 1 11 X4'' pJfflt] r-------1".x 2" honzontaJ b:att'n --- - --2." tJr G.r. r1Vi2TD.d -h/G.l . for evs-y 1-c.tl f1. r-::roof tde . ;;-c._ ___ purhn 6 -J. roof TILE ON SHEATHING r------ - - - --t'xf"l1orrwntal H:aJli)J ,-------rbaf w3fgprvofmg fAit or '\....-...,,.c;_ __ 1. 11 X 3'' purhn * tX 1}'1." . ROOF" TILE ON PL'fWOOD g..rE4THIN6 291 pur!IJ1S - ---- z"xs' raftAr FRENCH FLAT TOP ST.PNDARO 41 )( Z.5an SWISS SV\No-\RD ROOFING 1ll.J$ 292 Manufactured by ERA Industries Inc. distributed by Rivera Filipina, Inc. b. Concrete roofing tile-Similar to English tile but have a lug across t h8 underside about 3 in. from one end. They are laid without nails and rely on their weight to hold them in place. The first course is by a horizontal furring st rip. Each succeeding tile is supported by the one below. ttiR . . hoiJIHg sinp 1 11 X2" 1"EGULA 1' ytx13'' This type of roofing does not need any sheathing anymore and is laid direct on p urlins, if the slope is 25 or more or less than 25, sheathing is The first purlin near the Facia is one 1" bigger than all succeeding purlin

s. The succeeding tile is supported by the weight of the one above. lug slidJng t.''x4'' ftr>t pur:hrl . 'the '1.' x ?Jif purlll1$ 3. SHEET METAL PROOFING -Materials includl!, steel, stainless steel, cop per, lead, zinc, aluminum and galbestos. Joints are necessary between sheets to produce a w aterproof skin. Different types of fabricated joints. e. Flat seams are used when the roof is flat. b. Ribbed .seams are used with heavier metal for appearance or where expansion of the roofing material becomes a significant factor in the roof design. c. Roofs withe slope over 4 in 12 may have unsolderiKid standing seams. FLAT SEAM Rl885.0 OR BATTEN s;TANDING 293. 294 a. Steel -Steel strip is coated with zinc, tin, lead, or combinations of two of these to prodace steel roofing. DOWNSPCUT 2 . . ' X 3 ' ~ ZJ<4'' a-1 Gslwmized steel-Steel coated with zinc. Produced in corrugated sheet or in plain sheets. g.yuges -(thickness) the lower the number, 'the thi cker it is. gauge no. 16 and no. 18-for water tanks ' GA no. 20, 22-car bodies GA no. 24-gutters GA no. 26-standard for rooting GA no. 31 - for low cost housing inch thicknesses-0.063, 0.051 0.039, 0.033 0.027, 0.021, 0.012 lengths-6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12 feet -standard lengths -now up to 43 feet -long (long span) widths-32" (. 80) and 36H (901 wide ACCESSoRIES a ~ 2 .Long span roofing - either coated with 2 in. only - or colored, pre-painted This long Span colored roofing employs a double coating and double baking of zinc coated G.l. steel sheets by a special epoxy-acrylic. Anti-corrosion system as its primer coating and polyester as its finishing coat. The factory delivers this colored roofing from any size up to 60 feet . Advantage of using colored long span 1. Eliminate painting work and labor costs. 2. Maintenance-free roof with its anti corrosion system that lasts 5 times much lo"nger than ordinary manually painted sheets: 3. Long span panels up to 60 feet produce eave to ridge lengths which

require less fasteners and do away with wasteful end laps which are sources of leaks. 4. Stronger gauge because it is made of prime steel and the continuity of its length increases rigidity . .. 5. Different rooting sections available designed to withstand greater load . 6. Colored long span roofing can be roll formed, lock formed, deep drawn, punch ed or pressed without suffering from cracking or removal of coating. 7. Comes in weather-resistant colors of red, green beige white and blue. 8. This roofing is also applicable as sidings, ceilings, interior and exterior wall partitions, curtain wall element, shp counters, truck bodies, cabinets and kitchen hoods. DESIGN SECTIONS Courtesy of metal forming corp. brand (Goloroof). RIB GOOR. ( alurnmum ) i !---J i .eff.echve w!&th b wl.dth -zg - - - -------t 11 / --- anti-LapdJar"y v- BEAM maiB nb TWIN R 19 - - - r:..w. 295 ( t.Urh cu.e) U U SOLO U-BEAM ..._,I CORA (?." c.orr) . ( .30 II r=Y/. Z7. 75 s; frz:m LOOP bra1d- (Kok:P;pa-1) 1'RI""WA\fe 296 L cr.J11?fY corru!jdtRA ,( 11 torrugati01 ) ( :s2"w) ( e.w. zs") frvm br2lr0 ( LOiorbonJ) E.W. - 30 U1 ( 11'Jr?'l TRIMDI!K HI -1'eN CUiitt'OM ORB ii-z,m aUAD -RIS AV2!12bli2 n ( 666 rnrn t:=.r) 211J ( 710 mm E W) con-uqai"la-1 a-3 Bright plate- Steel coated with thi a-4 Temeplate-When coated with a mixture of 75 percent lead and 25 percent tin

Jnt. .

s;tul urp. br.anJ ( __ f\ __ ....JA ___ _f\

. Gauges and coating weights -0.29, 0. 73 and 1.47 oz. of tih-lead coating per sq. ft. b. Stainless steel-When chromium is added during the process of manufa cturing steel, this stainless steel has great resistance to corrosion, and is usually sp ecified for exterior use. Chromium content is 14 to 20 percent and because of"its high stre ngth, stainless steel for roofing is produced in relatively thin sheets, and because o f its hardness, all fabrication must be done in the shop. It is also expensive, so its use as roofing is limited usuallY to special conditions. c. Monel metal-This is an alloy containing about 70 percent nickel, Z7 percent copper, and 3 percent iron. It is highly corrosion-resistant and does not tarnish easily . It is also hard requiring shop fabrication, and expensive. d. Copper-Roofing copper may be soft-roHed which is easily worked, or coldrolled, which is stronger, harder, but less ductile. This is produced in four th icknesses or weights-16, 20, 24 and 32 oz. per sq. ft. and lengths of 8 and 10ft. Copper is chosen as ths roofing material where dignity, warmth and charm as well as long life are prime considerations. This is because in locations, an attract ive soft blue-green patina forms on copper so that its beauty is enhance with age. e. Lead - is a very pliable and useful roofing material, it can be drawn and st retched to fit wrapped surfaces. It weathers to a soft, even gray tone and is little affected b y acids. Sheet lead for roofing is usually at least 2 1/ 2 lb. hard lead, which means that it weights at least 2 1/21b. per sq. ft. and contains between 6 and 7 1/2 percent a ntimony, dimensions of sheet are limited to 2 x 4ft. A heavy coat of asphalt paint is painted on the contact side if lead work is in contact with fresh concrete. 297 t. 298 f. Zinc -Zinc is lighter and stiffer than lead but is affected by acids and has a high coefficient of expansion. Rolled zinc sheet is sometimes used for roofing and flashi ng, but zinc has a much wider application as a coating for steel roofing sheets. g. Aluminum -Aluminum roofing is light,.'loncorrosive, rigid and durable. It h as a very high coefficient of thermal expansion. It is available in both sheets a nd coils in a number of thicknesses. It comes in gauges 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22. 24 a nd 26 thicknesses are 0.081, 0.064; 0.051, 0.040, 0.032, 0.025, 0.020 and p.016. Sheet range in width from 24 to 48 in. and lengths 4 to 12ft. Aluminum roofing is produced in natural finish, in polished and oxide finishes, with a painted finish on one or both sides and in eight different patterns.

Mechanical jointing is the most practical method of joining aluminum sheets. All types of seams are used, but slip seam joints are used where connections are s ubject to thermal expansion and contraction. ORIGINAL SIZE WH!:N EXPANSION OCCURS h. Galbestos- This is a composite roofing made up of a steel-sheet core covered on both sides with a layer of zinc. While the zinc is still hot a layer of asbestos felt is pressed to it and the felt is impregnated with asphalt. Finally a c o l o r ~ d waterproof outer coating is applied. Sheets aremanufactured in 18, 20, 22 and 24 gauge and are made up into corrugated panels 30 or 33 in. wide, in lengths up to 12ft. Joints are made by side and en d lapping. 4. ASBESTOS-CEMENT SHEET ROOFING Asbestos fibers and portland cement are combined under pressure to form co rrugated roofing sheets. These sheets are used in the same manner as corrugated metal, a sbestoscement sheets may be left unpainted, painted or factory finished with plastic c oatings of various colors. Some designs from ETERNIT corporation 1. Ardex Lightweight Corrugated Sheet Especially designed for buildings erected in places that are almost inaccessib le and involves transport by manual or else very expensibe means. a. Standard ardex 7 mrrug21ftdn b. Super ardex e .w. :>B.35"(o.g7s} .s.w. 41. 3d ( 1.tJ5 LBngths -a, 10 ;and 12 f.eet 2. 4-V Corrugated Asbestos Sheets 3. Kalantas Lengths from 12 to 24 feet eliminates trusses, rafters, purlins for low cost housed. 4. Placa Ondula ( 1.007m} - ... .. --J E.W. -og75 (:58 0-813 m ( 32") 299 300 brand (Philsteel) COLOR BOND Sempura tile, a new roofing concept made of longspan prepainted steel tile but r etaining the features of ceramic tiles, does not crack nor shatter before and during-in stallation. The tile has epoxy primer and baked paint. It does not require yearly repainting . It is also leak proof because it has less seams and overlaps. 5. Built-Up Roofing A term applied to a type of roofing made by building up successive layers of fe

lt paper and asphalt over a solid roof deck of some description, with or without insulation. Five types: a. Roofing type consisting of asphalted felt paper, asphalt and gravel, or slag and is intended to roof slopes from 1/2 to 3 in. per foot. With a wood deck, the first step is the application of a single layer of 5-lb dr y sheathing paper .. Next two layers of 15-lb asphalt-saturated felt paper is app lied dry and nailed with broad-headed roofing nails. These are followed by three layers of 15-lb asphalt-saturated felt paper, each layer being sealed in place with approxima tely 20 lb. of hot asphalt per 100 sq .. ft. Next a layer of hot asphalt is spread ove r the surface at the rate of about 65 lb. per 100 sq . ft. If the slope is 1 /8" to 1 in., use l40F asphaltt If the slope is 1 to 2 in., use 170F asphalt If the slope is over 2 in., use 210F asphalt Finally a layer of crushed slag or pea gravel is spread over the asphalt at the rate of 300 lb. per 100 sq. ft. for slag or 400 lb. per 100 sq. ft. for gravel. Th is type of roof lasts 20 years. For non wood d ~ k s or over an insulated sl.lrface, a similar grade of roofing is applied by sealing all layers of asphalt-saturated felt paper in hot asphalt. nal FOUR- PLY BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOF 0\lt:R WOOD DECk b. Roofing type no. 2 consists of tarred felt paper, pitch and gravel. This is intended for roofs with slope of 0 to 1 in. per foot. Procedure is the same asphalt type. c. Roofing type no. 3 consists of asbestos felt, asphalt felt, and a smooth flood coat of asphalt, intended for roofs with a slope of from 1/2 to 8 in. per f t. Over a wood deck, the dry sheathing paper consists of 9-lb. waxed kraft. A single layer of 25-lb. asphalt saturated felt paper is laid over this held in place wit h roofing nails. Next two layers of 15 lb. asphalt felt are applied, each layer being seated in place with 20 lb. per 100 sq. ft. mopping of hot asphalt. Next to la yers of 15 lb. asphalt-saturated asbestos paper are applied in the same way. Finally a coat consisting of 251b. of asphalt per 100 sq. ft. is applied, using proper grade of as phalt for the roof slope. d. Roofing type no 4 requires slate-surfaced roofing paper as well as turated felts and may be used on roofs with slopes from 2 to 18 in. 12. Over a w ood deck, a single layer of 5-lb. dry sheathing paper is first applied. Next comes a single layer of 15-lb. asphalt felt, held with roofing nails. Over th

is are laid two layers of 15-lb. asphalt felt and two layers of 120-lb. Slate-surfaced felt-each of these is sealed in place with 20 lb. per 100 sq. ft. of 210F. asphalt. This type of ro ofing is recommended as a 1 0-year roof. 301 .302 e. Roofing type no. 5 involves what is known as the cold process. The f elts are cold process felts, saturated with cold asphalt emulsion, and the asphalt top c oating is applied cold. Layers of felt are sealed together with asphalt adhesive. Roofing ot this type is for slopes from 1/8 to 8 in-per foot. Over a wood deck, three l ayers of cold. process 53-lb. felt. paper are applied, fastened down wiith roofing nails and asphalt adhesive at the rate of about 2 1/2 gal. per 100 sq. ft. This surface is c overed with a layer of asphalt-fibrated emulsion applied cold at the rate of 4-gal. pe r 100. sq. ft. This type of roofing is also considered to have useful life of 20 year s . . 6. Rolled Roofing This consists of very heavy asphalt-saturated felt paper, with or without finely crushed slate embedded in one surface, put up is rolls. Four basic type: a. Smooth roll-consists of asphalt-saturated felt ranging in weight from 45 to 65 lb. per 100 sq. ft. covered with a smooth coating of asphalt. b. Mineral-surface roll ranges from 90 to 120 lb. per 100 sq. ft. and has a layer of crushed slate embedded in the asphalt surface coating, made in 36 in. wide. c. Psttsrn-fldge roll-made in 32 and 36 in. and consists of a 105-lb. felt that is mine. rat-surfaced except for a 4 in. band down the center. The roll is semicut on a pattern along this strip so that a roll produces 16 or 18 in. wide patterned roof ing strips. These are normally lapped 2 in. when being appl ied to a rooi. d. The 19"in. selvage roll is made of fr()m felt weighing 140 to 150 lb. per 10 0 sq. ft. in a strip 36 in. wide. A 17 in. wide band of this strip is mineralized, and the oth er 19 in. is plain. When applied to a roof, each strip is lapped 19 in. over the one below to present a completely surface and to provide double coverage. (a p opular brand is John_s Manville) 7. Sprayed-on Asphalt Roofing This is a new technique for the application of asphalt roofing, using special equipment for applying the material. A speCial gun with three nozZles and a fiber cutting chamber is used. Glass fibers are fed into the chamber where they are cut to predetermined lengths and blown out throught a center nozzle. Two side nozzles each deliver a spray of asphalt

emulsion which coats the glass fibers and carries them to the deck to form a rei nforced film of asphalt. The thickness of the film can be increased by repeated sp rayings. This type of roofing is applied over regular base roofing felts of irregular sh apes. This method gives a monolithics film application over the entire surface, regard less of the shape or contours . 8. Glass Roofing Commonly used glass used for roofing are a. Corrugated glass-made in sheets \rtith corrugations, which correspond with the metal or asbestos board roofing. The glass is usually .3/8 in. thick, and sheet are made up to a maximum size of 50 x 144 in. Glass sheets may be interchanged with the regular roofing sheets to allow the entry of light through the roof. Glass sheets are fastened in place and made weather proof by elastic caulking compound at sid e and end laps. - .b. Wired glails-This is glass which has embedded in it wire mesh with not larg er than 7/8 in. openings. The glass in 1/4 in. thick and may have a polished or patterne d surface. Sheets are made up to a maJSimum size of 60 x 132 in. This type of glass is held in metal frames and is commonly used in skylights, etc. 9. Plastic Roofing Used in three forms for roofing. a. Corrugsted plastic sheet-made from glass-fiber-reinforced plastics in co lor or translucent. Sheets are 34 in. wide and 8, 10, 12ft. long with 2 1/2 or 1 1/4 in . corrugations. Such sheets may be interchanged with corrugated sheet metal, asbestos or galbestos sheets to allow entry of light. b. ShHts of cltNtr vinyl plastic used in green houses,conservatories, and factory buildings. Used for the same purpose as glass sheets. Vinyl sheets can be much larger because of their great impact strength. c. Liquid plastic-Also sprayed onto roof decks and is known as the envelope rqo fing. This liquid envelope consists of a pigmented, opaque vinyl plastic which is appl ied by means of spray gun tcdorm a continuous film 3Cfto 40 mils. thick. It can be appl iec" over -armos. "any-type of roof decK or existing roofing material except r oot WOOd shingles. This is 'lery useful for roofs with irregular shapes or very steep sl opes. The plastic dries very quickly to form a film which, for a 40 mil thickness, has a tensile strength of about 500 psi and elongation of 200 percent. The vinyl coat is hi ghly resistant to industrial atmosphere containing dirt, grime and mild acid fumes. It is also highly resistant to deterioration due to extended exposure to sunlight.

NEW ROOFING DESIGNS: (1986) 10. Milano Design-by Philsteel-this is a long span steel tiles, solid stee l sculptured to match the beauty of ceramic roofing. It is leakproof because it has less seams a nd overlaps, Polyester paint baked over epoxy primes which is virtually mainten ance f r r M ~ It consists of steps-better rigidity than ordinary Corrugated Sheets. The total coated thickness is 0.43 mm (0.017 in) The weight per unit area is 4.53 kg/m2 per unit length i ~ 3.44 kg/ml coverage is 220 sq. cm/Mt. available up to 6 meters factory cut-to-ordered lengths. It is packed by strappe d bundles or crated depending on the requirement. The recommended roof slope is 1 in 6 10 30;j '. 304 11. Banawe Design -by metal forming corporation. This is a horizontally laid co loredlong span metal tile.:which has conceafed fastening, cut to size, and most of all, an absence of purlins which saves on this cost. It has sharp distinct horizontal rib li nes and hook action at overlaps. It prevents capillarity and checks the penetration of rain water with wind velocity of 60 meters per second or 134.21 miles per hour. It Completely eJiminates the need for purtins because of its horizo11tal rib des ign which by itself acts as the purtin. The intermediate rafters that are to be added are mu ch less in board feet measurement than the purlins required for the vertical roofing. It i s also suitable for sidings, and can easily be replaced or taken out without damaging panel . Allows construction, installation of a low pitch roof at 3' in 12". . DETAIL a= RIDGE ROLL o . ' l ~ ~ DETAJL OF BANAWE HORIZCNTAL PANEL 305 306 ha-twnt.al partAI p!at1 c.hp GUTTER DETAIL 0 ETAIL CF STARTER cliP LDNG/1UDlNAL /J.11 m -U)f ) 0 0 ) TQp VIEW OF Cl-EAT Chapter .

BILL OF MATERIALS 308 I. MOBILIZATION ___ rolls Sawali Fencing @ _ _ !roll of __ x __ size@ P __ /roll ... '------- pes. 2"' x 4'" 10' -0' up total bd.ft. @ '-- I bd.ft. . . . '---.-----pes. 2" x3'" X 10'0' up total bd.ft. @ , bd.ft. ...... , ___ _ ___ pes. 1/4"' x4' x 8' plywood@ ,_fpc . ... .... :..... ..... ... , ___ _ ___ pes. corrugated G.l. sheet@ , __ /kilo..................... '------- kilos 2'" c. w nail@ P __ lkilo............. ..... ... '------- pes. drums for water@ P __ /drum .. ...... ... .. ..... '----- -- pes. concrete pail@ , __ / pc. .. ...... .. .. .. ... .... , ___ _ _ __ pes. shovels@ , __ /pc. .... .. .. .... ... .. ... . '--- ----pes. 1" x 6'" x 12'-0 .. up total bd.ft. @P __ / bd.ft. ..... P ___ _ Water Connections & Permit . .. . . .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. . '--- -Electrical Connections & Permit .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . ... '----Septic Tank for Construction Use.. ......................... '----, ____ _ II. EARTHWORK ........ ..... . ...... ... .................................... ........ P __ ___.__ - ---'- cu.m. of earth to be removed ___ hrs: to be used when bulldozing required @ , __ /hr ........... :.......... '--- -- --cu.m. of earth fill @ ,_/cu.m ......... ~ . . . . . . . . . . . '----...::;. ___ pes. of 100 ft . length pile @ , __ ! pile...... .... ........ ... '------- cu.m. stones for riprapping@ P __ /cu.m. .......... .... .... '--- -ESTIMATING GUIDE Total cu.m. of Earth Multiply lt 25% plus loose volume cu . = Compact Volume. Dead load plus live load of building divided by approximately 160,000 lbs. carri ed by one 100 ft. pite- total numbers of piles. (approx 150 psf). Riprapping -get total area in aq.m. 1 cu.m. Stone = .1 to 1.6 sq.m. of riprapping depends on thickness Ul. Cc;>NCRETE WORKS a) FOOTINGS _ _ cu.m. total ___ bags cement , __ /bag ..................... , _ __ _ ___ cu.m. stone fill @ P /cu.m. .... . ... .......... '------- cu.m. gravel@ P / cu.m .............. -..... ' ----- -- kilos of Steel bar@ , __ /kilo ... . ....... .......... ' - ----

--- rolls of G.l. Wire #16 @ P _ _ / roll ............. :.:..... ' ----(or pes. 16 mm +steel bar x 6.00 m @ , _ _ / pc. ............................ . , _ __ _ b ~ SLABS ON FILL ~ ___ bags cement @ , _ _ /bag ' - ---- - - cu.m. stone fill @ P __ / cu.m. : ................. ' ------- cu.m. gravel@ P __ l cu.m. .................. ' ------- cu.m. 'riversand @ P __ icu.m. . . ..... .. .. ... .. .. '----- -- kilos of steef bar@ P kilo .. .. .. .... .. .. . .. .. .. P _ ___ _ _ __ rolls of G. l. wire #16@ ' / roll ..................... , ___ _ (or No. of pes size of Stee4 Bar x 6.00 m. @ p __ / pc. ...... .. ..... '---c) COLUMNS A ~ O STAIRS ___ bags cement@ , _ _ / bag ..... .. ...... ........ , ___ _ ___ ~ . m . gravel @ P / cu.m. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... '----- --cu.m. riversand@ P ~ /cu.m. .. ............. P------- kilos of Steel bar@ , __ /kilo ........ ............. P ____ _ (or __ pes. size + mm x 6.00 m steetbar@ , __ / pc. ... . . . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. , _ __ _ ___ rolls G.l. Wire-116 @P __ /roll ....... ..... .... P---. d) BEAMS AND GIRDERS ___ bags cement@ , bag ............. . .. _,... ,. ___ _ ___ cu.m. gravel @ ,_. __ / cu.m. ............. ..... '------- cu.m. riversan<iO P /cu.m. ..... ............. P----- -- kilos of steelbar 0 P /kilo . .. .. .. ... . .. ........ p. ___ _ ,. ____ _ 310 (or __ pes. size __ e mm x 600 m. St. bar @ P __ l pc. . . . . . . .... '----- --rolis G.l .. Wire #16@ p _ _ /roll ;........... .... ..... P _ ___ _ e) SUSPENDED R.C. SLABS ___ bags cement@ , _ _ / bag ' ~ - - ___ .. CI,.I.m. gravel@ P __ /cu.m. ........ ........ .. '------- cu.m; riversand@ P __ /cu.m. ...... .. .. ........ P ____ _ ___ kilos steel bar@ P __ /kilo ..................... P (or __ pes, size e mm X ~ IT! steel bar @P __ / pc. ........... ...... .............. P _ __ _ ___ rolls G. I. wire #16@

P _ __ /roll ........ ............. '----ESTIMATING GUIDE Computations: cu.m. = length x width x thickness Class " A" mix generally used for computation 1:2:4 1bag cement: 2 bags sand : 4 bags gravel for speed of computation with contingency. multiply cu.m. x 10 = No. of bags cement cu.m. x 0.5 = Total cu.m. Sand cu.m. x 1.0 = Total cu.m. gravel G./. Wire #16 Total Kilos of Steel Bar No. of Rolls of = 2,900 G.l. Wire 1 roll G.l. Wire = Kilos Length = STEEL BARS WEIGHT SIZES # 2 or 2/8" II 3 or 3/8" # 4 or 4/8" # 5 or 5/8 .. # 6 or 6/ 8" # 7 or 7/ 8 .. I 8 or 8/ 8" # 9 or 9/8" #10.or 10/8 .. #11 or 11/8 .. #12 or 12/8 .. = = = = = 1/ 4'"+ or 6mm 3/ B"+ or 10 mm. 1/2"+ or 12 mm 5/8 .. + or 16 mm 3/4"+ .or 20 mm 7/ 8"+ or 22 mm , ... or 25mm 1 1i'8"+ or 28 mm 1 1/4"+ or 32 mm 1 3/4"+ 1 1/2"+ or36mm kg/l. m. 0.248 0.616 1.007 1.'579 2.466 3.041 3.854 6.028 6.313 8.938

. ~ IV. FORMWORKS.... ... . .... .... . .. ... . .. . .. .. .... . .. ..... .. . .. .. . .. . .. . . .. ..... .. '---a) R.C. Slab, beams, columns, stairs ___ pes. 1/2" X 4' X 8' plywood@ , __ /pc. . .. . ... .... .. .. ..... . , ___ _ (or __ pes. 1" x 6" T and G Form) _ _ total bd.ft. @ , __ / bd.ft . ................................. ' - ~ - --- pes. 2" x 4" x12'-0" up Apitong __ total bd.ft.@ , __ lbd.ft. .......... ........ ' - - - ~ --- pes. 2" X 3" X 12'..()'" Up __ total and bd.ft.@ , __ / bd.ft. ............... ... , ___ _ ___ kegs. 2" c.w. Nail @ , __ /keg .... . ........ ... . .... , ___ _ ___ kegs. 4"' c.w. nal@ , __ /keg ...... ............... , ___ _ ___ gallons fonii oil @ , __ /gal. .. ............... .... '---ESTIMAT1NG GUIDE Plywood = 4' X 8' .,;. 32 sq. ft. a ~ total area in SF = No. of pes. of 4' x 8' 32 1/2'" p4ywood Total area of Plywood x 60% == Total BF of 2" x 3" (.60) = Apitong Fonn Lumber Total area of Plywood x 150% ::: Total BF of 2" x 4"' (1 .501 = Apitong form Lumber Nlls: Total Area of Plywood = No. of Kegs of 2" c.w. nail 2,500 (here 1 keg. = 80 plywood) Total BF of Form Lumber = No. of Kegs. of 4'" c.w. nail 2,000 Form Oil: Total Area of Plywood = gallons of oil 2,500 V. MASONRYWORK .... '- --a) HOLLOW BLOCKS --- pes. 4" x a 16" CHB@ , __ /pc. ...... ............ ... ' ------- pes. 6" X a 16" CHB@ __ ._ l pc. .... ... ......... ..... ' - --311 \ 312 ___ pes. 10 mm t> steel bar x 6.00 m @ P __ / pc .... ... . _ _ ___: kilos G.l. wire #16@ , __ /kilos ......... .... .... . _ __ bags cement for mortar@ , __ / bag .... .... ............ . _ __ cu.m. sand@

P cu.m ................. .. b) WALL FOOTING ___ bags cement@ P __ / bag .... .... ... ..... . .. .. _ __ cu .m. gravel @ P __ /cu.m .. ............... .. ___ cu.m. sand@ P _ _ /cu.m ....... ........... . _ _ _ pes. 12 mm + x 6.00 steel bar @P __ /pc ......... ... .... .. . _ _ _ pes. 10 mm + x 6.00 m. steel bat@ P __ / pc. . ......... .. _ __ kilos #16 G. I. Wire #16@ P __ / kilo .................. .. . c) PLAIN CEMENT FLOOR TOPPING Total Area _ _ sq. m. x thickness __ cu.m. ___ bags cement@ P __ / bag .. ........... . .. .. .. . ___ cu.m. riversand@ P __ /cu.m .................. . d) Plaster __ sq.m. total __ cu.m. total __ L.M. Total ___ bags cement@ , _ _ / bag .. .. .......... ..... . . _ __ cu.m. sand@ P __ / bag .......... ....... . .. . _ __ bags lime@ P __ / bag ........... ... .... .. . el Decorative Blocks _ _ sq.m. --- pes . 20 )( .30@ ., , , , ... , , p , , , , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ ,. ____ _ , __ / pc. ....... ........ ...... '--- -f) Pea Gravel Washout Finish Total __ sq.m. _ _ _ cans #5, #10 or #15 black pebbles @ P __ / can ....... , .. . . ..... .. .. P ____ _ ___ bags cement@ , __ / bag .......... . ..... . . .. . , _ ___ _ ___ cu.m. riversand@ P __ /cu.m. ...... .... .. ...... '------- lineal meter 1 /8" x 2" brass strip@ P _ _ /l.m. . . .. .. . . . . . P ___ __.__

.. .. g) Synthetic Adobe Finish Total Area- . __ sq.m. _ _ _ cans crushed adobe stones@ !' __ l ean .. ........ ..... .. .. . . ___ cu.m. riversand@ P _ _ /cu.m ... .... .......... . . h) Bricks Walling Total Area __ sq.m. --- pes. 2'" X 4 X 8"" @ P __ /pc. - - - pes. 2H )( 2" X 8" @ , __ / pc . . ... ........... ... .. . _ _ _ ~ - 1'"x2x a @ , __ lpc . ... . .. .. ....... .. ... . --- pes. 2" X 4"' X 8"' chipped or decorative @ , __ lpc . .......... .......... . i) Adobe Stone Walling Total Area __ sq.m. _ __ cu.m. dressed stone@ P __ / cu.m . ....... .... ... .. .. ___ cu.m. rough stone @ 1' _ _ /cu.m . ..... .... . .. ..... . _ __ bags cement@ , __ /bag ........ .. .. ... .... .. _ __ cu.m. sand@ P __ /bag ...... ....... ... .... . j} Baguio Stones or other Walling Stones Total Area __ sq. m. ,..._ __ cu.m. dressed s t o n e ~ P _ _ / cu.m . ....... .. .. . : .... . ___ cu.m. rough stone@ P __ /cu.m ... ............... . ___ bags cement@ P __ /bag ...... .... .. .... ... . . ___ cu.m. riversand@ P __ /cu.m ... .... ... .. .. ... .. ESTIMATING GUIDE On Hollow Blocks , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ ... , ____ _ ,. ____ _ ,. ___ ....,....._ Compute total sq.m. of Walling then divide by 13 pes. sq. m. you ge t total No. of Hollow Blocks including breakages. To get the bags of cement and cu.m.

Sand for MORTAR. For or a x 8'" X16" CHB 3 cells .003 cu.m. x 16 bags = No. bags cement .003 cu.m. x 0.8 cu.m. sand = _ _ . _ cu.m. sand .003 cu.m. /hollow b&ock 313 314 For a 4'" x 8" X 1.6 .. CHB .001 cu.m./hollow block .001 cu.m. x 16 bags = _ _ bags cement .001 cu.m. x 0.8 cu.m. sand = cu.m. sand . To get number of STEEL BAR reinforcement, measure the total runs in meter for h orizontal and vertical bars + by 6.00 m. to get the number of pieces then multiply x fac tor of kg/m to get the weight In kilos. For G. I. Wire, multiply the hori:zontal bars to the number of vertical bars mu ltiplied by 0.30 meters to get total length of G.l . Wire required, then convert into kilos. For PLASTERING: maximum (.015 m thick) one face For a 6 .. x 8" x 16.. CHB .0012 cu.m. / block For 6"' x 8 .. 16.. CHB .0012 cu.m./block (all single Face) Multiply .0012 x No. of Hollow Blocks = Total cu.m. Multiply cu.m. x 16 bags for cement Multiply cu.m. x 0.8 cu.m. for sand For pea gravel (pebble washout) Measure total L M of brass strip divide by 3:00 to get No. pes . @ 3.00 m length Get total area in sq.m. for pebble washout. Use one (l) can of pebble stones t o one sq.m. Area to be covered. Mix 1 bag cement to 4 bags pebble mixture. For Synthetic Adobe Mix 1 bag cement to one bag sand and two cans synthetic adobe. For bricks, and t iles, get total area in sq. meters then divide by the area in sq.m. of one brick or the total area in sq. feet divide by the area in sq. ft. of one brick t o get the number of pieces. VI. WOODWORK a) posts Yacal or Guijo _ __ pes. of 6 .. x 6"' x 10' ..()" _ _ bd.ft.@ , _ _ / bd.ft. ..... ...... .. .... . , _ _ _ _ _,__ __ pes. of 4" x 4" x 10'-0" _ _ bd.ft.@ , _ _ / bd.ft. ................. . , _ _ _ _ b) Girder Apitong - -- pes, 3'" X 8" X 12' -0 6 @ . , _ _ / bd.ft. ..... .... ...... ... , _ _ _ _ - --pes. 3,. X 10"' X 12'-0" bcf .ft.@ , bd.ft .. ........ ....... :. , _ _ _ _ c) Floor Joists Apitong - -- pes. 2" X 6" X 10'..(),. bd.ft. @ , _ _ / bd.ft. ....... . .. .. ... ... . , _ _ _ _ - -- pes. 2" JC: 8" x 10'-0" bct.ft.@ , _ _ / bd.ft. .. ........ ........ , _ _ _ _

d) Rooring-kiln dried tanguile - --pes. 1" X 4" X 12'-0" bd.ft.@ , _ _ / bd.ft. . . .. ..... ... . .... . , _ _ _ _ ___ pes. 1" x 6" 12'..0" bd.ft. ~ ,_l bd.ft. .. ... .......... ... , _ _ _ _ , ____ _ e) Base Board --- pes. 1" X 6" X 12'..(),. bd.ft.@ , __ / bd.ft..... .......... .... , ___ _ f) Studding Apitong - - - pes. 2" X 4" X 10'-0" bd.ft.@ , __ /bd.ft.... ..... .... . ..... , ___ _ g) Stairs: Tanguile Red Stringers: ___ pes. 3" x 14" x 16' -0'" bd.ft. @ , /bd.ft. .. .. ... .... .. . .... , ___ _ Treads: ___ pes. 2'" x 12" 12'-0'" bd.ft.@ , _ _ / bd.ft ....... .. ... ... .... , ___ _ Risers: --- pes. 11/2" X 8" X 12'-0" bd.ft.@ , __ /bd.ft. .. .. .. , ___ _ Balusters: --- pes. 2" X 2" X 2'-Q" bd.ft.@ , __ /bd.ft. .... .. .. .. . .... ... , ___ _ Handrails: --- pes. 3 X 5'" X 12'-0" bd.ft.@ , __ / bd.ft ......... ....... ". , ___ _ Newel Posts: ---pes. 3'" X 3" X 3'-6"' bd.ft.@ , __ /bd.ft ......... ... :...... , ___ _ h) Balcony Yaeal or Guijo (Joists) ____ pes. 3" x 6" x 8'-0" bd.ft.@ , bd.ft. .. . .. .. .. . . . .. .. .. , ____ _ (Flooring) --- pes. 1 1 / 2" X 3" X 12'0'" bd.ft. @ , __ / bd.ft. .. .. .. , ___ _ (Baluster) ___ pes. 2'" x 2" x 12'-0" bd.ft.@ , _ _ /bd.ft. ........ . .... ..... , ____ _ (Railing) ___ pes. 3" x 6"' x 12'-0" bd.ft.@ , __ / bd.ft . .............. ... : , ___ _ i) Ceiling Joists Apitong Ro. ---pes. 2'" X 2" X 12'-0"' bd.ft.@ , __ /bd.ft. ..... ........ ..... , ___ _ - -- pes. 2"' X 2" X 12'-0" bd.ft.@ , __ /bd.ft...... ... ...... .... , ___ _ - -- pes. 2" X 3" X 1 2 ' ~ 0 " bd.ft.@ , _ _ /bd.ft. ........ .......... , ___ _ j) Girt Apitong Ro. --- pes. 3'" X 8" X 14'..()'" bd.ft.@ , _ _ / bd. ft ..... " ......... ". ,_....;._ _ _ - - -pes. 3"' .x 6" X 14' -0 bd.ft.@ __ / bd.ft. ............ .... .. , ___ _ 315 .. k) Rafter Exposed Pinewood s .. s . pes. 2" X 8" X 16'-0" bd.ft. ' /bd.ft. ... .. .... ... . . . .... , ___ _

I) Roof Truss Apitong ro. Bottom chord ---pes. 3"' X 6 .. 12'..()" bd.ft. @ t ,_,bd.ft... .. ...... .. ... . .. , ___ _ Diagonal and vertical braces . --- pes. 2'"' X 4'" X 8' -0" bd.ft. @ ,_,bd.ft ....... .. ... ..... ,. '---Top Chord --- pes. 3 .. X 6" X 12' ..()'" bd.ft. @ ,_,bd.ft . .. .............. ;. '---m) Purtins Apitong ro. --- pes, 2"' X 3"' X 14'-Q" bd.ft.@ , __ /bd.ft . ..... "' ..... .. . .. , ___ _ pes. 2'" X 3" Jt 11 I -0" bd.ft. @ --- , __ /bd.ft... ......... ....... ---n) Door Jambs S4S Yacal on Concrete Wall (Tanguile Apitong on Wood) --- pes. 2" X 6'" X 8'-0"' bd.ft.@ , / bd.ft. ....... ....... .. . . , ___ _ --- pes. 2"' X 6" X 10'-0'" bd.ft.@ , __ lbd.ft . .......... . .. .. ;. . ---. o) WindoW Jambs S4S Yacal on Concrete (Tanguile, Apitong on Wood) p) Cabinets and Shelves --:--- pes. 11/ 2" X 2" X 10'-{)" bd. ft.@ , __ l bd.ft. ..... , ___ _ --- pes, 1"' X 12" X 12'-0"' bd.ft, ... .. t. . . ...... tt ___ _ q) Wall Paneling ($2S) Pinewood --- pes. 1" :x $" X 10' -0'" bd.ft. @ , /bd.ft. .. . . . . .. . . .. .. .. .. '------ pes. t" x a x 1o..o" bd.tt.@ , __ /bd.ft.. ................. , ___ _ --- pes. 1"' X 10 .. X 10' -0" bd.ft. @, bd.ft. .... .. .. ... .. .. '---r) Fascia Board Tanguile S2S ---pes. 11/2'* 12" X 14'-0" bd.ft.@P __ /bd.ft........ P ___ _ s) Sidings-Tanguile S2S ___ pes. 1" x6" x 12'-Q" v-cut bel. ft . @ P __ /bd.ft. ..... '------pes. 1"' x 6" x 12'-0" e-cut bd.ft. @ , __ lbd.ft. .. .. .. '---ESTIMATING GUIDE For str:ucturals like post, Girders, joists, and I"A88sure the total length i n plan but do not stop on <:enter to center. Add aUowance for overtaps. 316 For flooring and sidings divide the total width in feet by the proposed t hickness one inch. Suppostng-you will use a 4 inch flooring use 3 1/ 2 factor for safety on t he T & G joint. For Fascia board. Measure the total length divide by 24 feet. For jambs, measure the leng.:ns and widths with allowances. For studdings, measure and count all verticals and horizontals {spacing @ 0.60 ) For stringers, handrails and rafters. Measure the total lineal feet as it incti nes and not as per top new plan.

VII. ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES 1. TILEWORt<S (, ___ _ a) Vinyl Tiles either 118", 3/ 32"', '1/ 16" - - - pes. 1/ 8" X 9" X 9" Vinyl Tile_ @, __ / pc. ...... ............ ' ------1/ 8" X 12'" X 12' Vinyl Tile@ P _ _ l pe . . ....... , .. P _ __ _ _ __ liter vinyl glue or rugby@ P __ /liter .. . .. .... .... ..... ' - ---b) Narra Parquet or Woodtile Total-sq.ft. area ___ sq.ft. Woodtile @ , __ /sq.ft . ...... . -..... ... .. , _ __ _ ___ gallons woodtlle glue@ , __ /sq.ft. .. . ....... .. .. .... , _ ___ _ ___ sq. ft. sandpaper@ , __ / sq.ft . .. ... .. . .. .. .. .. .. , ___ _ ___ gallons wax @ P __ /gal. .. .. 00... ..... .... ' - ----''-c) Glazed Tiles 1/4" thick _ _ _ pes. 4 l / 4" x 41 / 4" white tiles@ P _ _ / pc .......... 00 ' - ---- - - pes. 41/.4" X 4 1/4"' colored tiles@ P _ __ l pc. .. .. . .. . .. . ' - ------ pes. mouldings P __ /pc . .... ... 00 ......... 00. '-- --d) Unglazed Tiles . _ _ _ pes. 4 1/ 4'" x 4 1/ 4"' white Tiles@ P _ _ / pe.. . . ... ..... P _ __ _ _ _ _ pes. 4 1/ 4" x 4 1/ 4" colored Tiles@P _ _ P _ __ _ e) Semivitrified Tites ___ pes. 4" x 8"' Colored Tiles@ p_ . __ / pc ... oo .. , . ... . . ...... . . ' - ------ pes. x 6" colored Tiles@ , __ / pc. 000 ----""""" , _ _ _ _ __ pes. 12" x 12" colored Tlles@ , __ /pc. .. ..... .. ..... ..... .. , _ __ _ , ____ _ 317 318 fl Marble Tiles --- pes. 1 X 4 X 8'" colored marble@ P _ _ / pc. . . . .. . . . '--- ---- pes. 1" x 12" x 24" colored marble@ P __ /pc.... .. .... P ___ _ _ --- pes. 1,. X 24* X 24" @ P _ _ ._ / pc. . .. . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . '--- ---- pes. 1 X 36 X 36"@ p _ _ / pc. ......... .. ..... .. . . . '--- -g) Crazy Cut Marble __ sq.m. total ___ cu.m. crazy cut@ P _ _ /cu.m.. ..... .......... .. P _ ___ _ ___ Cans granulithic stones @ , __ / cans .. .. .............. ' - - - ---- b8gs white cement @ P _ _ /bag .. ................ P--,--h) Vigan Bricktiles . pes. 1" )( 12" X 12"@ , _ _ /pc. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . .. . . . '-"------

--- pes. 1 1/.2" X 16" X 16 , __ / pc . .. . ...... .. , _ __ _ il Cement Tiles ___ pes. 1"' x 8" x 8" plain color @ P _ _ /pc........ .. .... ........ '------- pes. 1 N X a X 8" decorative@ , __ tpc. : ............. . j....... , _ _ _ _ _ ESTIMATING GUIDE Get tt-e total area of in sq.m. divide by the size of material in metric size: If in sq.ft. total area, divldeby feet area of one material. 2. FENESTRATION (P ___ _ a) Windows ___ sq.m. steel window casement@ P _ _ /sq.m. '------- sq.m. steel window awnings@ , __ /sq.m... ... ... ... .. . . . .. ' ------- sq.m. window grilles@ P __ /sq.m...... ..... . .. .. .. . ' ------- sq.m. alumi num window@ p __ / sq.m............... ... . ' ------- sq.m. jalousie window@ P __ /sq.m. .. .... ........ .... p ____ _ (sq.ft. is sometimes used) b) Glass ___ sq.m. 1 + 8"' glass@ p __ / sq.m. .................. '--- ---- sq.m. 3/16"' gJass@ p_. _/sq.m.. ......... ... . .. .. '--- ---- sq.m. 7/32"' glass@ . p __ /sq.m ... .. :............. ' - - - ---- kilo glass putty@ , _ _ / kilo ..... :........ ....... ' ----c) Doors --- pes .. 70 x 2.10 Flush door for toilet 1 side W .P. @ , __ /pc. ..... ................ '-- - ---- pes .. 00 x 2.10 Flush door for bedroom@ P _ _ / pc. .... . ' ------- pes .. 90 X 2.10 Flush door kitchen, balcony, guest @ , __ / pc. ..................... '------- pes .. 90 X 2.10 panel door . narra@ , __ /pc. .. . . . . .. .. '------- sq.m. aluminum Sliding Glass door@ tt __ /sq.m. ' ------- sq.m. W.t. Steel Gate@ p _ _ /sq.m................... '----d) Screen Door and Windows ___ sq.m. screen with aluminum frame@ , __ /sq.m. . .. .. . '----3. Shelves, Closets and Cabinets (, _ ___ _ --- pes. 1/2" X 4'. X 8' Plywood @ , _ _ /pc. . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . ..... ' ------- pes. 3/4'" x 4'" X 8' Plywood@ tt _ _ lpc. .... .. . .......... .... '------- sq.ft. persiana or louver door@ P _ _ / sq.ft..... ... . "------- sq. ft. panel cabinet doors@ , __ /sq.ft . .... :......... .... , ____ _

4. Partitions ___ pes. 1/4n x 4 ~ x 8' ordinary plywood@ P __ / pc. .. . . . '----- - - pes. 1/4" x 4' x 8' narra or dao decorative plywood@ P /pc. . . .. . .. ..... . . ... .... ' ------- pes. 1/4'" x 4' x 8' Lawanit@ , _ _ lpc. . . .. . . ... . ..... .. ... . , _ __ _ ___ pes. 1/2" x 4' x 8' particle bOard @ fl __ / pG. . .. . . . . . . ' ---5. Decorative Wall ___ sq.m. wall paper vinyl@ , __ /sq.m.. ....... .... .. . . . . ' - ------ packs walt paper glue@ P . pack . . .. .. . . . . ... . .. .. "----6. Wood Grilles ___ sq.m. wood grille@ , __ /sq.m. ..... ....... ...... '----319 "" 320 7. Ceilings Interior --- pes. 1/4'" X 4' X 8' plywood @ , fpc. .. ............ .. .... . ,. ___ _ ___ pes. 1' x 12" ceiling Tile@P __ /Pc,. ........... , ____ _ 8. Ceiling Eaves Exterior ___ pes. 1/4" x 4' x 8'-0" Marine or waterproof Plywood @ , __ /pc. . . .. ...... ... .. . . .. .. ,. ___ _ ---pes. 1/4 .. X 4' X 8'-0"' temPEtf8d or W.P. Lawanit@ , __ /pc. ..................... , ___ _ 9. Fireplace 300 pes. @ 2" x 4' x 8' Firebricks , __ /pc...................... ,. ___ _ ___ bags cement@ , __ /bag .................. '------ cu.m. Sand@ P __ ~ _ / c u . m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. ____ _ ___ pes. 6'" CHB@ , __ /pc ................ ,..... ,. ____ _ ___ pes. 12 mm +bars@ , __ /pc...................... ,. ___ _ VIII. HAROWARES . . . . . ... .. ... . . . . ... ...... .. . .. . ......... .. ............. ...... .. . . p. ___ _ A. ROUGH ___ kegs4" C.W. Nail@ , __ /keg..................... , ___ _ ___ kegs 3'" C.W. Nail@ , __ /keg..................... , ____ _ ___ kegs 2" C.W. Nail@ , __ /keg..................... ,. ___ _ ___ kegs 1" finishing Nail@ , __ /keg..................... ,. ___ _ ___ kilos concrete nails@ , __ /kilo..................... '------- rolls G. I. Wire #16@ , __ /roll .. ............... .... ,. ____ _

___ pes. 5/8" + x 7" bolts with nuts and screWs @ , __ lpc. ..................... '------ pes. 1 /2" + x 24'" tension bar for truss@ , __ /pc....................... , _____ _ ---pes, 1/4H X 2" X 24,. pOst strap with bolts C.P.@ , __ /pc. . .. . .. .. ..... .. . .. .. . '---(Steel bars, see concreting world B. FINISHING 1. Hinges ___ pes. 4"' x 4"' Joose pin 'hinges@ , _ _ f pc . . ,................... ,. ___ _ --- pes. 3 X 3 loose pin hinges@ p _ _ /pc. . . . .. ... . .. . . . . .. .. .. '----- --pes. 2 x 2" closet hinges@ , __ /pc. .. ....... ..... ....... '---- - -- pes. 1"' x t closet hinges@ , __ /pc. .. .. .. ...... . ... ..... , ___ _ ___ cps. washangton hinges @ , __ l pc . .. ... ........ ... ,. ___ _ ___ 1 in. ft. piano hinges @ , __ /.pc. ........... .......... '----2. Locksets ___ pes. toilet Jockset buttom .. press without key@ , __ /pc ..... ....... ... ..... .. ___ bedroom lockset buttom lockset button press with key@ , __ / pc, .................... . _ _ _ pes, main door with special handle and key @ P __ / pc . .................... . --- Pes: night latch @ , __ /pc .................... .. 3. Closet and Cabinets ___ pes. pullers@ , __ lpc ......... .. .......... ___ pes. drawer knobs @ , __ l pc ..................... 4. Automatic Door Closers _ _ _ pes. door closers @ , , , , , ........... , , __ / pc. .. . .. ...... .. .. ...... , ___ _ 5. Sliding Door Track _ __ pes. door track@> , __ /pc. .. .. . .. . . .. ... .. .. .. . '---6. ___ pes. friction catches @ , __ /pc . ............ ........ . '---- 7.

___ pes. door stoppers@ , pc . .. : ................. . , ____ _ IX. ROOFING .............. , .. .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . . .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. . . . .. . .. .. . P _ __ _ A. Corrugated G.t. Sheet G.A. 26 --- pes. 32 X 6'..()"@ , __ fpc. .. . .. ..... .. ......... , ___ _ - -- pes. 32 X 7' ..()" @ , __ /pc. ........ .. ......... ..... , ____ _ - - - pes. 32'" X 8' ..()"''@ , pc. , ____ _ --- pes, :Jr X 12'-0"'@ , __ / pc. ..................... ,. _ _ _ _ 321 322 B. Plain Galvanized Iron Straps GA. 26 _ _ _ pes. as x a -o @ , _ _ / pc . .... :. ..... ....... .... , C. G.l. Roof Flashing$, ridge rolls and Valleys __._ _ _ pes. 36" X 8'-0'"@ For 2" x 3"' cut into 1" xs , __ /pc. .. ... .. .. ..... .... . .. , ___ _ 0. G.l. Gutter ___ pes. 8' -0" length @ P _ _ lpc. .. ... .... ............ P ____ _ E. downspout - - - pes. 2" X 4" X 8' -0" @ , __ lpc. ..................... , ____ _ F. G.l. Rivets _ _ _ kilos rivets@ , __ G. G.l. Washer ___ kilos washer@ , ____ _ P __ /kilo .. .. ... .. . .. .. ....... P ___ _ _ H. Lead Washer _ _ _ kilo lead washer@ P _ _ / kilo ..................... ' --- -I. ___ kilos roofing nail @ P _ _ /kilo ............... .... .. , ____ _ J. Nicolite Bar ___ pes. nicolite lead@ , __ l pc. ....... ...... . .. ..... ' --- -K. Muriatic Acid _ _ _ bottles@ P _ _ / bot. ..................... ' - ---L. Copper rivet for copper rivets @ P box '-- - ---- box copper rivets@ P __ /box . .. ...... . .. . ..... .. . ' ---'---ESnMATING GUIDE Guide the sloped Section of the roofing, with a 0.30 (12.) overlap. Cou nt the number of pieces of roofing using corresponding lengths 1ess If 8' -()" length is used, effective length is 7' .()". To get the number of pes. sidewise, divide the total width i

n inches by V" (effective width) using a 32" corrugated sheet. Iron Straps- one 36 .. x 8'-0" plain G.l. can produce 380 pes. of 1" x 9'" strap for 2" x 3"' purlin and 340 pes. of 1" x 10" for a 2"' x 4 .. purlin. Roofing Nail - 102 pcs. /k.g Rivets - 180 a . 6' -0" corrugated roofing wiU use 6 rivet/sheet 8'-0 corrugated roofing wit! use 9 rivets/sheet 12' -o corrugated roofing will use 12 rivets/sheet Nicolite bar-count the number of joints to be-soldered 1 joint will use 1/ 4 of a bar. Muriatic acid-use 10 cc per nicolite bar. B. Tegula Cement Tile Roof _ __ pes. 16 1/ 2 .. x 13 .. @ , __ lpc. . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . '----- - - pes. 10 1/2" x 15 3/4* ridge roll @ P __ /pc. .. .. .. .. . .. . '----C. Spanish Tile Roof pes. 31 em x 31 em @ , __ / pc. ..... .... .. ..... .... . '--- -- -- pes. top ridge 29 x 27' em @ , __ /pc. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .... , ____ _ D. Wood Shingles - - - pes. - 3/8 .. X 3,. X 18 .. @ , __ /pc. ....... ... ........... , ___ _ ___ sq.m. asphalt felt paper@ P __ /sq.m. .. ... .. . .. .. . .. .. . '-------kilos 11/4" G.l. Nail@ P __ / kilo .. .. . . . . .. . . . . ... .... ft ____ _ E. Long Span Colored Roof ___ pes. 32" x any length @ P __ / L.M. ............. ..... P ___ _ ___ kilos rivets@ P __ /kilo ........ .... ... :. .... '---- --- kilos washers@ , __ /tube .. ..... .... .. .... . '------- sealant@ P __ /tube .............. .... '------- L.M. gutter@ P __ / L.M. .................. P ___ _ ___ L.M. ridge roll@ fi __ / LM ....... .... .. ........ P ___ _ ESTIMATING GUIDE Tegula: 11 tiles/Sq.m. (5 kilos/pc.) Spanish Ti/e-16 tiles/sq.m. (2.75 kg./sheet} Long Span- effective width is 2B 1/2'" length up to 60 feet Wood Shingle-.approx. 50 pes. of 3x 18. / sq.m. comes from 3" to 14" width and 16" and 18 .. length Use 6 .. exposure. X. SPECIAL TREATMENTS . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. P ___ _ ___ liter soil poisoning liquid @ P __ /liter . . .. .... .. .. .. . .. . '------- liters wood preservative @ , -Itt. . . . . .. .. .. . .......... , _ __ _ 323 324

' ___ liters silicone clear for covering of brick wat and/or synthetic watt @ P _ _ /liter ................ .. ___ rolls cemvattlene waterproofing asphalt sheets @ , _ _ !roll ................. , .. . or total sq.m. @ p __ / sq.m .................. . ___ sq.m. polyethylene sheets for damprooflng stab on fitl and basement wall touching the soil@ P_/sq.m . ....... ... ....... . ___ liters fire retardant@ , __ / gal. ................. . --- liters coal tar@ P __ lliter .... ....... ..... . . ' - - ~ - , __ __,_ __ , ___ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ XI. PLUMBING 1. FIXTURES a) Water Closets 1. Master elongated W.C. Colored with Tank@P_/pc. ..................... '---2 pes. children's W.C. colored@ , __ /pes ...... ...... ..... ...... ........ , ___ 1 pc. guest w.c. colored @ , __ / pc .. .. .... .. .... .. . . .. ... .. .. . .. 1 pc. maid's w.c. white@ , /pc. .... ....... .... ........ ...... . , ____ _ b) Lavatories 1 - lavatory for master's @ p __ /unit .... ...... ....... ... ......... . , ____ _ 1 - lavatori for boy's @ P ....---.:-/unit ..... .... ................... .. , ____ _ 1 - lavatory for girl's @ P /unit ............................ .. , ____ _ 1 - lavatory for guest @ P __ /unit ............ : ......... ..... .. . , ____ _ 1 - lavatory for maid's @ . P / unit ............................. . , ____ _ c) 1 - Bathtub for masters@ , __ /unit . . ..... .. .... .. . .... .. .. .. . .. . d) Kitchen sink 1 - stainless k.s. double bowl @ , __ / unit .. . .. ... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 1 - 16 x 24'" enamel type k.s. @ P ___ /unit .............. ...... .......... '----~ .

_ , ____ _

'--- -. '-----

, ____ _ e. Shower Heads &f'!d Values 1 - 3 way diverter value and U. S. multi-adjuster shower head for master's@ ft __ /unit ........ ....... ' ----3 - hot and cold shower valve and head for children's guest @ P __ /unit .............. .. .............. p 1 - single .cold shower valve and head @p __ /unit .................. ' - - --2. G.l. PIPES AND FITTINGS pes. 2" + x 6.00 m sch. 40@ P __ /pc . .................... . , ___ pes. 1" + x 6.00 m sch. 40@ p __ / pc ..................... . , ___ pes. 3/4" + x 6.00 m sch. 40 @P _ _ /pc ........... ....... . , ___ pes. 1/2" + x 6.00 m sch. 40 @ f' __ /pc .. ................. . , ___ pes. coupling 2" + p __ / pc ... .................. . , ___ pes. coupling 1" + p __ /pc . . : .................. . , ___ pes. coupling 3/4" + P __ /pc . ... .... .... : ........ . , _ __ pes. coupling 1/2" + , __ /pc .................... .. , _ __ pes. Tee 2 .. + P __ / pc ... ........... ...... .. , _ __ pes. Tee 1" + . P __ /pc .... , ........ ........ . , _ __ pes. Tee 3/4"@ p __ /pc ... ......... .......... . , ___ Tee 1/2" + , __ / pe ..................... . --- pes. elbow r + . , p __ /pc . .............. ..... .. ___ pes. elbow 1,. , , __ fpc . ............. .... : ~ .. , ___ pes. elbow 3/4* + ' pc . ................. ... . - -- pes. elbow 1/2" + , P __ /pc . ; .................. .. , ___ pes. street elbow 2" +

p __ /pc ................ ..... . , _ __ pes. street elbow 1"'+@ p _ _ /pc . .. ........ : ......... . , ___ pes. street elbow 3 / 4 ~ + p __ / pc ............. ... ..... .. , ___ pes. street elbow 1 12 + , __ /pe., ............. ....... .. ___ pes. bushing 2,; + , '- __ fpc ........................ .. , 325 _326 ___ pes. bushing 1 +@ , __ lpc. ............ ..... . . .. , ____ _ ___ pes. bushing 3/4" t@ , __ /pc. ..................... '------- pes. bushing 1/2" + p _ _ /pc. .. ......... ... ....... '----NIPPLES- 2", 3", 4", 5", 6", ___ pes. short nipple 2" + x 3", @. p _ _ / pc. . . ...... .. .. .. ... .. .. '------- pes. short nipple 1" + x 3", @ p _ _ /pc. . .... .. .. .. .. ... ..... '----- -- pes. short nipple 3/4 + x 3", @ p __ /pc. .. . .. . . . ... .. .. .. . '---- -- pes. short nipple 1/2" + x 3", @ , _ _ l pc. . . .. . .... .. .. . . ... , ___ _ ___ union patented 2" @ p /pc. .. ... . .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . p ____ _ --- union patended 1"@ . P __ /pc . ........... :... ... ... '----- - - union patented 3/4" , __ / pc. .. ............ .. ..... '--- -- - - pes. union patented 1 /2" P __ / pc. .... .... ..... ... .. ... '----- - - rolls teflon tape @ P __ /roll ............. .. .... .. P or _ _ oz. white lead@ , __ !oz. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . , ___ _ _ 3. VALVES ___ stop cock 1 /2" USP @ p _ _ /pc. ........... .. .. . .. .. . '------- check valve swing type 1 /2"@ p _ _ /pc. ................. .. .. '------- gate valve 1" USP@ p __ / pc ................. ... . : '------- gate vavle 3/4" USP @ p __ /pc . ............ :......... '--- -4. SOIL PIPES AND FITTINGS (05. and .10 x 1.5 em) ___ pes. 4" x 5'-0" Double Hub Pipe@ P _ _ /pc .. , ......... ___ pes. 4" x 5'-0" Double Hub Pipe@ P __ / pe ........ .. ___ pes. 2" x 5'-0" D.H. Pipe@ P __ lpc ............... .... .. . ___ pes. 4"' x 4" wye@

P __ /pc .................... .. ___ pes. 2" x 2" wye@ p _ _ / pc . .. .... ... .... .... .. .. ___ pes. 4 x 4" Sanitary Fee @ , __ /pc: ..................... . _ __ pes. 4"' x 2'" Sanitary Fee @ , _ _ /pc ..................... . ___ pes. 1/4bend , / , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , ____ _ , __ l pc.... ... ..... ... .. . . ... , _ _ __ _ ___ pes. 1/ 4 bend @ , __ /pc. .................. ... '-- ----- pes. 1/8 bend@ P _ _ /pc. .. . .. .. ... .. . . . .. .. . . ' - ------ pes. 1/ 16 bend @ , _ _ / pc. .... ...... ..... ...... ' --- ---- pes . 1/ 16 bend @ . P _ _ / pc. ..... ...... ... .. .... . '-----' ___ kilos Oakum@ P _ _ /kilo... ... ... ...... ...... P _ ___ _ ___ kilos pig lead@ , _ _ / kilo .. ... .... .. . ..... ... . P _ ___ _ or _ _ liters A and 8 epoxy adh,"$ive pipe caulking@ , __ ! lit. .. . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . , _ ___ _ 5. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL OF PVC Plastic Vinyl Pipes (. 05 and . 10 x 3.00 m) ___ pes. 4H x 10' ~ " pvc. pipe @ , __ /pc ...... ... . .. ..... '-- - --- pes. 2" x 10' "0" pvc pipe @ , __ /pe. .. ..... .. ......... ... '-- - ----pes. 1/ 4 bend pvc 4" @ , _ _ / pe. . . . . . ..... ... ..... ... , _ _ _ _ ___ pes. 1/ 4 bend pvc 2" @ P _ _ / pc. ....... ........ ... ... '-- ----- pes. 1/8 bend pvc 4'' @ P _ _ /pc.-.. .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . '-- ----- pes. 1/8 bend pvc 2" @ , _ _ / pc. .... . . . . . . . .... .. . . .. ' ------- peS. 1/ 16 bend pvc 4"@ , _ _ f pc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. ' - ------ pes. 1/16 bend pvc 2" @ ,. _ _ /pc. .... .. ...... .. ....... ' - ------ pes. 4" x 4" wye pvc@ ,. _ _ /pc. .. . .. . . .... .. .. ... .... ' - - ----- pes. 4" x 2" wye pvc @ , _ _ l pe. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. ... .. .. , _ _ __ _ ___ pes. 2" x 2" wye pvc @ , _ _ /pc ... .... .... ... :. .. ... . '-- ----- pes. pvc elbow 4" @ P _ _ /pc. .. . . . .... . . . .. ... .... '-- - ---- pes. pvc elbow 2" @ , __ / pe. . . .. .... .. .. .. . .. .. .. , _ ___ _

___ pes. pvc sanitary Tee 4"@ , __ / pc. .................... . ' ------- pes. Sanitary Tee 2"@ , __ /pc ........... : .... . .. . .. ' - - ----- pes. P-Trap 2"@ , __ fpc. .. ...... .. .. ..... . .. . ' - - --327 328 <: ,"": .(" .. .. . ___ pes. pvc plug 4"'@ P _ _ / pc. . ............... .. ... ,_. _ __ _ ___ pes. pvc plug 2"@ P _ _ lpc. ........... .... .. . .. . '----_ _ ....;\....; liters solvent cement sealant @ P __ lliter .. . . . .. .. . . .. .. .. . '--- -6 . OTHER ITEMS 1 pc. water meter@ p __ /pc. .. .... ........... ...... .......... '----1 unit 30 gallons water heater @ , _ _ /pc ......... ................. .. .... .. '-- - 1 unit 1,000 gal. G. I. #16 water tank @ P _ _ / tank ............ ... , . .. .. '--- - 1 unit urinal @ P _ _ /item .... ... ......................... . '-- --- -- units bidet@ P __ lunit ............ ..... . P _ _ __ _ _ _ _ pes. Toilet paper holder @ , __ /pc. .. .. .... .... .... .... . , ___ _ ___ pes. soap holder@ p __ /pc. .............. ....... '---- --- pes. curtain rods @ , __ /pc ................... . ... , - - ---- pes. towel rack@ , __ /pc. ................. .... '-- - -- -- pes. medicine cabinet@ , __ / pc. ... .. ....... ... ... ... , ___ _ ___ pes. toothbrush holder & Tumbler@ , __ /pc. . .... P 7. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE - -- unit septic tank hollow blocks steelbars, cement, sand gravel formworks, etc .................... .'.... .... .. '---- - --pes. 0.60 + x 1.00 m concrete pipe @ , _ _ / pc. ....... .. .. .. ... .. . .. '--- ---- pes. 0.45 + x 1.00 m concrete pipe @ , __ /pc. .......... .... .. .. .. . '------ pcs.0.30+ x 1.00m concrete pipe @ , _ _ /pc. ................. .... , ___ _ _ __ pes. 0.20 + x 1.00 m cement pipe @ , _ _ /pc .. ... ..... .... .... . : . , _ _ _ _ _ _ __ pcs.0.1S+x 1.00m cement pipe@ , __ /pc. .. .. .. .... . .. .. .. .... , _ _ _ _ _ __ pcs. 0.10+x1.00m@ , __ /pc . .. ;........ .... .. .... , ___ _

XII. ELECTRICAL ....................................................... .. .. ....... ....... . A. FIXTURES _ _ _ pes. chandelier @ ft_ _ '------- pes. pintights @ P_ _ P ___ _ _ _ _ _ pes. ceiling lights @ P__ p. ___ _ _ _ __ pes. light switch single gang@ , __ /pc. .... .. ..... .. ........ , ___ _ ___ pes. -convenience outlets@ , __ /pc. .. .. ...... .. ......... '----- - - pes. weatherproof conv. outlets @ P __ / pc......... '----- -- pes. twa gang light switch @ P __ / pc. ..................... '----- - - pes. three gang light switch @ ,_. __ /pc. .. ................ ... '---- - - - pes. three-way light switch @ p __ /pc ..... ,.. ........... ... '----- - - pes. range outlet 3 prongs@ , __ /pc.. .... .. ..... .......... , ___ _ B. RIGID CONDUIT PIPES & FITTINGS _ _ _ ~ - 1/2" + x 10' 0" conduit pipe@ P __ / pc. .. ... .. .. .. . '----- - - pes. 3/4" + x 10' -0" conduit pipe@P __ / pc. ... ......... '------- pes. locknut 1/2"@ p __ /pc. .... ... ... .... .. ..... '----- - - pes. 1/2" 0 coupling@ p __ /pc. ...... ... ........... p. ___ _ _ _ __ pes. 1/2N + coupling @ 'f __ / pc. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . , ____ _ ___ pes. 1" + x 10'-0" conduit pi pe@ P __ /pc. .. .. ...... .. '----- - - pes. 3/ 4" +coupling@ p __ /pc. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. '---- - - pes. 1" +coupling@ , __ /pc. ......... . .. .. . . .. . .. '----- - - pes. 1/2" Locknut@ , __ /pc .. ................. ... , ___ _ _ __ pes. 3/4" Locknut @ p __ / pc. ... .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. p. ____ _ _ __ pes. 1 Locknut @ P_.lpc. ..... .. .... ........ .. '---- - - pes. 1 /2" bushing @ p __ /pc. .. ...... .. ... ... .. .. . '---- ---pes. 3/4" bushing@ p __ /pc. ...... .. .. ........... '----- -- pes. 1" bushing@ p __ /pc. .. .. ... .. . ...... .. .. . '---- C. WIRING- Stranded _ _ _ rolls No. 14' T.W. Wire@ p_ _ / roll .. ... ... .. .. .. ...... . P ____ _ ,. ____ _ 329 330 ___ rolls No.' 12 T.W. Wire@ '-- _ /roll ..... . -- . ... .. .. '--- ---- rolls No. 10 T.W. Wire@ , _ _ /roll.................. .. ... '---- ---rolls No.8 T.W. Wire@

, __ /roll ........... ~ . . . . . . . . . '------- rolls No.6 T.W. Wire@> P __ /rot1 ... .. . .. ... ... .. ... .. '------- rolls plastic tape M2@ P __ /roll .. . .. .. ..... .. .. .. .. . '--- ---- rolls rubber tape M2@ , __ /roll...... .. ...... ... .... '-- -D. PULL BOXES ~ - - pes. 4" x 6" x 6" with cover @P _ _ /pc. ................. '---- -- pes. 4" x a x 10" with cover @ P __ lpc. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . ' - - ~ E. JUNCTION BOXES ___ pes. 2" x 4" x 4" with 1/2" knockout @ P __ /pc. . .. . ' - - ~ - _ __ .. pes. 2" x 4 .. x 4" with 3/4" k.o.@P __ /pe...... .. ..... '-- --- -- pc. 2" x 4" x 4" with 1" k.o.@ , _ _ / pc. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. , ____ _ F. UTILITY BOX _ __ pes. 2" x 2" x 4" with 1/ 2" k.o.@ fl _ _ /pc. .... .. .. .. . '--- - G. OTHERS _ __ pes. service entrance cap 2 1/2@ P __ l pc. .. .. ..... . '-- - - -- pes. secondary rack 3 poles with 3 spools @ P __ tpc .... . ........ .. .. ... :. '-- - - H . . CIRCUIT BREAKER Example: 70 at main 3 poles with panel board 6 branches-2 at 15- AT -2 p . 2 at 20- AT -2 p 1 at 20- AT -2 p 1 at 40- AT -2 p or alternative Fuse Cutouts J. Substitute Alternative PVC electric pipes XIII. PAINTING ...... ...... .... ....... ... .. . .. ....... .. ............. ................... 5'-----_ __ pes. sandpaper@ P _ _ /pc. .. ... .. ... . .. .. .. ... . '-- --- -- pes. sandpaper@ , _ _ /pe .. . . , . .. :.. .... . ... . . '----___ liters red lead @ , __ /lit............ ...... .... , ____ _ ___ liters neutralizer@ , __ /lit. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . , ___ _ _ ___ kilos concrete putty fillers @ , __ / kg . ....... .. .. .......... , ____ _ ___ kilos wood paste filler@ , lit. .. .. .. .. .......... ... , _ ___ _ _ __ liters sanding sealers @ , __ / lit. . . . . . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . ' - ---_ __ liters lacquer thinner _ __ liters turpentine ___ liters spar varnish ___ small cans tinting colors@ , __ lean................ ..... ' - - --- -- liters roofing paint liters exterior wood paint @

, __ /lit. .. ... .. . , _ ___ _ _ __ liters .exterior concrete paint @ P __ /ltr. ................. .. .. P _ ___ _ _ __ liters steel window paint @ P __ /ltr. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ' - ---- -- liters interior concrete paint @ p_._/ltr. .... ................. ' --- -- -- liters textured paint @ P __ /ltr. ..... .. ..... .. ... .... ' ----ESTIMATtNG GUIDE Solve area in sq . meter to be painted It is safe to use 25 to 30 sq. m. coverage per 4 liters or 1 gallon to a 250 to 300 sq. ft. area. For textured paint-from 5 to 12 sq. m. coverage per 41iters for sealers, putt y,etc. -from 10 to 20 sq. m. coverage per 4 liters. XIV. PERMITS AND LICENCES a. Zoning . . .. .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . ' - --- b. Fire departments@ P1.00/P1 ,000 cos . . .. .. P _ ___ _ c. Building Officials . .. .. . .... .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . P ____ _ Electrical@ P1.00/per outlet .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ' --- - Plumbing @ P3.00/ per fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . ' - --- architectural@ P3.00/sq.m. .. .. .. .. .. .. ' - --- mechanical@ P30.00/ Ton A. C. .. .. .. P _ ___ _ elevator@ 3,500 .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. p_ _ ___ _ excavation@ 1.00/ cu.m. .... ...... .. ... P ____ _ Fencing@ 1.00/ 1 in. meter ... ... ..... . ' ---- 331 . - ' -. . . '\ ' .. . .-. ., . SUMMARY I. MOBILIZATION ........................ ...................................... . ,. ___ _ II. EARTHWORKS .. ..... ... ..... ........ .... ..... .... .... .... .. ....... ........ .. . ,. ___ _ Ill . CONCRETE WORKS ....................................................... .. , ___ _ FORMWORKS .. ..... ... ...... .. ..... ... ...... .. ...... ... ...... . .. . .... ..... . tV. MASONRY WORKS .......................... ..... .. ' , ___ _ VI. WOOOWORKS ................... .. ................ ... .................... .. . , ___ _ . . VII. ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES ..... ... ..... .... ..... ... .... ..... ... .... . .. . , ___ _ VIII. HAROWARES ............................................ .... : .... .. . ...... . , ___ _ IX. ROOFING .... .... ... ..... .... ... .. ... .... ..... ... ...... .. ....

. ... ...... .. ... .. , ___ _ X. SPECIAL TREATMENTS .... ............................. : ... ............ . . ,. ___ _ XI. PLUMBING .. ..... ... .. ....................... ......................... ..... . , ___ _ XII. ELECTRICAL .... ...... .. ...... .. ..... ... ....... .. ..... .. ....... ... .. : .... .... . ,. ___ _ XIII. PAINTING ............................. : ............................... ........ . , ___ _ XIV. PERMITS AND LICENSES , ___ _ TOTAL .. .... .. ... ...... ....... .................... . , ___ _ XV. PLUS 5% CONTINGENCIES ..... .. ... .. . .. .. ... ... ....... . .... ... . . : . .' .. , ___ _ PLUS LABOR Approx. 40% ...... : .. .............. .. ..... '==== SUB-TOTAL ...... ;....................... P ___ _ PLUS Approx. ;2% PROFIT .. .. . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. '==== SUB-TOTAL ...... .. ....... .. ............. P _ _ _ _ PLUS3% CONTRACTORS TAX .......... .... . P _ _ _ _ TOTAL APPROX. COST .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. '== = = 332 OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS 333 334 SUBJECT OWNER ADDRESS PROJECT LOCATION ARCHITECT LICENSE NO. PTA ADDRESS SPECIFICATION MR. and MRS. JOHNNY BALANGCOD NO. 69 ClAMOR STREET SUYAT GARDENS, BAGUIO CITY TWO-STOREY RESIDENCE NO. 2 ASSUMPTION ROAD BAGUIO CITY GEORGES. SALVAN 1939 NO. 30 MASINI STREET BAGUIO CITY OUTLINE. SPECIFICATIONS I. SITE WORK A. WORK INCLUDED 1. Staking out of building, establishment of lines, grades and benchmarks. 2. All excavation work including all neceSsary shoring bracing, and drainage of storm water from site. 3. All backfilling, filling and grading, removal of excess material from site .

4. Protection of property, work and structures, workmen, and other people from damage and injury. B. LINES, GRADES AND BENCHMARKS 1. Stake out accurately the lines of the building and of the other structures i ncluded in the contract, and establish grades therefore, after which secure approval by Ar chitect before any excavation work is commenced. 2. Erect basic batter boards and basic ref_!!rence marks, at such places where they will not be disturbed during the construction of the foundations. C. EXCAVATION 1. Structural Excavations-Excavations shall be to the depths indicated bearing values. Excavations for footings and foundations carried below required depths shall be filled with concrete, and bottom of such shall be level. All structural exca vations shall extend a sufficient distance from the walls and .footings to allow for proper erection and dismantling of forms, for installation of service and for inspecti on. All excavations shall be inspected and approved before pouring any concrete, laying underground services or placing select fill materials. The Contractor shall control the grading in the vicinity of all excavated areas to pre vent surface drainage running into excavations. Water which accumulates in exc avated areas shall be removed by pumping before fill or concrete in placed therei n. D. FILLINGS AND BACKFILUNG 1. After forms have been removed from footings, pi_ers, foundations, walls , etc. and when concrete work is hard enough to resist pressure resulting from fill, backf illing may then be done. Materials-excavated may be used for backfilling. All filling shall .be placed in layers not exceeding six (61 inches in thickness, each layer b eing thoroughly compacted and rammed by wetting, tamping, rolling. E. PLACING AND COMPACTING FILL 1. Common Fill-shall be approved site-excavated material free from roots, stump s and other perishable or objectionable matter. 2. Select FUI -shall be placed where indicated and shall consist of crush ed gravel crushed rock, or a combinations thereof. The material shall be free from adobe, vegetable matters and _shall be thoroughly tamped after placing. 335 3. Before placing fill material, the surface upon whiCh it will be placed shal l be cleared . of all brush roots, vegetable matter and debris, scarified and thoroughly wetted to insure good bonding between the ground. F. DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIALS 1. Any excess material remaining after completion of the earthwork shall be dis posed

of by hauling and spreading in nearby spoil areas designated by the OWNER. Exca vated material deposited in spoil areas shall be Graded to a uniform surface. II. CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE: 336 A. GENERAL 1. Unless otherwise specified herein, concrete work shall conform to the requi rements of the ACI Building Code. Full cooperation shall be given other t rades to ins tall embedded items. Provisio'ns shall be made for setting items not placed in the f orms. Before concrete is placed, embedded it ems shall have been inspected and test ed for concrete aggregates and other materials shall have been done. B. MATERIALS 1. Cement for the concrete shall conform to the requirements of specificati ons for Portland Cement (ASTM C-150) . 2. Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from other injurious a mounts of oUs, acids, alkaline, organic materials or ot her substances that may be del eterious to concrete or steel. 3. Rne Aggregates shall consist of hard, tough, durable, uncoateq part icles. The shape of the particles shall be generally rounded or cubicle and reasonably free from flat or elongated particles. The stipulated percentages of fines in the sand sh all be obtained either by the processing of natural sand or by the product ion of a sui tably graded manufactured sahd. ' 4. Coarse Aggregate shall consist of gravel , crushed gravel or rock, or a co mbination of gravel and rock, coarse aggregates shall consist of hard, tough, durable , clean and uncoated particles. "'fhe sizes of coarse aggrega.tes to be used in the various parts of the work shall be in accordance with the following: Size - 3/ 4" f or all concreting work 5 ~ Reinforcing Bars shall conform to the requirements of ASTM standard spec ifications for Billet Steel Bars for concrete reinforcement (A 15-625) and to Specrti cation for minimum requirements for the deformed steel bars for concrete reinforcement (A 3()5.56). All secondary ties such as stirrups, spirals and inserts may be plain bars. The main reinforcing bars shall be as follows: No. 4 (1/ 2") 12 mm No. 3 (3/ 8") 10 mm No.5 (5/ 8 .. ) 16 mm No. 6 (3/ 8'") 20 mm No. 7 (7/8") 22 mm No. 8 ( 1"') 25 mm .. fy - 33,000 psi fy - 40,000 psi

C. PROPORTIONING AND MIXING 1. Proportions of all materials entering into the concrete shall be as follows: Class "A" Cement Sand Gravel 1 2 4 Class " 8" 1 2 1/2" 5 Class "C" 1 3 6 2. Class of Concrete-concrete shall have a 28-day cylinder.strength of 3,000 ps i, for all concrete work, unless otherwise indicated in the plans. 3. Mixing-concrete shall be machine.mixed. Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregates. In the absence of a con crete mixer, manual mixing is allowed. D. FORMS 1. General- Forms shall be used wherever necessary to confine the conc rete and shape it to the required lines, or to insure the concrete of contamination with materials caving from adjacent, excavated surfaces. Forms shall have sufficient st rength to withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concret e, and shall be maintained rigidly in correct position. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from the concrete. Forms for surfaces against which backfill is not be shall be lines with a form grade plywood. 2. Cleaning and oiling of Form-Before placing the concrete, the contact surfaces of the form shall be cleaned of encrustations of mortar, the grout or other fore ign material, and shall be coated with a commercial form oil that will effectively p revent sticking and will not stain the concrete surfaces. 3. Removal of Forms-forms whall be removed in a manner which will prevent age to be concrete. Forms shall not be removed withqut approval. Any repairs of surface imperfections shall be performed at once and airing shalt be started as soon as the surface is sufficiently hard to permit it without further damage. E. PLACING REINFORCEMENT: 1. General-Steel reinforcement shall be provided as indicated, together with all necessary wire ties, -chairs, spacer1, supported and ou.r devices necessary to i nstaH and secure the (einforcement property. All reinforcement, when placed, shall be free from loose, flaky rust and scale, oil grease, clay and other coating and foreign substances that would reduce or destroy its bond with concrete. Reinforcement shall be pieced accurately and secured in place by use o f metat or concrete supports, spacers and ties. Such supports shall be of sufficient streng th to maintain the operation. The supports shall be used in such manner that they will not be exposed or contribute in any way, to the discoloration or deterioration of th e con-

crete. F. CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE: 1. Conveying - concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to forms as rapidly as pr acticable, by methods which will prevent or loss of ingredients. There w ifl be no vertical drop.greater than 1.5 meters except where equipment is p rovided to prevent segregation and where specifically authorized. 337. 2. Placing -Concrete shall be worked readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around all reinforcement and embedded items without permitting the material to segregate. Concrete shall be deposited as close as possible to its final pos ition in. the forms so that flow within the mass does not exceed two (2) meters and conse quent segregation is reduced to a minimum near forms or embedded items, or elsewhere as directed, the discharge shall be so controlled that the concrete may be effectively compacted into horizontal layers not exceeding 30 centimeters in depth within the maximum lateral movement specified. 3. Time interval between i mixing and placing. Concrete shall be placed be fore initial set has occuted and t>etore it has contained its water content for more th an 46 minutes. 4. Consolidation of Concrete-Concrete shall be consolidated with the aid of me chanical vibrating equipment and supplemented by handspading and tamping. Vibrators shall not be inserted into lower coursed that have commenced initial set; and reinforcement embedded in concepts beginning to set or already set shall not be disturbed by vibrators. Consolidation around major embedded parts shall be by h and spading and tamping and vibrators shall not be used. 5. Placing concrete through reinforcement . In placing concrete through reinforcement, care shall be taken that no segregation of the coarse aggregate occurs . On the bottom of beams and slabs, where the congestion of steel near the forms make s placing difficult, a layer of mortar of the same cement-sand ratios as used in concrete shall be first deposited to cover the surfaces. G. CURING: 1. General: All concrete shall be moist cured for a period not less than seven (7) consecutive days by an approved method or combination applicable to local condition s. 2. Moist Curing-The surface of the concrete shall be kept continuously wet by co vering with burlap plastic or other approved materials thoroughly saturat ed with water and keeping the covering wet spraying or intermittent hosing. H. FINISHING 1. Concrete surfaces shall not be plastered unless otherwise indicated. Expos

ed concrete surfaces shall be formed w;th plywood, and after removal of forms, the s urfaces shall be smooth, true to line and shall present or finished appearance exc ept for minor defects which can be easily be repaired with patching with cement morta r, or can be grounded to a smooth surface to remove all joint marks of the form wor k. 2. Concrete slabs on Fill. The concrete slabs on fill shall be laid on a prepa red foundation consisting of subgrade and granular .till with thickness equal to the thick ness of overlaying slab except as indicated otherwise. Ill. MASONRY WORKS '338 A. MATERIALS 1. Concrete Hollow Blocka shall have a minimum face shell thickness of 1" (.02 5). Nominal size shall be o x 8'" x 16" minimum compressive strength sha ll be as follows: I Class A - 900 psi Class B - 750 psi All units shall be stored \for a period of not less than 28 days (inc luding curing . 'period) and shall not be delivered to the job site prior to that ti me unless the equal or exceed those mentioned il'l these specifications. 2. Wall Reinforcement shall be No. 3 (3/8") or 10 mm steel bars. 3. Sand shalt be river sand, well screened, clean, hard, sharp sillicious, free from loam, silt or other impurities, composed of grains of varying sizes within the f ollowing limits: Sieve No. 9 16 100 Passing Retained Retained Percent 100 5 95 4. Cement shall be standard portland cement, ASTM C- 150-68 Type 1. 5. Mortar-Mix Mortar from 3 to 5 minutes in such quantities as neede d for immediate use. Retampering will not be permitted if mortar stiffens because of p remature setting. Discard such materials as well as those which have not been use d within one hour after mixing. Proportioning: Cement mortar shall be one 11) part portland cement and two (2 ) parts sand by volume but not more than one 11) part pbrtland cement and three (3 ) parts sand by volume.

B. ERECTION 1. All masonry shall be laid plumb, to line, with level and acc urately spaced courses, and with each course breaking joint with the source below. Bond shall b e kept plumb throughout; corners and reveals shall be plumb and true. Units with greater than 12 percent absorption shall be wet before laying. Work required to be built in with masonry, including anchors, wall plugs and accessories, shall be b uilt in as the erection progresses. 2. Masonry Units Each course shall be solidly bedded in portland cement mortar. All units shall be damp when laid units shall be showed into place not laid, in a fu n bed of unfurrowed mortar. All horizontal and vertical points shall be complet ely filled with mortar when and as laid. Each course shall be bonded at corners and interse c tions. No cells shall be left open in face surfaces. All cells shall be filled u p with mor tar for exterior walls. Units terminating against beam or slab soffits shall be wedged tight with mortar. Do not lay cracked, broken or defaced block. 3. Lintels shall be of concrete and shall be enforced as shown in the drawings. Untels shall have a minimum depth of 0.20 (8") and shall extend at least 0.20 (8"') on each side of opening. C. WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALlATION: 1. Plastering: Clean and evenly wet surfaces. Apply scratch coat with sufficien t force to form good keys. Cross scratch coat upon attaining its initial set; keep damp. Ap ply brown coat after scratch coat has set at least 24 hours after scratch a pplication. Ughtly scratch brown coat; keep moist for 2 days; allow to dry out. Oo not apply finish until browr:t coat has seasoned for 7 days. JuSt before applying coat , wet 339 340 brown coat again. Aoat finish coat to true even surface; troweJ in mannerthat wi ll force sand particles down into plaster; with final traweling, leave surfaces bami shed smooth, free from rough areas, trowel marks, cheeks, other blemishes. Keep fini sh coat moist for at least 2 days; thereafter protect against rapid drying until p roperly, thoroughly cured. 2. Pea Gravel Washout: Before start o1 work, provide Qesired pitch for drainage. Roughen concrete surface with pick or similar tool. Clean off looSe pa rticles and other materials which may prevent bond, keep surface wet for at least 4 hours before applying. Scratch coat of mortar. Coat not more than 3/4" thick. Apply

ture of pea gravel and portland cement .with pressure to obtain solid adhesion. Trowel pea gravel to hard, smoot h, even plane and rod and float to uniform surf ace of even texture. When surface is semi-dry evenly spray surfaces with clean wa ter with spray machine to wash out loose cement to part exposed pea gravel . Remove and wash down remaining cement paste with soft brush, to leave pea gravel i n its natural texture and appearance. Before applying pea gravel finish, sut.lit sam ples to owner for approval. D. SCAFFOLDING Provide all scaffolding required for masonry work, includi ng cleaning down on completion, remove. E. VITRIFIED FLOOR TILE INSTALlATION: 1. Do not start floor tiling oceuring in space requiring both floor and wal l tile setting has been completed. 2. Before spreading setting bed, establish border lines center wires in both directions to permit laying pattern with minimum of cut tiles. Lay floors without borders from center line outward. Make adjustment at walls. 3. Clean concrete sub floor moisten jt without soaking. Sprinkle dry cemen t over Spread setting bed mortar on concrete and tamp to assure good bond over the entire area then screed to smooth, level bed. Set average setting bed thickn ess at 3/4'" but never less than 1/2". F. WALL TILE INSTALLATIONS: 1. Scratch coat for application as foundation coat shall be at most 1/2 ". While still plastic, deeply score scratch coat or scratch and cross scratch. Protect scratch coat and keep reasonably moist within seasoning period. Use mortar for scratch, float . coats, within one hour after mixing. Retempering of partially hardened mortar is not permitted. Set scratch coat shall be cured for at least 2 days before starting t ile setting. 2. For float coat use one part portland cement, one part hydrated lime (optiona l), 3 1/2 parts sand. 3. Setting Wall Tiles: soak wall tilll thoroughly in clean water before setting. Set wall tile by trowelling neat portland cement skim coat on float coat or apply skim coat to back of each ti!e unit. Immediately float tile in place. Make join ts straight, level and perpendicular. Maintain vertical joints plumb. 4. Grouting: Grout joints in wall tile with neat white cement immediately after suitable area of tile has been Tool joints slightly concave, cut off excess mo rtar and wipe from face tile. Roughen interstices of depressions. In mortar joints after grout been cleaned from surface. Fill to line of cushion tile bases or covers with

mortar. Make joints between wall plumbing and other built in fixtures with li ght co lored caulking. Immediately after grout has had its initial set, give t ile wan surfaces protec1ive coat of non-corrosive soap. IV. CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORK A. MATERIALS 1. Quality of Lumber: Lumber shall be the approved quality of the respective k inds for the various parts of the work, well seasoned, thoroughly dry, and f ree from large, loose, or unsound knots, sups, shakes, and other imperfections impairing its strength, durability or appearance. All finishing lumber to be used shall be com pletely dried and shall not contain more than 14% moisture. All flooring, t ongue and grooved shall be kiln dried. 2. Treatment of the Lumber: a. All concealed lumber shall be sprayed with. anti-anay or bukbok liquid. b. Surface in contact with masonry and concrete coated with creosote or equivalent. 3. Door Sashes: All door sashes shall be well seasoned, flush type, semi-hollow core and solid core, tanguile plywood veneers on both sides. Exterior doors shall b e of kiln dried Tanguile panel doors. ""' 4. Kind of Lumber: All unexposed lumber for framings shall be of Apitong. All window and door jambs shall be of Apitong or Tanguile. Balcony railings, flooring, girder and joints shall be of S4S Yacal. All interior flooring shall be of Kiln dried T and G Tanguile. Living room wood panels at the second floor shall be of 1,. thick pinewood. Eaves shall be of kiln dried T and G Tanguile S4S. Exterior sidings shall be seasoned sun dried V-Cut Tanguile. B. WORKMANSHIP 1. Execute rough carpentry in best, substantial, workmen like manner. Erect framing true to line, levels and dimensions, squared, aligned, plumbed, well-sp liced and nailed, and adequately braced., properly fitted using mortise and tenon joists . 2. Millwork-accurately milled to details, clean cut moldings profiles, line s, scrape, sand smooth; mortise, tenon, splice, join, bl.ock, nail screw, bolt together, asapproved, in manner to allow free play of panels; avoid swelling, shrinkage, en sure work remaining in place without warping, splitting opening or joints. Do not i nstall mill work and case until concrete and masonry work have been cured .and will not release moisture harmful to woodwork . . 3: Secure work to grounds, otherwise fasten in position to hold correct surfa ces, lines and levels. Make finished work flat, plumb, true. V. ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES SCHEDULE A. FLOORING 1. All i n t e r i ~ r flooring shall be 1" x 4'" tongue and groove (T & G Ta

nguile, kiln dried) . . 341 2. Toilet floors shall be vitrified 4 1/4" x 4 1/4,. white or beige in col or, rnariwasa brand. 3. Balcony floors shall be of 1 x 4" Yacal set on a 1/4" open joint and nailed o n Yacal Floor joist. All balcony railings shall be Yacal. 4. Concrete Floor fronting the street shall be finished with 12" x 12" Vigan t iles with black pebb!e washout as border aft around. B. WALLING: 1. All interior partitions shall be of 1/4" x 4' x 8' plywood. Joints of partit ions shall have a V-Cut Joint. 2. Interior paneling of second floor living room shall be ,. .. x 8'" pine wo od: 3. Exterior walling shall be 1 .. x 6" V-cut tanguile. 4. CHB Walling shall be plastered and lined with 1/4 nail strip. 5. Toilet wall finish shaM be of 41 / 4" x 4 1/ 4" white glazed tiles. C. CEILINGS: 1. AJI interior ceilings shall be of 1/ 4" x 4' x 8' plywood with mouldings. 2. Outside ceiling eaves shalt be of 1" x 4* T and G Kiln dried tanguile, wit h ai r Vents covered with screen. D. DOORS 1. All interior, bedroom doors shall be hollow core flushed door using plywood veneer. 2. All toilet doors shall have one side using waterproofed plywood facing insid e. Bring float coat flush with screeds or temporary guide strips placed to give true and even surface at proper distance from the tile finished face. . 3. All exterior doors shall be solid panel. doors. E. WINDOWS: 1. All windows shall be steel windows casement and awning type with simple 1 /2" square wrought iron railings and secured with screen. 2. Other windows as indiCated in the plan shall be glass jalousie. 3. Glass and glazing: All windows shall be glazed on the outside with steel cas ement putty. Glass Shaft be puttied and face.:puttled in neat trim line manner, with steei glazing ships. Use 3/16" thick cleaner gJasa. 4. Provide louvers below the ceiling and wall partition of bedrooms withoot exterior window access. F. FINISHING HARDWARES: 1. Butt Hinges-unless otherwise approved, Use brass, polished and finely f inished, mortise ball bearings 5 knuckles, non rising loose pins as manufactured by S tanley or corbin for aU interior wood doors . Use one and one-half pairs (3 pes.) of hinges per leaf of doors more than 1.8> m high, loose pin butt for room doors, fixed pin butt for closets. C. LOCKSETS: 1. Cylindrical locks-all interior doors shall be equipped with high gr ade heavy or standard duty Cas required) cylindrical locksets. The mechanism shall b

e heavy gauge, cold rolled steel contained in sturdy cylindrical housing with all pa rts zinc plated and dichromated for maximum resistance against rust and corrosion. Expos ed parts shall be brass heavily plated as manufactured by schlage, yale or ap proved equivalent. 2. Keying and Keys-locks shall be keyed in sets and sub sets to provide maximum expansion. All sets shall be grand master keyed, and all entrance locks shall be great grand master keyed per unit. H. RIM BOLTS-Rim bolts and keeper shan be chrome f inish. I. DOOR BUMPERS-where vvooden doors shall strike an object during opening, p rovide door bumpers. J . Cabinet hinges shall be 'Washington" type or piano hinges heavily chrome or nickel plated. K. Cabinet and Closet catches shall be plastic roller types. L. Provide Yale door closets for all swing exterior doors. M. Provide heavy-duty head and foot bolt for the three (3; main entrance doors . VI. ROOFING AND TINSMITHING WORKS A. MATERIALS: 1. Roof Sheethlng -shatl be COfTUgatad galvanized Iron sheet guage 26. Gutters, downspouts and Flashings shall be of guage .26 plain G.l. sheets 343 344 8. INSTALLATION WORKMANSHIP: 1. Sheathing - layout the roofing sheets in a manner that the side overlap face s away from the prevailing wind. Provide less than 0.30 m develop on ends and not l ess than 1 1/2 corrugation on side laps on both sides. Secure the roofing sheets t o purfins by using G.l. rivets and 1" wide G.L Ties. 2. Gutter -a connection of gutters shall be made by using brass rivets and fully jointed by nikolite lead. Provide a minimum of 1% slope towards the downspout s. 3. Oownspout-shail be 2" x 4'" plain G.l. sheets or colored pvc pipe as approve d by the Architect. 4. Flashing -shall be plain G.l. sheet over corrugated roofing of not less than 0.30 overlap extend G.l. Flashing until it covers the top portion of the firewall . . VII. PLUMBING WORKS: A. GENERAL: 1. All work shall be done under the direct supervision of a licensed and in strict accordance with these specification and of the methods as prescnbed by the National Plumbing Code of the Philippines. B. MATERIALS: 1. Cast iron soil pipe for sewer and cement drainage pipes T and G AST M C-14 and ASTM-75 respectively.

2. Cast. iron sewer pipes and fittings-ASTM A-74 for soil, waste and vent pi pes. 3. Caulking lead-Federal spec. OQ-56 or epoxy mix A and B. 4. Bronze gate values- Federal spec. WW-V-58 . . 5. Galvanized iron pipes and fittings- Schedule 40for all hot and cold water lines. 6. Water Closet-Saniwares brand. All toilets shall be of ventura model or compton except the second floor owners toilet which shall be saternina or cad et type. Vitreous china " price pfister" angle valves. White in color. 7. Lavatories- Saniwares Ventura and Diana (or new comrade) vitreous China, com ptete with all chromard finish ''price pfistor". Fittings and accessories. 8. Kitchen Sink-Northern Hill Classic cast iron acid-resisting enamelled finish inside. With back complete with chromard finish U.S. fittings and accessories. 9 .. soap and Tissue holders-Vitreous China. 10. Towel bars and hooks-bras chrome plated. 11 . Drains: Ao0r drains shall be high grade strong, tough and even-grained met als with adjustable screwed cover nickel plated. 12. Showerhead and Valvea. For owner's toilet, use P.F. with "marquis" 3-velve divester. b. For other toilets-uSe shower head with plastic, -and 2-valve divester. C. ALTERNATE MATERIALS: 1. Alternate material allowed, provided such alternate is approved by Architect such as PVC pipes for sewer and drainage pipes. 2. Each length of pipe, fitting, trap, fixture and device used in plumbing sy stem shall have cast, stamped or indelibly marked on it, manufacturer's trademark or name weight, type and classes or product when so required. 0. INSTALLATION: 1. Install plumbing fixtures free and open to afford easy access for cleaning. 2. Install plumbing fixtures as indicated on furnishing ali br ackets, cleats, plates and anchors required to support fixtures rigidly in place. 3. Install all fixtures and accessories in locations directed in accordance wit h manufacturer's instructions, minimizing pipe fittings. 4. Protect items with approval means to maintain perfect conditions. Remov e work damaged or defective and replace with perfect work without extra cost to OWNER. 5. All G.l. soil and drainage shall have a minimum slope of 1 o/o. 6. Vertical pipes shall be secured strongly by hooks to building framing. Pro vide suitable bracket or chairs at the floors from which they start. Where an end or circuit vent pipe from any fixtures or line of fixtures is conne cted to a vent line serving other fixtures, connection shall be at least four (4) feet 1.20 M above floor in which fixtures are located, to prevent use of any vent line as a waste. Horizontal pipes shall be supported by well secured strap hangers. 7. Connection of water closets to soil pipes shall be made by means of flanged Plates and asbestos packing without use of rubber putty or cement.

8. Make all joints air and water-tight; for jointing pipes, the following sha ll be used. a. For bell and spigot jointed cast iron and wao;te pipes, cau!k with oakum o r jute and soft pig lead. b. Lead to cast iron pipes use brass ferrule wiped on lead side and caulked int o ball of cast iron soil pipe. c. Concrete pipes: bell and spigot ot tongue and groove use yarning matoria l and cement mortar. d. G.l. Pipes-Use Teflon Tape or white lead when tightening threaded joints. E. 1. Provide correctly located opening of proper sizes where required in walls an d floors for passed of pipes. 2. All times to be embedded in concrete shall be thoroughly clean and fr ee from all rust, scale and paint. 3. All changes in pipe sizes on soil, wash and drain lines shall be provjded w ith reducing fittings or recesses reducers. For changes in pipe sizes provide reducing f ittings. 4. High corrosive nature ground within site shall be taken into account b y plumber. Protective features shall be installed to prevent corrosion or all water pipes i nStalled underground. 5. Extend piping to all fixtures, outlets and equipment from gate valves instal led in the branch near the riser. 345 6. All pipes shatl be cut accurately to measurements, and worked into place w ithout springing or forcing. 7. Care shall be taken as not to weaker structural portion of the buildin9. VIII. ELECTRICAL WORKS 346 A. SCOPE OF WORK: 1. The work consist of furnishing of all materials and labor, tolls and equipme nt and aH necessary services to complete the electrical work ready for operation as shown in the drawings and specified as follows: a. Supply and installation of the main and sub-feeders from etectrical panelbo ards up to service entrance. b. Supply and installation of electrical panel boards, gutters, pull box and ac cesso nes box as required. c. Supply of wiring devices porcelain receptacles, outlets, switches, etc. com plete with suitable cover plates as per specifications. d. Supply and installation for all branch feeders circuits from panelboards up to all outlets; swltches, or other loads; other wiring as shown in plan. e. Installation of all owners fum,.hed materials such as lightings fixtures and electrical control.

f. Grounding system as per EE requirements. g. The contractor shall secure and pay for all electrical installation fees and permits, but Owner shall pay for the necessary deposit. B. CODES AND REGULATIONS: The Electrical work shall be done in accordance .with .all the requirements of the latest issue Philippine Eleotrical Code, with rules and regulations and Ordinances o f the local enforcing authorities of Baguio City and the requltements of the Local Power Com pany C. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFiCATIONS: 1. All installation shall be done in a work-manlike manner and shall include a ll necessary works that may not be clearly indicated in the plans or schematic but neces sary to attain the purpose or intent of the design scheme. 2. The plan indicate the general layout of the system and the location of outle ts are diagrammatic, and may be adjusted as required by the Architect before installat ion; 3. The contractor sha!l record all accomplishments as work progresses f n a set of records plan. Three (3) sets of as built drawings shatl be duly signed and seal ed by the of construction shall be submitted for the owners and Ar chitect's references and maintenahce purposes. D. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: All materials to be supplied shaH be new and of high quality suitable for the lo cation and . purpose. Materials shaU be standard products of reputabte manufacturers. E. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: 1. Power service: 115/230 volts, single phase, 3 wire solid neutral60 hert z._ . 2. Wiring methods: all power and control wiring shall be in rigid mild ste ei conduit. 3. Grounding: Panelboards, raceways, gutters, metallic conduits and other non-current carryi ng metal parts of .equipment, beaters, motor frames, shall be provided with eff ective grounding connection to a grounded cold centef pipt,. 4. Main and Branch Feeders: Conductors and complete conduit systems shall be provided as shown in drawings and no change, in sizes shall be made without approval by the Architec t or his authorized representative. 5. Panel Board: Furnish and installs the electrical panelboards as shown in plan. Disconnect swi tch es and magnetic starters shall be provided by motor equipment supplier. 6. Receptacles, swithces, Outlets: a. Provide as indicated in drawings, the switches and receptacles with proper c over plates. Switches shall be -of the quiet-matic type, - " NATIONAL'' or appro ved equal. b. Receptacles shall be duplex with proper cover plates, rated 10 amp. min . 250

V.A.C., "Eagle" or approved equal. c. Lighting outlet at ceiling shall be provided with 4" octagonal box ga. 18 min. Connections from fixtures to boxes''be nade by using TW wire C.HB in flexibte conduit. 7. Light Fixtures: a. All lighting fixtures shaH be furnished by owner and installed by the Co ntractor. Detail of fixture design when not standard shall be shown in the Archit ectural Drawings. b. Fluorescentifixtures if any shall be complete set with lamps and ballast of high quality, Philips G.E. Philec or approved equal. 8. Wires and Cables: a. Wires shall be Phelp Dodge, duraflex, Far East Wires or approyed equivalen t. b. No wires shal be drawn into. a raceway until it is complete with all necessar y fittings, boxes supports. Connections shall be securely fastened such as-not t o loosen under vibration and normal strain. All connections, splices shall be ma de with approved methods. ' IX. PAINTING WORK: A. SCOPE c WORK: 1. Consists of furnishing all items, articles, tools, equipment , labor scaffoldings, ladders, methods and other incidentals necessary and required fbr th e satisfactory completion ot the work. 347 348 2. covers complete painting and finishing of wood, plasters, concrete, metal or other surfaces exterior or interior of building. B. GENERAL PAINTING and Surface Finishing shall be interpreted to and sea,ers, primers, fillers, intermediate and finish coats, emulsions, varntsh, shellac, sta1n or enamels. 1 . All paint and accessOI)' materials incorporated in or ? hpart thher deoffb subject to the prior approval and selection for color, ttnt, f1ms _or s a e Y t e rchitect. 2. In with the Architect's determination of color or

of surface, the depth of any color or tint selected or required sha an no ms ance subject for an additional cost of the owner. 3. Painting of all surfaces, except as otherwise specified shall be three (3) coat work, one primer and a finish cost. C. MATERIALS: 1. All paint materials shall meet the requirements of paint materials under

classification class as prepared by the institute of Science, Manila, use "BOYS EN" or "Fuller" Paints or equivalent. 2. All paint shall be recommended by the manufacturer for use intended and shalt be delivered to the jobsite in original containers with seals unbroken and labe ls intact. 3. Painting materials such as Linseed oil, turpentine, thinners, shella c, lacquer, etc. shall be pure and of the highest quality obtainable and shall bear the manufactu rer's label on each container or package. 4. Except for ready mixed materials in original containers, ali mixing shall be done in the jobsite. No materials are to be reduced, changed or mixed except as specifie d by manufacturer of sa_id materials. 5. S.torage and Protection The resident Architect shall designate a place for the storage of pai nt materials it may be necessary to change this designated storage place, the contractor shall promptly more to the new location. The storage space shall be ad equate protected from damage and paint. Paint shall be covered at all times and safegua rds taken to prevent fire. D. MATERIALS: 1. All surfaces to be painted shall be examined carefully before beginn ing any work and see that all work of other trades or subcontractor's are installed in workma nlike condition to receive paint, stain or particular finish. 2. Before proceeding with aoy painting or finishing, thoroughly clean, sand, an d seal if necessary by removigg from all surfaces all dust, dirt, grease, or other foreign subStances which would affect eithAr the satisfactory execution or permanency of the work. Such cleaning of shall be done after the general cleaning executed under t he separate division of the work. . . .. 3. No work shall be done l.lnder conditions that are unsuitable for the p roduction of good results, nor at any time when the plastering is in progress or is being cu red, or not dry. 4. Only skilled painters shall be employed in the work .. All wo!i(mans hip shaH be executed in accordance with the best acceptable practices. 5. Finish hardware, lighting fixtures, plates and other similar items shall be removed by workmen skilled in these trades, or otherwise protected during painting operat i<>.ns and reposition upon completion of each space. 6. Neither paint nor any other finish treatment shall be applied over wet or damp sur-

faces. Allow at least two 121 days for drying preceeding coat before applying succeeding coat. 7. Begin work only when resident Architect has inspected and approved prepared s u r ~ face otherwise no credit for coat applied shall be given. The contractor shall as 8ume responsibility to recoat work in question. Noti.fv Architect when particular co at applied is complete, ready for inspection and approval. E. PREPARATION OF SURFACES: 1. For bricks, concrete, cement or concrete blocks; cut out scratches, cracks abrasion in plaster surfaces, openings and adjoining trim as required. Fill flu stl adjoining plaster surface. When dry; and smooth and seal before priming coat application. 2. Tint plasterpriming coat to approximate shade of final coat. Touch up sectio n spots in plaster or cement after first coat application, before applying second coat, to produce even result in finish coat. Secure color schedules for rooms before pr iming walls. 3. In cases of presence of high alkali conditions, neutfalize surfaces by washing with zinc sulphate solution (3 pounds to a gallon of water). Allow to dry th oroughly, brush free of crystals before priming. 4. Prime with mixture of equal parts by volume ot l & S Portland cement paint and 5244 improved Alkali proof. seal or its equivalent as may be approved by the Archi tect. 5. Brush one or more finish coats of l & S thinned if necessary with mineral spirits or turpentine. F. WOODWORK TO BE PAINTED: 1. Touch up knots, pitch, streaks, sappy spots with shellac. 2. Do necessary puttying of nail holes, cracks etc. after first coat with putty of color to match that of finish. Bring putty with adjoining surface in neat, wotkmanlike m a n ~ ner. 3. Wipe paste wood fillers, applied in open grain wood, when "set", across wood grain. Then with grafn to secure clean surface. 4. Cover surfaces to be stained with uniform stain coat. 5. Tiny undercoats of paint and enamel to same or approximate coat shade. 6. Sand smoothly woodwork to be finished with enamel or vamishi clean surface before proceeding with first coat application. Use fine sand paper between coats on enamel or varnish finish applied' to wood to produce even .smooth finish. 349 350 G. VARNISHING: 1. Sand wood surfaces with fine grade sand paper. 2. Wipe duSt off with ct8an Cloth dampened with lacquer. ininner 3. Apply wood filler as per manufacturer's specifidations. 4. Apply approved stain in uniform .coats until desired shade is achieved.

5. Apply finish coat as per manufacturer's specifications. X. FIRE CODE REQUIREMENTS AU interior wooden structures shall be applied with resistA-Fiame Fire Retar dant solution applied as per manufacturer's specifications. All other requirement as of the fi re code of the Philippines as far as they relate to this project shall likewise be complied wit h. GEORGES. SAL VAN Architect ' . BIBLIOGRAPHY. Materials of ConstJuction . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . Smith, Ronald E & V Far East Trading .. .. .. . . . ... . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. .. Brochure Campos Rueda ................. ; . .. . . .. .. . . .. . ... . .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brochure Republic Glass Corpc:ntion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brochure Milwaukee International Marketing Inc. . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . . Brochure Johns Manville (Membranetype) .. .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. .. . . . .. .. .. . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . . Brochure Weatherkote-Shel .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .... .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . Brochure Cemvathane Membnll1e ..... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brochure Chevron S.F. U.S.A. ........................................................... . Brochure Mutytan Paste ................................... :. . .. . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. .. Brochure Metat Forming Corporation . .. .. . .. .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . Brochure Etemit Corporation ............................................................ . ~ . Brochure Phitsteel Corp. .............................................. ................ ....... Brochure Metal Forming Corporation .. . .. . . . . .. . .. .. .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . Brochure ERA Industries Inc. . .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. .. Brochure Sunset . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. .. .. . . . . .. .. . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. .. . . . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . . . . . . Magazine Practical Electricity .. .. . .. . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . . Audels Mechanical and Electrical Equipments for Buildings 6th Edition . . . . . . . . . Me Guinness, Stein, Reynolds Sinclair Paints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prod uct Catalogue Sherwin-Williams . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. .. . . Product Catalogue Boysen Paints .. .. . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. .. Product Cat8/ogue Dutch Boy Paint . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . Product Catalogue Fuller Paints . . .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . . Product Catalogue

Stenrnan, A-8, U.S.A............................................................ . Catalogue EFCO Manufacturing Com. Pty. LTD. . . . . . ... ... ... . . . . . . .... . . . .. . . . . .. .. . . Catalogue American Hardware Corp., California .. .. . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. Brochure Shell Philippines ............... :. . . .. .. . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. .. Brochure 3 5 ~ 352 A Accelerators .. .. . ... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. ........ ... , . . . . . . 5 Accordfon door ... ......... .. .. .. .. ............ .. . ... 162 Acoustical board . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Acoustical tiles . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . 274 Adhesion types .. .......... .. . ... ... , .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Acrylic floorfinish . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 128 Air drying .. .. . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . 36 Air-entraining agents . .................. ....... . ... 5 Aggregates used in concrete . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Aluminum . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .... ... . .. , .. . . . 83, 61, 298 Alkyd paints . . . . . . .. .. . . . .. . . .. . ... . .. . .... . . . . . . . . . 133 Alloy Steels . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Aluminum shingles . . . . . . .. . . .. ... .. . . . . ... . . . . . . 290 Aluminum siding . . . . ... . ... . . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . 260 "Anav" proofing . .. . .. .. ... . .. .. . ........ .... ... .. .. 117 AnchOJ type .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . 265 Animalglue ....... ....... ... .. .. ... ......... ......... 78 Architecturallamp.. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . .. .. . . 217 Ardex lightweight corrugated sheets . . . . . ... . ... 298 Artificial stone veneer . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Asbestos... . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . 90 Asbestos-cement sheeuoofing . . . . . . . . . ... . . .. . . 298 Asbestos-cement-siding and siding shingles .. . ...... ..... ........ ..... ... 259, 289 Asbestos fittings . . .. .. ... .. . .. .. .. . .. ... . . .... . . .. .. 196 Asbestos pipe .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. ... ... . . .. . . ... . . ... . . 196 Aspt\alts .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . 52 Asphalts, cement .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . 78 Asphah paving ument ......... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Asphalt shingles ..... ....... . ......... ... , .. .. .. .. 288 Asphaltic mastic flooring .. .... ........ :.. .. .. .. . .. . 232 Asphal1ic tiles.............. .............. .............. 233 Automatic door closer ..... ....... .. ...... .. 178 B

Balloon type ceiling . . . .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 255 Banauedesign .............. ....... ...... . ........... 304 Barrelbolt ...... ........ .............. ... ...... ........ 173 Batts ......... .... ..... ............ .... .... ... ........... 88 Bibrous loose fill . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 187 Bi-folding door .. ........ ". ... .. ... .... .. .. ........ 163 Blanket insulation .................... , .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 87 Block flooring.. .. ....... .... ...... .... . .. .............. 224 Block or rigid slab insulation .. ,.. .. ...... ...... . .... 88 Blood-aluminum gule ....... ............ .. .. . .. ... . 78 Blow moulding process . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 72 Board and bettens ...... .. .. .. . .. . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 260 Bolts and nuts .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . 59, 170 Bonding agents ..... ................ ...... , .. .. .. . .. . 7 Bored lock .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 176 Bored latch........ ...... .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. .. .. . . . . 177 Bowl .. ......... ......................... ........ ........ 206 INDEX Bracket ........ .... ... .. ... ........ .. .. ............ ... 186 Brick.. .... ...... ............... ..... .... 242,264, 229, 16 Brick veneer . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. ... .. . .. .. .. 258 Brick bonds ... .. ..... .. . .... .. . .. ... .. .. .... . .. .. .. 17 Brick texture .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. . ... .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16 Bright plate. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2fJ7 Building boards, stone ........... ...... .. , .. .. . 42, 24 Bullet latch .. .. .. . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. 187 Built-up roofing .. .... .. ....... ....... ........ .... . .... 300 Bumpers........ .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Bush-hummer .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. ... ... .. .. .. .. . .. 266 Bush-hummer concrete ... .. ....... .. ... , .. .. .. . .. 268 Bushhummerfinish ... ......... .. ..... ..... .. .... .. 268 But hinge .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 164, 18 1 By-passing sliding door ........... , .. .... .. ...... ..... 163 c Cabinet doors. . . .. . ...... .. .. .... . .. .. ..... ....... . .. .. 100 Calendaring process ... .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... ..... ... .. 73 Casein glue .. .. .... .......... . .. .. .... ............ 78 Cast iron pipes and fittings . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 190 Cast stone .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . 10 Casting ........ ..... ..... .. ......... . . .. .. ... .. .. ... 73 Cathedral and figured glass .... .... ... .. ... ..... .. . 65 Ceiling board .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. ...... .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 2 78 Cellular glass insulation...................... ... . .... 89 Cellular concrete blocks .. ............... ,. ... . .... 11 Cellulose cement .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. ... 78 Cement tile .......... .. .. ............ ..... .. . .. .. . . . .. .. 226 Cements......... .......... .. ............ .... .. ......... 2 Cemvathene brand .. .. ....... . .... ... ...... , . .. .. . 101 Ceramic mosaic . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . 244 Ceramic veneer .. .. .. . .. .... . .. . .. .... . .. .. .. .. . 264: 21 Ceramic wall tile.... .... .... .... ... .. .... ........ ..... 244 Chain door fastener .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . 173 Chesterton descaler and chemical cleaner .... .. t'lfJ Chesterton paintstripper .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. 12JJ Chesterton urethane enamels ..... ....... .. ... ... . 128 Chipboard ........ ........ .................. . ...... ... . 46 ChiOi'inated-rubber adhesive ..... .. ............ .. 78 CIM ............ ....... ....... . ............ ........ ..... . 110 Clear silicone water repellant .. .. ....... . ... .. .. . . li6 Clover design .. . .... .... ........ .. ...... .. .. ..... . ... . . 223 Coal tar pitch .. . .... .... .... .............. , ........ .. . . 52 Cold galvanizing compound ............. .... ...... . 124 Cold-rolled sheets . ............. .. ....... ... .... .. .. .. 56 Color coding . ..... ....... .............. .. ... ... , . .... . 195 Colored concrete floOJs ............... ......... .. . 22S Colourless ...... .... ...... ... . ..... .... ...... ...... .. .. 1.20 COITIPI'essive molding ....... .. ........ . ...... .. .. . . 73 Compressive strength test ......... ............. .. 4 Concrete block ... .. ................... .. ........ . .. .. 9 Concrete colouring agents ............. . ...... .. .. 7 Concrete floor slab . .. .. . .. .. .. . . ........ .. .... .. . 224 Concrete form paper .. ... , .................. . ....... . 50 1 ~ . Concrete roofing tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Concrete milces . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . .. . . . 62 Concrete water proofers . ...... ....... .. ... . .... . :. 6 Conduit fittings . ... . . .. . . . .. .. . .... .... . ... . ..... .... . 215 Consuuction equipments .......... .... . .. 12 Control projectand manage .... ... . ... 129 Convenience outlet s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Copper . . . . . . . . . . ... . .. . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . 56 , 62, 297 Cork board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 47 Cone tile flooring . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . 236 Corrugated asbestos (4-VI . .. . .. . . .. .. .. ... .. .. . 299

Corrugated glass . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . ... . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Corrugated plastic sheet ... ...... . .. . . .. . . 303 Curtain wall . .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .... .. .. . . .. .. ..... 2 73 Cushioning paper .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . 49 D Damproofers .. .. ............ ... .. ... .. .... ... ... ..... 6 Decorative or architectural glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Decking .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. 286 Dispersal agents .. .. . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. 5 Door stoppers .. .. .. .. . .. . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . . . . .. .. .. . . . . 188 Driers .... . . ........... . .. ....... .. ....... ...... . 132 Dry-standpipe system .. ............ .. ... .. .. .. . .. .. 122 Dutch door ............. .... ................... .. .... . ... 164 E Elastomark product .... .... .. .. . ........ .... ........ 103 Elastomastics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Elastomers .. ................... .... .. .. .. ...... .. ...... 82 Electrical wires ......... ................. ........ .. .. . 216 Enamels . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 136 End matching... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 English bond .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . 243 Envelope paper ........... .... ... .. .. ..... ... .. ... .. .. 50 Epoxy-resin formulation .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .... . .. 81 EpoxyresinL . .. ........ : ............... .. ......... 79,235 Estimated qualities of material$ required . . . . . . 106 Estimates .............. .. ............ .. ... ......... ... 307 Expandable bead molding ........ ...... -.. .......... n Exterior & interior painting .... .. .. .......... . ..... 145 Extefior painting .... .. ... ... ...... .. ......... .. .... . 139 Exteriorbrown ....... ............... ........... ,..... 120 Extrusion forming . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .... .. .. ... .. .. 73 Eyeandturnbuckle .. .. . .... .. ................ ...... 172 F Fastpinhinge ............... ..... .......... .... ........ 165 Ferrous ........... ............ ......... .......... ...... 56 Fiber glass .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 273 Fire IJroofing .. ...................... ...... .. .... .. .... 121 Fire proofing paper .. . .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. ...... ...... 50 Flemish bond ........ .... ... , ...... .. .. ..... .... ...... 243 Float glass .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. 64 Flocculate .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. . .. . 5 Floorsealer.............. .. .. ........... ... . . . . .. . 121 Floor varnishes .............. ...... .. .......... ....... 134 Fluid .. .. .. .. .... ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. ................... !16, 102 Flush counter hinge .......................... ... _.. . 184 Flush bolt ....... ...... .... .. ..................... ..... 173 Flush door ................ ............ ----.. .. ........ 18> Foamed-in-place insulat ion .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 90 Foamed plastics.......... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 73

French door .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. 1 64 Friction latch .. . ...... ................. -............. 184 Full surface . .. .. .. .... .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . 166 Functional blocks .... ..... .. ..... ..... .. ... ..... .... 68 Fuses ....... .......... .... ... ... ...... . .. ... ...... . ... . 214 G Galvanized iron protection system .. .. . . .. 123, 125 Galvanized metal water tanks .. .. .. .. .. . .. 125 Galvanized sheet metal .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . . 252 Galvanized steel pipe fittings .. .. .... ... ... .. . 199 Galvanizedsteel ..... ... .. .. .. ... ...................... 294 Galvestos .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. 298, 263 Garden wall . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . 243 Gas forming agents .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . 8 Glass.......... ..................... ...... ..... 64,251,268 Glass blocks .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 68 Glass roofing .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 303 Glazed tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Glazed tile accessories .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . 244 Glue laminated lumber .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. . . 37 Glues .. ...... . .. .. ......... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ........ 78 Glue uses In laminating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Grab bar .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. . .. .. ... .. . . . 186 Grande series (vitrif ied tiles I ............ .... ........ 227. Granules . .. . .. . . .. .. . . . . . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .... .. .. .. .. . . 87 Gypsum.. ............. ...... ......... . . ....... . 241 , 46 Gypsum .... ....... ................. :.. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . 29 precast wall panels ...... . ... ..... .. ....... 31 GY!M!Um tile .. ... ........... ...... ........... ....... ... 30 H Hand split and resawed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '1Jf7 Hard board ... .... .'........ .. ... ........ .. .. . .. .. 44, 248 Hard board siding . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . . 268 Hardwood .. ... .. ......................... ...... . 248,34 Hardeners ..... ........ .......... ..................... . 5 Hasp ...................... ............................. 1n Hasp lock ............. . ..................... .. .. ...... 1n Heat absorbing plate glass . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. 66 Heavy sheet glass . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 67 Hexagonal random . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. 223 Hinges for cabinets ... .. .. .. .. . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . 181 Hook and eves ..... .... .... .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 187, 172 arm pull .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... ... .. .. . 187 Injection molding process. ..................... .... . . n Integral type ... : .......... ..... .. .... ... ..... . "...... 95 Interior worl< (painting 1.. ...................... 147, 153 Intumescent paint ......... .. .. ......... . ........... .. 133 lnsutating fiber board ......... .. , .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. 46 Insulating fiber board siding.. .... ............... . 261 Insulating glass . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 6 7

Insulating paper.. ..... ........... .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. 49 Invisible hinges .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . 183 J Joinery brackets ........ ............ ........ ....... _ 171 Junction boxes .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. 213 353 K Kalantaa . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 299 Kev pedloctt .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. 1n Kiln-drying .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. . . . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . . . . :rJ Knobs .... ................ ............................... 185 L Lacquers .. ... .. .... .. . ............ .. ,... .. ....... ....... 135 Laminating paper .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . 49 Laminating process .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 73 Laminated safety glass . .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 66 354 Latch ... .. .... ..... ...... .... .... .... ...... .. .. .. ..... .. 174 Lavatories .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 206 lead .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . '191. 62 lift latch . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ....... .. .... ....... .... .. ... 175 Ught diffusing block .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. 68 light direction block .. ....... . .. ... .... . .. ... . .... .. 68 Lignin .. ..... ...... .... ...... .... . .... ..... ... .. ... ...... 44 Limplt $PT8Y .. . . .. .. .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . 2n Linoleum,.. .. ................ . .... ... ..... .......... .. .. 236 Linseed oil ..... ... .. .. .... .. .. .. :. :.. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. 8 2 liquid asphalt. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. 80 Liquid fillet .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. 137 Liquid paving asphalt .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . 53 Liquid plastic ............. . ......... ... .. ... .. .... ..... 303 Liquid silicones . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . . . . .. .. . . . .. .. . . lockeet .. .. .. ....... ..... .. ... .. ...... .. .... .. .... ..... 174 logs ............ ...... ... ..... ..... ...... .... .... .. .... 269 Long span roofing .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . '194 Loose fill . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. . . . . 86 Loose joint hinges .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. 166 Loose pin hinge .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . 16 6 luminescent paint.. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 133 M Magnetic latch . . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . 184 MaGnetic padlock .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . ... . . ... . .. . .. 1n Magnesite flooring .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 235 Manganese steel . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . 16

Marble . .. ...... .. .. ... ... .. .. .... ..... .... ............... 237 Marine and spar varnish .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . 134 Mariwasa products .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 231 Mas1ics .. .... ... ... . ...... ... ... ... .. .. .. ...... .. ...... . 82 Mastic compound .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . 82 Melamine resins .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. 19 Membfane types ... .... ......... ..... ..... :.. . .. . .. . 96 Metal . .'. : .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . 261 Metal wall . .. .. ... .. . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. . . 273 Metallic paint... .. .. ....... .... ..... .... ..... .... ...... 133 Melano design .... . .'.. ...... .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. 303 Mineral fiber .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. 273 Mineral fibefground .. .. ...... , .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. 48 Mocfrfied natural .................... ....... ......... 135 Moisture wood . ... ....... . . ...... .. .... .... . : .. .. .. .. 35 Monel mecal . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. Z!1 Mortar bond 18 N Nails ......... ... ...... .. ...... .. .... .. .. ....... .... .. .. lEIS Natural-resin varnishes ...... ... .. .. .. .... .. . . ....... 134 Natural rubbetadhesives ... ... .. .... .. ......... :: .. 18 Natural stone veneer.. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 258 Neoprane:.robber adhesive , .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . 19 Nidc.le stHI .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . .. .. 56 Night latch ...... ..... .'................... .... .... ....... 174 Nitrile or buna N rubber adhesive . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. 78 Non-ferrous metals .. .. . .. ..... :. .. .. .. . . . .. .. .. . .. . 253 Non grain-raising stains ...... .. .. , . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 136 Non-skid .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 81, 235 Nuts ... ......... .. ........ .. .. .... . ..... .... .... .. ... .. 170 0 Offset hinges .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .... .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . 181 Oil paint .. . ... . .. . ... .. ... . .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. ... ... ... 132 Oils and turpentines .. ......................... .... .. 81 Olive knuckle hinge . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. ... . . . . .. . ... .. 166 Open web steel joints .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . 59 Ovemead rolklp garage door . .. . ... .. ... .. .. . .. . . 162 Overhead swing. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 p Paints .. ..... .. .. .... .... . .. .. .. .. .. ......... 132, 157,254 Panel door ..... ... .. ..... .... ...... ... ....... .. . ...... . 161 Panic exit device . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 187 Pans and domes . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. Paper board . . . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . 47 Paper holder ... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. ....... ....... ... ..... .. Parquet flooring .. .. .. .. .... :.. ... ..... .. .. ..... ...... . Particle board....... .... ..... . .... ..... .... ...... .. .... 46 Paste fillers .. .... .... .. .. ...... . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 .. 60 . . . .. . 210 2.23 . . . . .

Pneumelle hinge .. .... . .. .. .. :.. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . .. 166 Pebble, washout .... . .. . .. .. .. .. . ............ 236, 247 Penetrating oil stains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Picture glass .. .. .. .. .... .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . 87 Pigment . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . . 132 Pigment wiping stains . .. ... .. ... : .. .. .. . . .. . .. . .. .. 137 Pitches .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . 52., 284 Pivot hinges .. .. .. ..... .... .... .. .... ...... . .. .. 182, 167 Plain concrete wall . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. 246 Place ondula .. .... .......... .... .. ....... ... :.. .... ... 299 Plasters .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . . .. 29 Plastic$ . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 72., 253, 268, 82, 303 Plastic fittings .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. 196 Plastic foamboards .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . 48 Plastic pipes . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. 125 Plastic roofing .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 3 Plastic terrazo .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 2 35 Plate glass . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 64 Plywood . .. ... ... .... . .... ....... .. ....... .. ... ... 240,248 Plywood exterior finish .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 261 . Polybutylena fitting IP. e I .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 196 Polyvinyl chloride fittings I P .V .C.I ... .. . .. .. . .. 196 Polyvinyl-resin adhesives ....... . .. ... ....... ...... , 19 coatings .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 134 Polyethylene film .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. 114 Polyerethanefloorvamistl .. .... .... .. .. ... :.. .... 12B Polysutfide polyrned .... .. .. .. ....... .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .... .... .... ............. ... . 213 admixtures .. ..... ... . ........... .. : .. .. . 9 Pnenolic Resin glues........... .. .. .. .... .. .... ... ... 79 Precast facing slabs .. ... ... .. ...... ........ .. .. .. . .. 10 Precast concrete ..... ........... , .. . .. .. .. . .. . 266, 247 Precast n0081<id concrete .. .... .. .... : . .. . , . . . . . . . . . 225 Pre-1uated lumbef .. .. .. . .. . .. ..... . .. ... .. . .. .. .. . .. . 121 . Price list ............. . .. ..... .. . . .. . . . . . . 114 Products name interior and exteriof paint . .... . 138 Projection bricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Prop8tler oupid&r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . 223 Properties of wood .... .. .... ...... :............... 42 Properties o'f caulking materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Plywood ... .... ....... .. .... ..... ... .... ... .. .... ... .. .. 42 ' Pulls .. ............. . ..... ..... . ... . ............... ... . 186 a . Quarry tiles ................. . .. ......... ..... ...... .. .. 228 R Rabbeted lock .. . .. .. . ... .... . .. ...... ... . .. ... . .... . 175 Random design . . . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . ..

. 223 Random finish .. . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. 226 Rat-proofing .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . . 123 Rattrap bond .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. 2 43 Reflective glass .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 64 Reflective insulation .. . .. . .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. Regular hollow blocks .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 246 Reinforcing steel . . . .. .. .. .. . . . . . . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. 58 Rentc)l(il termite proofing ... .. . . . . . . .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. . Resilience .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . 222 Resilient flooring . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. 6 Resin ...... ....... ........ ........ .............. .. ...... 133 RMOI'cinol resins .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. 79 Retarders .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 5 Revolving door ..... ........... :.. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . 163 Rigid insulation .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. 9 ............. ..... .. ....... ..... ........ .... . .. . 162 Rolled roofing .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . 89 . 119 .. 23

.. .. 8 302

Rolled and rough cast glau .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. 65 Rolled structural shapes . .... .... .. .......... .. .... fil Roller latch ...... ................................. . , . . .. 176 Root stylet; .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . . 282 Roof slopes in run, rise .. .. . ..... ... .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. 284 Roofing papers .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 48 Roofing tilts .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. 96 Rotation of molding .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. 72 Rubber flooring .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. 2 36 Rust-proofing. ...... .. .... .. ............. .. . 123 s Sandblasting ........ .. .. .... .. , .. .. .. . .. . . . . .. .. .. . .. . 24 7 Saturated felts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Sawlli or chevron .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. . .. .. 224 Screws ...... .................... ..... ......... ........ 189 Screen door latch .. .... ........... : ................. : tn Sealers .. .. ...... .... .... . .. ........ .. .. ...... .. ... . 79, 137 Semi-vitrified .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. 228 Sempura tile .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 300 Set-inhiting agents . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. 7 Sheeting........ ..... . ........ ..... .... ........ ......... 285 S"-t glass ..... ..... .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. . . . . 64 ....... roofing ........ ........ ...... .... ... .... 293

Sheet ping .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 5 7 Sheet steel .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . S> Shellac ........ .............. ...... . ................ ... 135 Shop lumt. .. .. ... .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .... .. .. .. . .. 36 sna--...- .................... . : .. .. ....... .. ..... .. 210 ....... ... ........... ... ...................... .. Sliding cabinet doors ................... ......... .. Sliding door ................ ......... ............... .. Sliding door tracks ... .... .......... ........... ... .. Sliding pocket door ......... .... .. ...... ........... . Sopa holders ............... ........ ......... ........ .. Sockets ....... ............ ................. .......... .. Sodium silicate, adhesives .. .............. ...... .. Soft wood ................... .. ... ...... :........ 34, Solid glass brick . .. .. .... .... .. ... .. ... . .... .......... . Solidwood ....... .... ....... .... .......... ........... . 137 184 163 UKI 164 210 214 79 222 68 240 Solignum .. .................... ....................... 120 Special cast iron fittings . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 194 Specifications when buying lumber .. .. .. .. .. .. 37 Specifications sample form.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Speclticalions for 3-ply 15 lbs. asbest06 felt on asbestos cement for con<:rete gutter .................. .. .................. ....... 98 Specification for footing ........ ...... ............ : .. .. .. .. . 99. 100, 98 Specification tor concrete tank ........ ..... 101, 110 Sprayed-on acousticalt"l'l<lterials .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. 276 Spraytex . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. 251 Spring hinge$.... ...... ...... ..... .. .. ..... ............ 166 Spring door closer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 SprinldM syst"em .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 121 Stack bond....... .... ........ .. . .. .. .. .. .... ......... .. 243 Stains ......... _....... .. ....... .... ...... ... ...... ....... 136 Stainless steel .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . . 252, 273, 247 Staples .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 168 Starch and dextrin glues.... ........... ............ ... 78 Star diamond .. .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 224 Star red design .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. ..... 22;J Steel ..... .. ............ . ....................... 252; 29i(W Steeipipe ...... .............. ............. : ........... fil Steel strapping ........ ... ..... . ... ................. .. ... ... 59 Steel studs .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. 60 Steel wire .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. ..

.. . 59 Stones .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 46, 25 Straight split shakes ... .... Straw board .. .. .. .. .. .. 8 Strip flooring ...... .. ....

.. .. . .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2 .. . .. .. .. ..... ............ 288 . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . 88, 4 .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. . 222

Stucco ......... ............ .... ... ....... ...... ..... .. 256 Structural insulation board .. .. . .. .... .. .. .... ... .. 88 Strucrurallumber ...... ... ............. ....... .... .. 36 Surface bolt . .. . . .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. . . . . 173 Surface sealing agents .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . 8 SuSDended ceiling . ... ..................... ........... 272 Switches.. . ...... ... . .. ... ... ..... ... . ... .. .... . .. .. .... 212 Switch box .. .. ....... ...... ...... ............. . .. ... ... 216 Swinging door .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. 161 Synthetic .... ................. , . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 247, 2fj} Synthetic plastic products . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 181 Synthetic-resin varnishes ... . .. .. ........ .... . . . . . . . 136 T Taper split ............................................. 'JH7 Tar .... .... ......... ...... .... .. .... .............. .... ... 52 Tempered plate glass .. . .. .. .. .. . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 66 Tennis Court surfacing ........... ................... 127 Temaplate .................................... .._ .... :.. 2fij7 T&rracotta .................. ........ .... 264,290,259 Terranoflooring .... ...... , ... ...... ..... ........... 233 355 356 Thermal insulation........ .......................... 86 Thermosetting plastics .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. 72 Thin solution ofanimal . .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. 81 Thinner .............................................. :. 132 Thoroseal .............. ,.............................. 113 Threaded rod .................... :.............. . . .. . . 188 Tile . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . 18, 204 Tower. rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 210 transfer molding ................. :.. .. .. . .. 73 u Unglazed1ile .. .. . . . . . . . . . ... .. . .. .. 226 Unit of measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Urea formal-dehyde resin glues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 v Vaporbarriers ............. .. Vapor barrier paper .. .. .. . .. .. .... .. Vitreous colored plate ............................ . Vitrified clay pipes ............................. . Vitrified floor tiles ...................... . Vinyl ...................... : ................ 234, 235, 114 49 66 197 '27 303

w Wallcovering .......................................... 249 Wallroof ................................................ 255 Wallpaper ....................................... 50,249 Washers ................................................ 170 Washout finishes .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 267 Water closets.......................................... 204 Water proofing treatment... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Water plug . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . . . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . 112 Water saver .... ........ ................ ... .. ......... 111 Water soluble stains . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 136 Water reducing admixtures .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. 6 Wax compounds .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. . 80 Wears creed . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 126 Weatherkote ............................... 103,105 Weathering steel . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . 56 Welded wire fabric .......................... ....... 58 Windowglass ....................................... 67 Wired glass . ......... ............ . . ......... 65,301 'td .................. .. ......................... 34 Wooapreservation ............................. 119 '.,od shakes, -.. 262, 286, 287 ,.._. : '' . ;; :' .. .. .. .... .. .. . .. .. .. . '240 i;r;-.r: ............ -.. .. .. .. . 260 . -: ..... !'' -.-...... . . . . . . .. ... 248 Wrought iron...... ........ .... ....... .... 56